URS Specs

Durrat Marina Al Bahrain
Phase 1 Infrastructure Package

Volume 3 - Specification
Tender
June 2011
Prepared for
Marina Durrat Al Bahrain for Development Real Estate Co.
INDEX OF TENDER DOCUMENTS
Volume 1 – Contract Particulars From page To page
Section 1 – Instructions to Tenderers 1-1 1 - 16

Section 2 – Form of Tender 2-1 2-3
Schedule of Appendices 2-4 2-5
Appendix A – Appendix to Form of Tender 2-6 2-7
Appendix B – Form of Agreement 2-8 2-9
Appendix C – Form of Tender Bond 2 - 10
Appendix D – Form of Performance Bond 2 - 11
Appendix E – Form of Advance Payment Guarantee 2 - 12 2 - 13
Appendix F – Site Inspection Declaration 2 - 14
Appendix G – Environmental, Health and Safety Manual Declaration 2 - 15
Appendix H – Contract Report 2 - 16
Appendix I – Contractor’s Project Staff 2 - 17
Appendix J – Assignment or Sub-Letting 2 - 18
Appendix K – Schedule of Equipment 2 - 19
Appendix L – Proposed Construction Method and Source of Major Materials 2 - 20
Appendix M – List of Drawings 2 - 21
Appendix N – Programme 2 - 22
Appendix O – Organisation Chart 2 - 23
Appendix P – Manpower for Project 2 - 24
Appendix Q – QA/QC Procedure 2 - 25
Appendix R – Current and Valid Trade Licence 2 - 26
Appendix S – Site Handover 2 - 27
Appendix T – Site Logistics Proposal 2 - 28
Section 3 – Conditions of Contract 3-1 3 - 69
Volume 2 – Breakdown of Lump Sum From page To page
Section 1 – Measurement Preambles 1/1 1/20

Section 2 – Breakdown of Lump Sum
Breakdown 1 – Preliminaries 1/1 1/26
Breakdown 2 – Site Clearance and Preparation 2/1 2/3
Breakdown 3 – Roadworks 3/1 3/22
Breakdown 4 – Foul Sewage Network 4/1 4/10
Breakdown 5 – Potable Water 5/1 5/14
Breakdown 6 – Surface Water Drainage 6/1 6/11
Breakdown 7 – 11kV Distribution 7/1 7/52
Breakdown 8 – LV Cable Distribution 8/1 8/9
Breakdown 9 – Telecoms Containment 9/1 9/20
Breakdown 10 – Street Lighting 10/1 10/8
Index - 1
Volume 2 – Breakdown of Lump Sum From page To page
Breakdown 11 – Irrigation Mains Installation 11/1 11/12

Breakdown 12 – Provisional Sums 12/1 12/1
Breakdown 13 – Dayworks 13/1 13/6
Breakdown 14 – Final Summary 14/1 -
Volume 3 – Specification From page To page
Section 1 – Scope of Works 1/1 1/11

Section 2 – General Specifications 2/1 2/97
Section 3 – Technical Specifications 3/1 3/118
Volume 4 – Drawings From page To page
The Drawings as listed in Appendix M
URS Scott Wilson

Euro Tower, Office 31
Building 485, Road 1010
Sanabis 410
PO Box 18378, Manama
Kingdom of Bahrain
This bid submission is for the sole and confidential use of the addressee. Any technical
information provided by Scott Wilson Ltd in this bid submission should be used only for Tel +973 1755 6634
the purpose of enabling the addressee to consider the merits of the bid as a whole and
whether the addressee wishes to employ Scott Wilson Ltd to carry out the work for which Fax +973 1755 0151
this bid submission is intended. Scott Wilson Ltd accepts no liability for any use of this bid
submission other than by the addressee and only for the above purpose.
© Scott Wilson Ltd 2010

www.urs-scottwilson.com
Index - 2
Section 1
Scope of Works
The Contractor should refer to the General Requirements within Section 2 for further information
relating to the scope of works.
Table of Contents
1 Location............................................................................................. 1
2 Access to the Site............................................................................. 2
3 Work in Progress .............................................................................. 3
4 4.0 Phasing........................................................................................ 4
5 Programme........................................................................................ 5
6 Work Packages ................................................................................. 6
7 Adoption ............................................................................................ 7
8 Primary Roads and Utilities Network Scope .................................. 8
1 Location
1.1 Durrat Marina is situated on the south east coast of Bahrain and is the northernmost
area of the Durrat Al Bahrain projects, comprising of 48 hectares of reclaimed land
and will incorporate a community of approximately 20,000 people and will include
offices, retail residential, commercial premises and a yacht club and marina. The
location plan can be found in Section 2 Appendix 1
Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Volume 3 Section 1 - 1
2 Access to the Site

2.1 Access to the site will be via a temporary causeway which has been put in place as
part of the reclamation works. Access to the causeway will be via a single
carriageway provided by the developers of the adjacent Durrat Golf Course Project.
The causeway will span the channel between the two projects (Marina and Golf
Course) to the main Durrat Al Bahrain roundabout (see Appendix 1 – Location Plan).
2.2 The Contractor shall also allow for adapting the temporary access roads provided by
the Employer as necessary and all necessary diversions of the temporary access
roads to allow the proper installation of the permanent road network and the proper
installation of the power, water, irrigation, sewerage and data/telecoms and other
utility installations.
2.5 The Contractor shall also form and maintain continuous earth bunds, or equivalent
barriers, at the edges of the temporary access roads provided by the Contractor to
ensure containment of traffic on the temporary access roads.
2.6 The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing, maintaining and removing on
completion all necessary traffic management measures, lighting, signage and road
markings necessary for the safe use of the temporary access roads provided by the
Contractor.

3 Work in Progress
3.1 Dredging and reclamation works for the Durrat Marina project are complete

4 4.0 Phasing
4.1 Durrat Marina primary infrastructure networks has been divided into four phases,
Phases 1 – 4. Phase 1 is shown on the phasing plan within the General
Requirements, Section 2, Appendix 2. The works described below are specifically for
the Phase 1 stage. However the Employer has desires to extend the infrastructure
packages for phase 2 and 4 as the development progresses.
4.2 The scope of the primary infrastructure networks will be limited to full width of
carriageway rights-of-ways (ROW) and utility compounds, bridges will be constructed
under the remaining phases of works and should not be included within Phase 1
works. The Contractor’s Works will be restricted to the Work Area defined within
Phasing Plan under Appendix 2 to the General Specification.
4.3 All other remaining land will be sold to third party developers as private developments
plots. The primary Infrastructure to the development plots will be terminated directly
at the boundary by chambers or termination details. Coordination to connection and
permissions required to communicate with the primary infrastructure laid under this
contract will be managed by the employers Technical Interface Office and Statutory
Authorities where applicable.

5 Programme
5.1 It is anticipated that Phase 1 infrastructure works will be complete by May 2012 and
have construction duration of 350 calendar days. This will be subjective to successful
appointment of the infrastructure contractor and letter of award for the primary
infrastructure package. The high level program can be seen within Section 1,
Appendix N.

6 Work Packages
6.1 For information, currently 2 work packages for Phase 1 have been identified within
the primary network infrastructure packages and are as described as follows:
1. Roads and Utilities networks. (This tender package)
2. Temporary Sewage Treatment Plant (This tender package) included as a
performance specification to tender to a specialist contractor
Bridge construction is not included within this tender package.

7 Adoption
7.1 The employer has set up a Technical Interface Office (TIO) the details of which will
be given after the contract is awarded. The TIO will be responsible for the co-
ordination of third party developers and government bodies in terms of approvals and
permissions to connect to the primary infrastructure laid under this package.
7.2 At this stage only the potable water distribution network, street lighting and electricity,
11 and 0.4 kV cable networks and 11 kV substations will be adopted by government
bodies (EWA).

8 Primary Roads and Utilities Network Scope

8.1 The construction of primary roads and utilities networks to serve Phase 1 of the Durrat Marina
development as detailed in the drawings and specifications are described below. The
networks will generally follow the service corridors along the ROW’s.
8.2 General. The contractor will be responsible for all flushing, cleaning of the wet service
networks prior to commissioning and filling of the networks. He shall be responsible for testing
and providing BACS testing and chlorination certificates for the potable water network
8.2.1 Potable Water Distribution Network:

To be adopted and maintained in perpetuity by EWA. Includes but not limited to:
• All trenching for distribution mains and service pipe work

• Joint fittings
• Valves
• Wash outs
• Scour valves
• Chambers and manholes
• Air Release Valves (ARV’s)
• Thrust block and typical details and other ancillaries
• The network will encompass all mains and services from the Marina/Golf Course
plot boundary connection point to the third party plot development boundary
termination.
8.2.2 Irrigation Network:

Will remain a private asset in the ownership of the employer or his successor.
Includes but not limited to:
• All trenching for pressurised mains and service pipe work,

• Joint fittings
• Wash outs,
• Scour valves,
• Chambers and manholes
• Air Release Valves (ARV’s) and ancillaries
• Fire hydrants for public areas
• Thrust block and typical details
• The network will encompass all mains and services from the TSE tank within the
utility compound to the plot boundary termination. It may also include secondary

and tertiary networks including metering. The fire fighting for the communal and
public open spaces will be fed from this network
8.2.3 Sewerage Gravity and Pumped Network:

Works within Phase 1 area shall incorporate a combination of gravity flow and
pumped networks. Including but not limited to:
• Sewage Treatment Plant (Temporary) – performance specification to tender to a

specialist contractor
• All associated trenching
• Manholes and chambers
• Valves
• Pipe work and pumping equipment
• Gravity and pressurised networks of varying sizes
• Forwarding pump stations
• Lifting stations
• Air Release Valves (ARV’s)
• Scour valves
• Ancillary chambers and the like
• This network will remain a private asset in the ownership of the employer or his
successor.
8.2.4 Storm Water Drainage:

Will remain a private asset in the ownership of the employer or his successor,
including but not limited to:
• All trenching for the gravity network pipe work of varying diameters
• Road gullies
• Pipe bedding details,
• Oil and petrol interceptors.
• Storm water sea outfalls to canals.
1.8.2.5 Electrical Cable Networks:

Will be adopted and maintained in perpetuity by EWA. Includes but not limited to:
• All trenching for 11 and 0.4 kV electrical cable networks

• Jointing details

• 11kV sub stations, sub and super structure construction including transformers
and switchgear
• Ancillary control kiosk and feeder pillars.
8.2.6 Telecoms Network:

Will remain a private asset in the ownership of the employer or his successor
including but not limited to:
• All trenching for network ducting layout

• Draw pit and manhole access chambers
• Meet me rooms
• Termination details to third party development plots.
8.2.7 Highways:
All necessary works for the complete road networks within Phase 1 including, but not
limited to:
• All excavation, trenching, filling, grading, construction of embankments, shaping,

levelling and compaction of road and hard paved areas.
• Layout drawings showing road hierarchies are included within this tender package,
ROW’s typical details of kerbs
• Typical road construction details for asphalt, block paving road, and block paving
footpaths, road crossing ducting.
• All necessary street furniture, traffic Signals, traffic controls and road signage and
road markings.
• The roads will remain a private asset in the ownership of the employer or his
successor however this network has been designed in accordance with statutory
government requirements in order to offer the roads be for adoption in the future.
8.2.8 Street Lighting:

In the event that the Employer requires bespoke lighting columns and decorative
lights, the street lighting network will remain a private asset in the ownership of the
employer or his successor. Including but not limited to:
• All trenching,
• Excavation ,ducting, for street lighting columns
• Street lighting feeder pillars, street lighting,
• Ducting

• Cabling and landscape lighting electrical networks. (This network has been
designed in accordance with statutory government requirements should the
network be offered for adoption in the future).
8.2.9 Temporary Works:

• Including access and egress to the works, maintenance, dewatering, earthwork
support design, grading, compaction and certification thereof.
8.2.10 Additions and Omissions Wet Services

It is the intention of the Employer that the scope mentioned below may be offered
under a design build operate contract to a successful wet services operator. The Wet
Services operator will design the assets as described. However it is the intention to
include these designs for construction within the primary infrastructure works
package.
This scope of this element of works includes but not limited to the:
• Temporary STP based upon URS/Scott Wilson performance specifications and

drawings

Section 2
General Requirements
Table of Contents
1 General .............................................................................................. 1
1.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 1
2 The Development.............................................................................. 4
2.1 Definition........................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Vision ................................................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Title of the Development................................................................................................... 4
3 The Site.............................................................................................. 5
3.1 Site Location ..................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Phasing Plan .................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 Project Work Areas – Phase 1 ......................................................................................... 5
3.4 Expected Site Conditions ................................................................................................. 5
3.5 Geotechnical Investigation ............................................................................................... 6
3.6 Topographical Survey ....................................................................................................... 6
3.7 Existing Services .............................................................................................................. 6
3.8 Surrounding Area ............................................................................................................. 6
3.9 Photographic Records ...................................................................................................... 6
4 Site Working Hours .......................................................................... 7
4.1 Restrictions on Site........................................................................................................... 7
4.2 Normal Working Hours ..................................................................................................... 7
4.3 National Holidays.............................................................................................................. 7
4.4 Contractors’ Working Hours ............................................................................................. 7
5 Access to site ................................................................................... 8
5.1 Highway Access ............................................................................................................... 8
5.2 Access to Site (Not Used) ................................................................................................ 8
5.3 Abnormal Loads ............................................................................................................... 8
5.4 Bahrain Traffic Police Dispensations ................................................................................ 8
5.5 Not used ........................................................................................................................... 8
6 Temporary Accommodation ............................................................ 9
6.1 Not Used........................................................................................................................... 9
6.2 Temporary Buildings......................................................................................................... 9
6.3 Engineer’s Site Accommodation ....................................................................................... 9
6.4 Employers Site Accommodation (Additional Requirement from those above) ............... 12
6.5 Transport for the Engineer.............................................................................................. 13
6.6 The Contractor’s Site Accommodation ........................................................................... 13
6.7 Welfare Facilities for Workers ......................................................................................... 14

6.8 Sanitary Conveniences................................................................................................... 16
6.9 Access to the Contractor’s Offices ................................................................................. 16
6.10 Temporary Power Supply for the Works ......................................................................... 17
6.11 Temporary Water Supply for the Works ......................................................................... 17
6.12 Foul Drainage ................................................................................................................. 17
6.13 Telephone Installation .................................................................................................... 17
6.14 Landscaping ................................................................................................................... 17
6.15 Parking ........................................................................................................................... 17
6.16 Project Signboard ........................................................................................................... 18
6.17 Welfare Facilities ............................................................................................................ 18
6.18 Site Layout Plan ............................................................................................................. 18
6.19 Relocation of Site Facilities ............................................................................................ 18
6.20 Storage and Lay Down Areas......................................................................................... 18
6.21 Removal of Temporary Accommodation and Facilities .................................................. 19
6.22 Haul Roads ..................................................................................................................... 19
6.23 Site Safety ...................................................................................................................... 19
6.24 Highways ........................................................................................................................ 19
7 Supervision of the Works .............................................................. 20
7.1 General Supervision ....................................................................................................... 20
7.2 Contractor’s Organisation ............................................................................................... 20
7.3 Co-ordination of Engineering Services ........................................................................... 21
7.4 Out of Hours Working ..................................................................................................... 21
7.5 Access for Inspection ..................................................................................................... 22
8 Site Security .................................................................................... 23
8.1 Employer’s Security Provisions ...................................................................................... 23
8.2 Contractor’s Security Provisions ..................................................................................... 23
8.3 Security Guards .............................................................................................................. 23
8.4 Security Pass System ..................................................................................................... 23
8.5 Site Radio System .......................................................................................................... 24
9 Information Management ............................................................... 25
9.1 Procedures Manual ........................................................................................................ 25
9.2 Information Technology .................................................................................................. 25
9.3 Correspondence ............................................................................................................. 25
9.4 Request for Information .................................................................................................. 26
9.5 Transmittals / Submissions ............................................................................................. 26
9.6 Valuations and Payments ............................................................................................... 27
9.7 Approval Status Regime ................................................................................................. 27

9.8 Approval Periods ............................................................................................................ 28
9.9 Project Software ............................................................................................................. 28
9.10 Dating of documents....................................................................................................... 28
10 Drawings ......................................................................................... 30
10.1 Drawings Provided to the Contractor .............................................................................. 30
10.2 Shop Drawings Product Data, Samples and Composite Coordination Drawings ........... 30
10.3 Number of Copies for Approval ...................................................................................... 32
10.4 Contractor’s Responsibilities .......................................................................................... 32
10.5 Design Development ...................................................................................................... 33
10.6 As Built Drawings ........................................................................................................... 33
11 Programme...................................................................................... 35
11.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 35
11.2 Durrat Marina Infrastructure (DMI) Programme (Clause 14 Programme) ...................... 36
11.3 Programme Content ....................................................................................................... 38
11.4 WBS and Activity Structure ............................................................................................ 39
11.5 Critical Path Analysis ...................................................................................................... 39
11.6 Manpower Resource ...................................................................................................... 39
11.7 Plant and Equipment ...................................................................................................... 39
11.8 Programme Issue ........................................................................................................... 40
11.9 Commissioning Programme ........................................................................................... 40
11.10 Staff Training .................................................................................................................. 40
11.11 Prefabrication ................................................................................................................. 41
11.12 Out of Hours Working ..................................................................................................... 41
12 Progress Management ................................................................... 42
12.1 Progress Meetings.......................................................................................................... 42
12.2 Contractor’s Monthly Report ........................................................................................... 42
12.3 Daily Reports .................................................................................................................. 43
12.4 Progress Photographs .................................................................................................... 43
12.5 Weather Records............................................................................................................ 44
13 Cost Management........................................................................... 45
13.1 Cost Meetings................................................................................................................. 45
13.2 Monthly Cost Report ....................................................................................................... 45
13.3 Cost Management Resource .......................................................................................... 45
13.4 Cost Management General ............................................................................................ 45
14 Meetings .......................................................................................... 48
14.1 Regular Meetings ........................................................................................................... 48
14.2 Infrequent Meetings ........................................................................................................ 48

15 Quality Control and Method Statements ...................................... 49
15.1 Quality Assurance .......................................................................................................... 49
15.2 Quality Plan .................................................................................................................... 49
15.3 Quality Manager ............................................................................................................. 50
15.4 Samples /Mock-ups /Job Standards ............................................................................... 50
15.5 Operation and Maintenance Manual .............................................................................. 50
15.6 Information Management................................................................................................ 51
15.7 Method Statements ........................................................................................................ 51
15.8 Prefabrication ................................................................................................................. 53
15.9 Independent Test House ................................................................................................ 53
15.10 Tests and Inspections..................................................................................................... 53
15.11 Test Certificates.............................................................................................................. 53
15.12 Defective Works ............................................................................................................. 54
15.13 Inspection and Testing Costs ......................................................................................... 54
15.14 Thermometers ................................................................................................................ 54
15.15 Defects ........................................................................................................................... 54
15.16 Inspections by the Engineer ........................................................................................... 55
15.17 Location of Materials in the Works ................................................................................. 55
15.18 Tolerances ...................................................................................................................... 55
16 Health and Safety Regulations ...................................................... 58
16.1 Employer’s Environmental Health & Safety Policy ......................................................... 58
16.2 Legislation ...................................................................................................................... 58
16.3 Project Specific Health and Safety Plan ......................................................................... 58
16.4 Residual Risks ................................................................................................................ 59
16.5 Health and Safety Manager ............................................................................................ 59
16.6 First Aid Provisions ......................................................................................................... 60
16.7 Meetings/Audits/Inspection............................................................................................. 60
16.8 Accident Reporting ......................................................................................................... 60
16.9 Employer’ Direct Contractors .......................................................................................... 61
16.10 Notification of Employer’s Insurance Company .............................................................. 61
16.11 Personal Protective Equipment ...................................................................................... 62
16.12 Fire Prevention ............................................................................................................... 62
16.13 Fire Plan ......................................................................................................................... 62
16.14 Fire Points ...................................................................................................................... 63
16.15 No Smoking .................................................................................................................... 63
16.16 Fuel Storage ................................................................................................................... 63
16.17 Safety Signage ............................................................................................................... 64
16.18 Temporary Electricity & Safety Lighting .......................................................................... 64

16.19 Stability ........................................................................................................................... 64
16.20 Noise .............................................................................................................................. 65
16.21 Pollution .......................................................................................................................... 65
16.22 Nuisance......................................................................................................................... 65
16.23 Working at Height ........................................................................................................... 65
16.24 Safety Accreditation and Operation of Plant and Equipment ......................................... 66
16.25 The Role of the Project Manager.................................................................................... 66
17 Other Contractors........................................................................... 67
17.1 Adjacent Projects............................................................................................................ 67
17.2 Directly Employed Contractors ....................................................................................... 67
17.3 Statutory / Utilities Authorities ......................................................................................... 67
17.4 Perimeter Roads Contracts ............................................................................................ 67
17.5 Sub Contractors.............................................................................................................. 67
18 Not Used .......................................................................................... 68
19 Protection of Works ....................................................................... 69
19.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 69
19.2 Bahrain Municipality Demarcation Points ....................................................................... 69
19.3 Contractor’s Temporary Accommodation ....................................................................... 69
19.4 Hoardings to Contractor’s Offices................................................................................... 69
19.5 Water .............................................................................................................................. 69
19.6 Moisture .......................................................................................................................... 69
19.7 Infected Timber............................................................................................................... 69
19.8 Work in all Sections ........................................................................................................ 70
19.9 Existing Services ............................................................................................................ 70
19.10 Roads and Footpaths ..................................................................................................... 72
19.11 Adjoining Property .......................................................................................................... 72
19.12 Existing Structures.......................................................................................................... 72
20 Temporary Works ........................................................................... 74
20.1 Locations ........................................................................................................................ 74
20.2 Installation, Maintenance, Relocation and Removal ....................................................... 74
20.3 Power Supply ................................................................................................................. 74
20.4 Water Supply .................................................................................................................. 74
20.5 Meter Readings .............................................................................................................. 74
20.6 Design Responsibility ..................................................................................................... 74
20.7 Plant and Equipment ...................................................................................................... 74
20.8 Power Demand ............................................................................................................... 75
20.9 Lifting and Craneage ...................................................................................................... 75

20.10 Traffic Management........................................................................................................ 75
20.11 Effluent Storage Tanks ................................................................................................... 75
21 Materials Storage and Handling .................................................... 77
21.1 Delivery, Storage and Handling ...................................................................................... 77
21.2 Delivery of Materials ....................................................................................................... 77
21.3 Vertical and Horizontal Distribution of Materials ............................................................. 77
21.4 Materials Handling .......................................................................................................... 77
21.5 Prefabrication ................................................................................................................. 77
21.6 Protection of Materials .................................................................................................... 78
21.7 Hazardous Materials....................................................................................................... 78
21.8 Waste Management ....................................................................................................... 78
21.9 Hazardous Waste ........................................................................................................... 78
21.10 Documentation ............................................................................................................... 78
21.11 Quality ............................................................................................................................ 78
21.12 Product Selection ........................................................................................................... 79
21.13 Product Naming and Alternatives ................................................................................... 79
22 Setting Out of the Works ............................................................... 81
22.1 Municipality Regulations ................................................................................................. 81
22.2 Benchmark ..................................................................................................................... 81
22.3 Demarcation Points ........................................................................................................ 81
22.4 Project Work Areas......................................................................................................... 81
22.5 Independent Survey Company ....................................................................................... 81
22.6 Plot Demarcation Certificates ......................................................................................... 82
23 Attendance on Domestic Sub-Contractors .................................. 83
23.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 83
23.2 General Attendance provided by the Contractor ............................................................ 83
23.3 Not used ......................................................................................................................... 84
23.4 Not used ......................................................................................................................... 84
23.5 Special Attendances ....................................................................................................... 84
24 Project Closeout ............................................................................. 85
24.1 Final Clean ..................................................................................................................... 85
24.2 Handover ........................................................................................................................ 85
24.3 As Built Drawings ........................................................................................................... 85
24.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual .............................................................................. 86
24.5 Commissioning ............................................................................................................... 87
24.6 Defects ........................................................................................................................... 87
24.7 Contract Spares (Not Used) ........................................................................................... 87

24.8 Warranties ...................................................................................................................... 87
24.9 Insurance Inspections..................................................................................................... 88
24.10 Commissioning Plans ..................................................................................................... 88
APPENDIX 1
Site Location Plan ...................................................................................................................... 92
APPENDIX 2
Phasing Plan ............................................................................................................................... 94
APPENDIX 3
Site Office Layout Plan .............................................................................................................. 96
1 General
1.1 General
The Contractor shall allow for the provision of all the Works described in the General
Specifications, except where these are expressly stated as undertaken by others in
this document or in other documents forming part of the Contract.
The Contractor will be responsible for seeking clarification from the Engineer in any
matter that appears to be ambiguous. The Engineer’s opinion as to the intent of the
Contract requirements will be given and shall be adhered to by the Contractor.
The duties of the Contractor applicable to this Contract are retained and highlighted
to clarify the Contractor’s obligations.
The term “Contractor” refers to the “Main Contractor” who is appointed by the
Employer, Durrat Marina to undertake all aspects of the construction works, and to
co-ordinate works carried out within the Project by specialist contractors appointed by
the Employer under separate contracts.
Nothing appearing in the specification or bill of quantities shall limit the obligations
and liabilities of the Contractor, the Engineer or the Employer under the Conditions of
Contract.
The approval of any material or plant and its operation or of any construction
procedure will neither relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract
nor imply any relaxation of the requirements governing the quality of the materials or
of the finished work.
For the purposes of this specification the following definitions shall apply:
"Acceptable/Approved (Approval)": Acceptable to/approved (approval) by the
Engineer.
"Adequate": Adequate in the opinion of the Engineer.
"Agreed": Agreed in writing.
"As detailed": As detailed on the drawings.
"Authorized/ordered/rejected": Authorized/ordered/rejected by the Engineer.
"Designated": Shown on a drawing or otherwise specified by the Engineer or, in
relation to an item scheduled in the tender document, descriptive of an item to be
priced by a tenderer.
"Indicated": Indicated in or reasonably to be inferred from the contract, or indicated in
writing by the Engineer.
"Instructed/directed/permitted": Instructed/directed/permitted by the Engineer.

"Satisfactory": Capable of fulfilling or having fulfilled the intended function; fit for
purpose.
"Service": Any pipeline, duct, cable or overhead wire for conveying, as appropriate,
any fluid (including stormwater and gas), or electricity or other form of energy for
lighting or power, or telecommunication transmissions.
"Submitted": Submitted with the tender or submitted to the Engineer, as appropriate.
“General Conditions" and "Conditions of Particular Application": The Conditions of
Contract specified for use with this Contract.
"Specified": As specified in the Specifications and the Drawings. ‘Specifications’
shall have the corresponding meaning."
"Tolerance": The range between the limits within which a size or position must lie. A
tolerance is an absolute value without a sign but the dimension or axis to which it
applies will be stated.
"Deviation": The difference between the true, measured size or position and the
specified size or position.
"Permissible deviation": The specified limit(s) of deviation.
For the purposes of this specification the following abbreviations shall apply and shall
have the meanings given:
AASHTO : American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
BM : Benchmark
BS : British Standard
CP : British Standard Code of Practice
SIS : Swedish Institute of Standards
BRTA : British Road Tar Association
CBR : California Bearing Ratio
CD : Chart Datum: Lowest Astronomic Tide Level 0.0m at Mina Salman
DDL : Draw down level
DI : Ductile Iron
EN : Eurocode
FSL : Full supply level
HAT : Highest Astronomic Tide
HDPE : High Density Polyethylene
LAT : Lowest Astronomic Tide
MDPE : Medium Density Polyethylene
MHWN : Mean High Water Neaps
MHWS : Mean High Water Springs
MLWN : Mean Low Water Neaps
MLWS : Mean Low Water Springs

MSL : Mean Sea Level

NGL : Natural ground level
OMC : Optimum moisture content
PCI : Portland Cement Institute
PD : Permissible deviation
PI : Plasticity index
RL : Reduced level
STP : Sewage Treatment Plant
TSE : Treated Sewage Effluent
uPVC : Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride
USBR : United States Bureau of Reclamation
WS : Water Supply

2 The Development
2.1 Definition
Durrat Marina covers almost 48 hectares of reclaimed land and will incorporate a
community of approximately 20,000 people and will include offices, retail residential,
commercial premises and a yacht club and marina. The plan arrangement will
encourage the use of its streets, public spaces and waterfronts.
2.2 Vision
Envisioned to exude the lifestyle of grandeur with unparalleled sophistication, Durrat
Marina is the future of a leisurely lifestyle. The multibillion project is the epitome of an
ambitious vision executed with a state of the art precision and utmost dedication. The
availability of wealth of amenities is reason enough for patronage from the locals and
the global population alike. Durrat Marina will set the bar for exclusivity and premium
living. The cause is development. The passion is ingenuity. The vision is to make
lives richer, taking the shape of paramount economic stand. To live a Durrat Marina
lifestyle means a social standing that is above the rest, yet anchored to the traditions
and plain roots.
2.3 Title of the Development

The Works are to be referred to in all correspondence and drawings as- Durrat
Marina Al Bahrain Phase 1

3 The Site
3.1 Site Location
Refer to Appendix 1 which indicates the Site Location Plan.
3.2 Phasing Plan

Refer Appendix 2 which indicates Phase 1 of the development.
3.3 Project Work Areas – Phase 1

Refer to site plan B1085-03-GE-GA-1003
The Contractor’s Works will be restricted to the Phase 1 Area defined in Appendix 2
to the General Specification.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all activities undertaken within and
outside the Site boundary, as detailed in the Contract drawings and as defined within
their Scope of Works.
The Contractor shall set out the site in an approved manner and shall maintain the
boundary between adjacent projects and/or approved demarcation.
3.4 Expected Site Conditions

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the nature of the
reclamation material by examination of the site and study of data and samples if any,
made available by the Employer. Prior to commencing work on site, the Contractor
shall carry out any further investigations or surveys that he decided are appropriate to
enable him to verify that his proposed plant and methods are suitable for carrying out
the work.
The Contractor shall have satisfied himself as to the conditions expected to be
encountered in constructing the Works, whether from the information provided or by
his own further investigations.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Contract, the parties agree
that the Site will be transferred by the Employer to the Contractor "as-is" and
therefore, the Contractor accepts total responsibility for any hydrological, geophysical
sub surface or any other environmental conditions affecting the Site from time to time,
whether or not such conditions were foreseeable by an experienced Contractor.
Any failure by the Employer to comply with any undertaking in this Contract in respect
of the Site environmental conditions will not detract from or form the basis for a claim
by the Contractor with respect to his obligations to take all necessary precautions and
study the conditions of the Site prior to and during the execution of the Works.
The “as built” reclamation grading plan and sections are available from the Employer
for inspection by the Contractor.

The Marine Works Specification for the Reclamation works is available from the
Employer for inspection by the Contractor.
3.5 Geotechnical Investigation

A geotechnical investigation study has been undertaken by the Employer in
preparation of the design of the Development. This report is available from the
Employer for inspection by the Contractor.
3.6 Topographical Survey

WS Atkins As-built drawings (to be provided on completion of the reclamation and
dredging contract) confirms the existing levels of the project. This documentation is
for information only and the Contractor is deemed to have satisfied himself of the site
conditions and allow for all costs related to these levels within his Contract Price.
3.7 Existing Services

There are no record drawings describing the existing services in and around the site
as it is understood none exist. However this does not relieve the Contractor of his
contractual obligations to establish the presence of buried services within the site /
project.
3.8 Surrounding Area

The Contractor should be aware that during the course of this project the Employer
reserves the right to let separate contracts in connection with the same project under
similar conditions. The Contractor shall provide other contractors access to and from
their work sites in the area surrounding the site. The contractor shall allow for the
liaison and co-ordination of his Works with theirs at no additional cost to the
Employer.
The contractor should also be aware that construction works on adjacent projects
may be in progress. It is incumbent on the contractor to liaise with any external
parties regarding their construction activities and general movements to and from the
site. It is the contractor’s responsibility to make good and repair any damage caused
to third party properties at their own cost.
3.9 Photographic Records

The Contractor shall make photographic and other records to be agreed by the
Engineer of the conditions of the surfaces of the Site and adjacent buildings
immediately before entering upon them for the purpose of constructing the Works.

4 Site Working Hours

4.1 Restrictions on Site
There are no restrictions placed on the hours that the Contractor is permitted to work
on site. However, the Contractor is required to seek the written approval of the
Engineer to work outside of the normal working hours and state the nature of the
works to be undertaken, the duration of the works to be undertaken and any
supervision required from the Engineer. All works outside normal working hours shall
be identified in the Clause 14 programme.
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that his programme milestones are achieved
/ completed within the dates listed in the Conditions of Contract, Annex 7 – Key Dates
Schedule.
4.2 Normal Working Hours

The normal working hours for the Site will be-
Saturday to Thursday - 06:00 – 18:00 hours
Friday - 06:00 – 12:00 hours
The Contractor shall abide to the working hours as required under the Bahrain
Labour Law. Should working in multiple shifts be required the Contractor will be
deemed to have taken these provisions into account within the Contract Price.
4.3 National Holidays

During all officially declared public or national holidays, the site will be closed.
4.4 Contractors’ Working Hours

The Contractor is to advise the hours that will be worked on site by the Contractor
and his Subcontractors.

5 Access to site
5.1 Highway Access
The Contractor should note that access to, from and around the site will be
congested as a consequence of the quantity of construction works ongoing in the
vicinity of the Project both related to the Employer’s other works and works
associated with other developments.
The Employer will be responsible for arranging access to the project site boundary
from the nearest highway.
To facilitate best possible access and egress to and from the site the Contractor will
implement a logistic strategy, to be approved by the Employer, which will be in
accordance with the overall Durrat Marina Development Logistics Strategy.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of haul roads for
transportation and access within the site boundary. Upon completion of the works in
this area all access roads shall be removed and made good accordingly to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.2 Access to Site (Not Used)

5.3 Abnormal Loads
The Contractor will be responsible to obtain all permits necessary for the delivery to
site of all abnormal loads. All permits are to be obtained by the Contractor from the
Bahrain Traffic Police and/or other relevant authority.
5.4 Bahrain Traffic Police Dispensations

Copies of all dispensations obtained by the Contractor from the Bahrain Traffic Police
are to be issued to the Engineer within 24 hours of their issue.
5.5 Not used

6 Temporary Accommodation
6.1 Not Used
6.2 Temporary Buildings
The Contractor will provide separate good quality temporary buildings to
accommodate his staff, and the Engineer’s, the PM, the CM and the Employers’ staff
employed on the Project within one building, refer 6.3 (3) and (4).
The location of the Site Offices shall be agreed with the Engineer.
This accommodation will incorporate welfare facilities for the Contractor’s/ Engineer’s/
PM/CM and the Employers’ staff. The welfare facilities shall include but not be limited
to toilets, changing rooms, canteen, wash area, first aid etc.
All office accommodation is to be provided with air conditioning.
The temporary buildings are to contain adequate fire fighting provisions (i.e. fire
points and fire extinguishers).
The Contractor shall provide all furniture, computers, fixtures and fittings and all
necessary office equipment to administer the contract.
The Contractor is to allow for the daily cleaning of the temporary accommodation and
allow for the removal of all litter, waste paper, waste food, etc. off-site on a daily
basis.
6.3 Engineer’s Site Accommodation

(1) Within two weeks of possession of the site the Contractor shall provide, clean,
maintain, service, and eventually dismantle, as directed by the Engineer, an office
for the Engineer and the resident site staff. The office shall be maintained to the
same standard until 12 weeks after Practical Completion for the Works, or such
earlier date as agreed with the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall provide on Site for the sole use of the Engineer the following
temporary buildings to serve as office accommodation, refer Site Office Layout
Plan at Appendix 3:
• Conference room of not less than 36m2 plan area complete with audio/visual
equipment.
• One reception/general office room of not less than 20m2.
• Eight office rooms (No to be agreed with MDAB) of not less than 20m2 each
plan area.
• A separate kitchenette not less than 12m2 plan area fitted with sink, draining
board, cupboards, shelving, microwave oven, refrigerator, water cooler, tea
service, cutlery and crockery.

• A separate server/ printer room not less than 15m2 plan area.
• Male and female toilets with shower and wash-hand basin facilities for sole use
of the Engineer’s staff.
• Male and female toilets with shower and wash-hand basin facilities for sole use
of the Employer’s staff.
• Male and female toilet in reception area.
• A sample store room of not less than 12m2 with shelving.
(3) The design, construction, location and layout of building(s) and surroundings shall
be agreed with the Engineer.
(4) The Contractor shall, not more than 7 days after the date of commencement,
submit full details to the Engineer, including floor plans, elevations, construction
principles and materials, before commencing the erection of the facilities.
The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary), grading and
drainage in the vicinity of the building(s), with suitable access and walkways. The
Contractor shall construct a covered hard standing, for the exclusive use of the
Engineer and his visitors, of sufficient size to accommodate shaded parking for 12
vehicles adjacent to the office, and an access road to the parking area. The access
road surfacing shall be hard and durable enough to resist the formation of ruts during
periods of heavy rain. Outside lighting shall be installed around the buildings and the
parking area, and appropriate signs shall be erected to indicate the purpose of the
facilities.
There shall be areas of green landscaping including 4No flagpoles outside of the site
accommodation, plans shall be submitted to the client for approval prior to
construction commencement
All facilities shall conform to current fabrication standards for the required types. The
facilities described above shall represent the minimum requirements. The Contractor
shall provide all additional incidentals necessary, so that the facilities will be
completely adequate and satisfactory in every respect for their intended use.
Painting both the exterior and the interior shall be as agreed with the Engineer.
Buildings shall be complete with all services connected including potable water,
electricity and sewerage. Each room shall be provided with least four 13 amp
sockets. All power shall be 220-240V, 50Hz, except where otherwise agreed by the
Engineer. All rooms shall be illuminated by fluorescent lighting. Each toilet shall be
provided with a flushing toilet and warm water hand washing and shower facilities
and extractor fans.
Telephone services, including international direct dialling, shall be provided by the
Contractor. In addition extra lines for facsimiles and computer connections shall be
provided. These shall be in the name of the Contractor who shall pay all user
charges, including installation, maintenance and removal. Each office shall be
equipped with a telephone connected to the main reception telephone.

Offices and meeting rooms shall be air-conditioned and electric heaters shall be
provided for winter use. The air conditioning may be either individual units or a central
ducted system and shall be adequate to maintain a temperature of not more than
24°C (dry bulb) at a relative humidity of 50% during the hottest season of the year.
The noise level of the air conditioning while working should be sufficiently low to allow
normal voice level discussions to take place.
At least one room shall be capable of providing at all times environmental conditions
suitable for the operation of a server room and other specified electronic office
equipment.
Buildings shall be weatherproof, fire protected, heat insulated and secure. Windows
shall give adequate light and ventilation and be protected with metal mosquito proof
gauze and have security bars and Venetian, or other approved, sun blinds. Ceiling
height above the floor level shall be at least 2.75m. All internal partition walls shall be
sound insulated. Floors shall be PVC tile covered or other alternative material
approved by the engineer. In toilets and other washing areas the floors shall have
drains to assist cleaning.
All doors shall be fitted with locks, with three keys provided for each lock. Two
master keys shall be provided, appropriate to all locks.
The Contractor shall provide the following for the use of the Engineer, Employer, PM,
CM and staff: All items of equipment shall be newly purchased.
• 8 No. HP/Compaq notebook zp 8000series or equivalent – Intel Pentium 4

processors with HT technology, 3.4 GHz, 2.00GB minimum, 160 GB 5,400 rpm
hard drive, 17” WXGA +Bright view wide viewing (1440 X 900) with windows 7
Professional operating system, Microsoft Office Professional (Latest Version),
Norton Internet Security Anti-Virus, with Wimax Business Internet Services (if
network coverage available to support) or better internet service.
• A3 size colour printer with required cartridges and paper on request.
• 1 No colour photocopier (A4/A3) with scanning, reduction and sorting facilities
(high capacity)
• 1 No A4 ring binding machine (up to 30mm binding capability)
• 1 No. colour plotter able to print up to A0 size drawings with applicable software
for the computers (high capacity)
• 3 No. 10 -megapixel digital cameras with minimum 3x optical zoom and the ability
to capture video clips, appropriate software and minimum 4GB of storage medium
per camera. The storage media shall have at least 10 minutes video storage
capacity.
• 6 No. mobile phone with local and international calling facility (including the cost
of the phone and monthly accounts including call charges and other utility
charges)
• Letter trays, waste paper baskets and similar items required. Supply of stationery,
pens, notebooks and other office consumables

• Cost of connections to all utilities including telephone and internet facilities and
their associated, installation, rental and call charges
• Access to suitable surveying and measuring equipment, as is considered
necessary, to check the setting out and level of the Works.
• Full-time Office/ Catering Assistant
• Consumables, (tissue paper, paper towels, soap, cleaning products, etc
• Comestibles, (tea, coffee, milk, sugar, water etc)
• First aid kits shall be provided and stocked with all required items present within a
standard site first aid kit. In the event of any item being utilised it shall be replaced
immediately.
• 1 No Full time AutoCAD operator
• 1 No Full time Secretary
The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to the Engineer in the form of
equipment and operators required for checking the setting out of the Works, testing,
monitoring, inspection and for any other attendance on the Engineer
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer and his staff with adequate personal
protection equipment including without limitation hard hats, safety shoes, reflective
vests, life jackets, safety harnesses, goggles, gloves, face masks, etc. Such
protection must be worn when appropriate.
Two full time cleaners shall be provided to ensure that the offices of the Engineer are
cleaned daily. Containers shall be provided for waste disposal in each office and
these shall be emptied and disposed of daily.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment for maintaining and
cleaning offices, furniture and fittings.
The Contractor shall replace and/or restore, as directed, any facilities or parts thereof
that become damaged, worn out, lost or stolen.
The Contractor shall provide an adequate stock of all expendable and consumable
items including refreshments, paper towels, toilet rolls, soaps, washing up liquid and
shall ensure proper and continuing functioning of all components and parts of the
facilities.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate measures to ensure security of the site and
site accommodation for both working and non-working hours. The Contractor is to
submit his proposal to the engineer in writing in accordance with Section 8 of this
General Specification.
6.4 Employers Site Accommodation (Additional Requirement from

those above)
All offices to be utilised by the Employer’s staff will have their own private bathrooms.

6.5 Transport for the Engineer

Transport for the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor from the date of
commencement of the Works unless otherwise permitted or instructed by the
Engineer.
The vehicles listed below shall be supplied to the Engineer, brand new, for the entire
contract period and the Contractor shall maintain (including servicing and tyres) the
vehicles in a good running order for the duration of the contract period including the
12 week period after completion. The Contractor shall also be responsible to license
the vehicles, to insure the vehicles and to renew the licences whenever required and
to supply fuel for the vehicles.
• Six 5-door short wheelbase four-wheel drive vehicles with either a V6 petrol
engine or turbo diesel engine
• Three LDV twin cabin two-wheel drive vehicle with either a V6 petrol engine or
turbodiesel engine
The vehicles shall become the property of the Contractor at the end of the Contract
Period.
6.6 The Contractor’s Site Accommodation

The location of the Contractor’s site establishment shall be as shown on the drawings
and shall be approved by the Engineer.
Failure to comply with the above requirements will result in the Employer taking
whatever action is deemed necessary to ensure compliance and charging costs
incurred to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall arrange the supply of fresh water, electricity, telephone,
compressed air and other services, as needed to his site establishment and shall
provide, maintain and remove on completion all pipes, cables and fittings to carry
such services to his operations. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of
safe drinking water on the Site. All electrical installations, including those forming
part of the temporary works, shall comply with the relevant Regulations.
The Contractor shall supply and maintain adequate and suitable sheds for the
storage of materials. Sheds for the storage of materials that may deteriorate or
corrode if exposed to the weather shall be weatherproof, adequately ventilated and
provided with raised floors.
Office accommodation shall be provided complete within 7 days of the starting date
and shall be equipped and maintained by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative until 12 weeks after Practical Completion for the Works or
such earlier time as instructed by the Engineers Representative, whereupon the
buildings and furniture shall be removed from the Site.

6.7 Welfare Facilities for Workers

A. General
(1) The Contractor shall provide storage compartments for use by workers. The
storage compartment shall be placed at a location close to the Site entrance to
facilitate workers to obtain/place their personal protective equipment such as
safety helmet, reflective vest, eye protectors, safety harness etc. when they
enter/leave the Site.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure adequate provision of storage compartments
taking into account the fluctuation in labour workforce. The Contractor shall
determine the dimensions of the storage compartments. To facilitate
monitoring and control, each storage compartment shall be designed for use
by not more than five persons unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall propose the number, location and layout arrangement for
the placement of storage compartments on the Site for the approval of the
Engineer within 14 days from the date of commencement of the Works on the
Site. The Engineer and the Contractor shall review regularly the adequate
provision of storage compartments on the Site for use by workers throughout
the Contract’
B. Drinking Water Facilities

(3) The Contractor shall provide free drinking water facilities for workers working
on the Site throughout the Contract. To minimize waste plastic bottles, the
drinking water facility can be in the form of a water pot with a cover at the top
for water refilling and a tap at the bottom for drawing water, a distilled water
drinking fountain or any other form approved. The drinking water facilities shall
be provided indoors and each of which shall have a storage capacity of not
less than 20 litres.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the drinking water facilities
in clean and hygienic condition and refilling drinking water to the facilities
before empty. The number of drinking water facilities provided on the Site
shall be at a ratio of not less than one for every 20 workers. The Contractor
shall propose the number, location of placement and the refilling frequency for
drinking water facilities provided on the Site for the approval of the Engineer
within 14 days from the date of commencement of the Works on the Site. The
Supervising Officer and the Contractor shall review regularly the adequacy of
drinking water facilities provided by the Contractor throughout the Contract.
C. Toilet Facilities
(5) The Contractor shall provide facilities for workers working on the Site
throughout the Contract, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer that the
provision is not necessary. The toilet facilities shall be suitable for use by
either gender and located close to workplaces. The toilet facilities shall be
either one of the following types:

(i) wet type with flushing water supply and the toilet waste properly collected
and discharged into a sewerage system, septic tank, soakaway system, or
in-situ sewage treatment facilities proposed by the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer;
(ii) chemical type complete with containers for regularly cleaning and removal
by approved Contractor.
(6) For connection to a public sewerage system, the Contractor shall obtain
approval from the relevant Statutory and/or Municipal Authorities prior to
making the connection. If a soakaway system is adopted, the Contractor shall
carry out in-situ percolation test to prove that the soil shall have sufficient
absorption capacity to treat the toilet waste flow. The test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer for recording before discharging. If in-situ sewage
treatment facility is adopted, the plant shall be equipped with disinfection unit
to sterilize the treated effluent before discharging.
(7) The number of toilet facilities provided on the Site shall be at a ratio of not less
than one for every 30 workers. The Contractor shall propose the toilet type,
number and their locations of placement for the approval of the Engineer and
the Contractor within 14 days from the date of commencement of the Works on
the Site. The Contractor shall maintain the toilet facilities in clean and hygienic
condition. The Engineer shall review regularly the adequacy of toilet facilities
provided by the Contractor on the Site and the cleanliness and hygienic
conditions of these toilets throughout the Contract.
D. Hand-wash Facilities
(8) The Contractor shall provide hand-wash facilities in the form of water points
and sinks for workers working on the Site throughout the Contract, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer that the provision is not necessary. The
number of hand-wash facilities provided on the Site shall be a ratio of not less
than one for every 20 workers. The discharge from hand-wash facilities shall
be collected to prevent spillage on the floor, and discharged to a water
reception tank or flushing water supply tank for recycling/reusing as
appropriate. The Contractor shall propose the number of hand-wash facilities,
their locations and the system of how to collect the discharge from the wash-
water basin for reuse/recycle on the Site for the approval of the Engineer
within 14 days from the date of commencement of the Works on the Site. The
Engineer and the Contractor shall review regularly the adequacy of hand-wash
facilities provided by the Contractor on the Site and the effectiveness of the
discharge collection system throughout the Contract.
E. Rubbish Bins
(9) The Contractor shall provide sufficient rubbish bins with covers at strategic
locations on the Site for collection and disposal of general wastes generated
by workers throughout the Contract. The rubbish bins shall be provided in
pairs, one for aluminium cans and plastic bottles and the other for general

refuses. The locations for the rubbish bins in pairs shall be placed at
convenient locations close to the workers’ workplace to facilitate use. The
number of paired rubbish bins in pairs provided on the Site shall be at a ratio of
not less than one pair for every 20 workers. The size of the rubbish containers
shall be of minimum 1m high and have an opening of at least 0.28m³ at the top
for collecting wastes.
(10) The Contractor shall maintain the cleanliness of rubbish bins, and arrange
collection and disposal of waste inside the rubbish bins regularly, but in any
case shall be not less than once in very three days. The Contractor shall also
make arrangement for collecting papers and packaging on the Site to reduce
disposal of wastes to landfills. The Contractor shall propose the number and
the location of placement of rubbish bins provided on the Site together with the
arrangement for on-site sorting of aluminium cans, plastic bottles and papers
for the approval of the Engineer within 14 days from the date of
commencement of the Works on the Site. The Engineer and the Contractor
shall review regularly the adequacy of rubbish bins provided on the Site by the
Contractor and the effectiveness of on-site sorting of general wastes
throughout the Contract. The Contractor shall include this requirement to form
part of his waste management plan.
6.8 Sanitary Conveniences

Sanitary conveniences for the use of persons employed on the Works shall be
provided and maintained by the Contractor to the extent and in such manner and at
such places as shall be approved by the Engineer. All persons connected with the
Works shall be obliged to use them.
The Contractor shall make temporary arrangements for the proper discharge of
sewage and drainage from or in connection with the work and shall maintain the
same to the satisfaction of the Engineer for as long as they may be required.
Where a septic tank has to be provided, the Contractor shall be responsible for
arranging for its installation, regular emptying, etc. and removal upon completion.
On completion of the Works or as soon as the facilities provided by the Contractor
are no longer required, the Contractor shall remove such facilities and clear away all
surface indications of their presence
6.9 Access to the Contractor’s Offices

The Contractor shall allow for the regular “wetting down” of all site temporary roads
within the plot boundary during the Contract period. The Contractor shall allow
‘shared use’ of the road and parking by other contractors to reach the project or
contractors offices.
The road shall be wide enough for two vehicles to pass and accommodate parking on
one side.

Construction and maintenance of site roads and temporary access ways outside of
the Durrat Marina site will be by others.
6.10 Temporary Power Supply for the Works

The Contractor is to allow for the provision of a temporary power supply to the Works
and to the Contractor’s and Engineer’s site accommodation etc and pay all
connections and tariff charges.
6.11 Temporary Water Supply for the Works

The Contractor is to allow for the provision of a temporary potable water supply to the
Works and to all the Contractor’s and Engineer’s site accommodation and pay all
connections and tariff charges.
6.12 Foul Drainage

The Contractor is to allow for the provision of all necessary foul/water/system
connections necessary for his site facilities, to be approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor is to allow for the payment of all sewage collection charges.
The Contractor is to allow for the relocation of the temporary foul drainage as may be
required to facilitate progress of the Works.
6.13 Telephone Installation

The Contractor will be responsible for arranging all necessary telephone lines for the
operation of his duties within his contract and for the Engineer. The Contractor must
have an Internet connection and e-mail address at site. The Contractor is to allow for
the payment of all connection and tariff charges. The contractor shall submit as
constructed drawings of all temporary supplies and services.
6.14 Landscaping
No landscaping around the Contractor’s office is permitted.
The Contractor shall submit to the client for approval landscaping plans for the
Engineer’s site accommodation area to include 4 No flag poles.
6.15 Parking
The Contractor at his own costs must provide adequate parking as necessary for his
staff at a location to be agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all temporary roads to access the office accommodation
and parking areas. Covered parking will be permitted to the Engineer’s approval. The
‘Temporary’ road spec is to be agreed with the Engineer.

6.16 Project Signboard

The Contractor will be required to provide digital electronic format details of his
company logo and details in English / Arabic for installation on the Project Sign board
to the Engineer’s approval. The Contractor to fabricate, erect and maintain the
Project Sign Boards. Details to be provided by the Employer.
6.17 Welfare Facilities

No Labour Camps shall be permitted on the Development.
The Contractor will provide accommodation for use by the workforce at his cost. This
accommodation will comprise, but not be limited to: -
• Time Keeper’s office

• Lockable stores
• Lay down areas/storage compounds
• Diesel storage area (fully bunded)
• Changing rooms including washing facilities
• Canteen and welfare accommodation (First aid post)
6.18 Site Layout Plan

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval within 7 days of the award of
the Contract a site layout plan indicating the location of all temporary buildings,
welfare facilities, storage areas and temporary roads that will be installed on site
including all temporary services.
6.19 Relocation of Site Facilities

The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved with the
movement/relocation of the engineers and contractors building facilities, plant or
equipment to satisfy the progress of works. The Contractor shall include for all
moves in his Lump-Sum price.
6.20 Storage and Lay Down Areas

The Contractor will be allowed to utilise the space within the boundaries of Phases 2
and 3, but excluding Island B in order to complete the Works. Space used for storage
will be kept secure, tidy and managed so that health and safety issues do not arise.
The available space for storage of materials on site is limited and preferably material
deliveries shall be procured with a “just in time” delivery sequence.
Any offsite storage provisions must be arranged by the Contractor and all costs to be
included within the relevant provisional sum subcontract.

6.21 Removal of Temporary Accommodation and Facilities

The Contractor shall remove from site all temporary accommodation and facilities that
he has provided following receipt of the written permission of the Engineer, and
subject to the completion of the works.
The Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities including buried cables, pipelines,
conduits and tanks etc installed as part of the temporary works and facilities.
The Contractor shall remove all Access ways, Hoardings, Gate Houses and Entrance
Gates on completion of the Works as instructed by the Engineer.
6.22 Haul Roads

The Contractor is to provide and maintain all Haul Roads that he requires within the
plot boundary. These roads once provided will become ‘shared access routes’ for use
by others and shall remove the same and make good upon completion.
6.23 Site Safety

The Contractor is to allow for all necessary safety provisions i.e. lighting, barriers
signage etc for all site access ways and roads in accordance with the Durrat Marina
Health and Safety plan.
6.24 Highways
The Contractor will be responsible for and pay for all costs associated with any
damage to the public highways caused by the Contractor’s construction traffic during
the course of the works and will repair and make good in accordance with the
Authorities Instructions.

7 Supervision of the Works

7.1 General Supervision
The Contractor will provide suitable qualified full-time dedicated site based staff and
present their CV’s for information. This team must comprise but not limited to a
minimum of the following:
• Project Director/ Project Manager
• Planning Manager (Senior level and Primavera P3 proficient)
• MEP Co-ordinator (Senior Level)
• Senior Quantity Surveyor
• Construction Manager
• Procurement Manager
• Logistics Supervisor
• Health and Safety Manager
• General Foreman
• Quality Manager
• Document Controller
• Technical Reviewer for subcontractors
Each person offered for the above positions must be able to demonstrate sufficient
relevant experience appropriate to the role. The Contractor will, if requested by the
Engineer, arrange to call these individuals to interview.
The Contractor will not be permitted to remove any of the above persons from site
without the Engineer’s written consent. In the event such permission is granted the
Contractor must instantly provide replacements with equal experience and capability
and allow a 4 week handover period.
In addition to the constant management and supervision of the Works provided by the
Contractor’s person in charge, all significant types of works must be under the close
control of competent trade supervisors to ensure maintenance of satisfactory quality
and progress.
7.2 Contractor’s Organisation

The Contractor shall provide an Organisation Chart identifying the proposed on-site
and off-site organisation. This chart will be supplemented by a separate detailed on-
site Organisation Chart indicating the names and titles of the proposed site staff from
the Project Director to the Site Engineers.
Where the Contractor requires consultants (including engineers and surveyors) to
carry out design, certify design, prepare submissions or re-submissions (shop
Drawings), or for advice and professional services regarding any part of the
construction process, the Contractor shall engage and pay for such consultants.
Consultants engaged by the Contractor shall be qualified and experienced, and
currently practicing in the type of work to be undertaken.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the names and details of such
consultants.
Where the Contractor is required to carry out design for any part of the Works, it shall
produce design documents so that the Works, when completed in accordance with
those design documents shall comply with the requirements of the Contract and all
laws of the Kingdom of Bahrain.
The consultants engaged by the Contractor to carry out certification of design work
shall be professionally, legally and commercially independent of the consultants
engaged to carry out the design work being certified.
The consultants engaged to carry out certification shall not be another branch or
affiliate of the consultants engaged to carry out the design.
Where any consultant engaged by the Contractor has or may have any professional,
legal or commercial association with any party which may give rise conflict of interest,
that consultant shall declare such interest and resign from the project if required by
the Employer.
The Contractor, and all consultants engaged by the Contractor shall obtain, pay
premiums and maintain relevant professional indemnity insurance cover for the work
carried out by the consultant for the duration of the Contract and a period of 10 years
after the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate for external and substructure work.
The Contractor shall submit copies of policy certificates as evidence of professional
indemnity insurance with an endorsement letter provided by the insurance company
confirming compliance with the Contract, before commencing design of performance-
based work.
The value of the cover shall be not less than BD 3,000,000 (Three Million Bahraini
Dinars) for each and any claim related to Contractor designed Works.
7.3 Co-ordination of Engineering Services

The site organisation staff must include one or more persons with appropriate
knowledge and experience of mechanical and electrical engineering services to
ensure compatibility between the engineering services, one with another, and each in
relationship to the Works generally.
The Senior Services Coordinator shall have sufficient relevant experience in the
coordination of services installations and will be responsible for the compilation of the
Planned Preventative Maintenance Schedule required by the section on O&M
Manuals.
7.4 Out of Hours Working

Whenever work is required to be undertaken by the Contractor outside the ‘normal
working hours’ the Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 48 hours notice,
specifying the times, type and location of work to be undertaken. Concealed work

executed during out of hours working for which notice has been given may be
required to be opened up for inspection and reinstated at the Contractor’s expense.
7.5 Access for Inspection

The Contractor shall provide not less than two working days notice to the Engineer
before removing scaffolding and other facilities for access to the Works.

8 Site Security
8.1 Employer’s Security Provisions
The Employer will be implementing a Development wide security and logistics plan
which will govern the security and logistics for the whole Durrat Marina Development.
These will be developed in consultation with the Contractor such that they optimise
the Contractors own arrangements for the Project.
Upon implementation of the Development wide security and logistics plan the
Contractor will be required to comply with this plan.
8.2 Contractor’s Security Provisions

The Contractor will be fully responsible for and allow for all costs associated with the
security of the Project and must put in place and maintain a security plan for the
achievement of this. The following provisions to maintain a consistent approach to
security across the Development:-
a) Office Accommodation
• Security at the main entrances to their office accommodation
b) Project Work Area
• Photographic Security Pass System for all site personnel;
• Coloured Security Pass system for all visitors and delivery personnel;
• Visitor pass system included as above;
• Delivery receipt point;
• Building perimeter security;
• Hi-visibility clothing
c) Unauthorised Personnel
• Security is directed not to permit unauthorised personnel and vehicles onto site.
8.3 Security Guards

The Contractor is to employ uniformed Security Guards to be stationed at the main
entrance to their office, at the entry point into the work areas and to provide mobile
patrols. The Contractor is encouraged to use a reputable security company that is
acceptable to the Engineer and Project Manager.
8.4 Security Pass System

A photographic pass system is to be provided by the Contractor for all personnel
employed by the Contractor and the professional team. A coloured pass system is to
be operational for all visitors to the site. Each day shall have a different colour
display.

8.5 Site Radio System

The Contractor shall supply and maintain a mobile radio system for use on site in
accordance with the local statutory regulations, obtain all permissions and pay all
charges. The Contractor will maintain a control station in his site office and free issue
to the Engineer 2 No handsets, spare batteries and battery chargers.
The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of mobile radios for use by his own
managers and engineers. All site radios are to be set to a common frequency.

9 Information Management
9.1 Procedures Manual
The Project Team shall collectively develop a Durrat Marina Procedures Manual.
Once this manual is complete and accepted by the project Team, all parties shall
comply with its requirements.
This document shall replace the Contractor’s normal procedures, where applicable.
9.2 Information Technology

It is the responsibility of the contractor to propose and submit for approval to the
Employer and Engineer an Information Management System (IMS) to be
implemented for electronic communication and document control through out the
project duration.
The Contractor is to allow for the provision of the following equipment within his site
accommodation installation;
• Primavera expedition software, licences and updates;

• PC Monitors and CAD Workstations;
• Staff training.
The minimum number of staff that are trained in the use of IMS are;
• Project Manager
• Project Secretary
• Cost Manager
• Document Controller (s)
Training should be satisfactory and compromise the following;
• Foundation course
• Skills 1: Meetings and forms
• Skills 2: Drawing management
• Skills 3: Submittal management of information onto IMS
9.3 Correspondence
Refer to Procedures Manual for Project letter format, references and procedure.
All Contractors’ correspondence is to be addressed to the Engineer and copied to;
• The Employer
• The QS (contractual and commercial only)

All mail shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Project Office Complex post room.
9.4 Request for Information

Refer to Procedures Manual and IMS for the Project format and procedure.
All Contractor requests for information are to be issued to the Engineer.
9.5 Transmittals / Submissions

Refer to Procedures Manual and IMS for the format and procedure.
Prior to the commencement of the appropriate sections of the Works, the Contractor
shall submit for approval details of the proposed materials, sources of all materials,
and place of manufacture together with full documentary evidence that the materials
and manufacture comply with the Specification.
Further submissions shall be made for any change of material quality or source and
the Engineer’s approval obtained before the new materials or place of manufacture
are used in the Works.
The Contractor is to provide an electronic copy of all information submitted followed
by
2 No. paper copies for use by:-
• Project Manager (Archive)

• Engineer (1 no. set)
Separate codes and sequential numbers are to be used for:-
• SD - Shop Drawings and Schedules

• MAR - Material Approval Request, i.e. samples
• TS - Technical Submission
• CA - Catalogues and Product Data
• AB - As Built Drawings.
• PR - Programmes
• CV - Certificate / Verification for performance
• IT - Inspection and Test Results
• OM - O&M Manual
• MQ - Mock up and Quality Control Panels
• MS - Method Statement
• OT - Other
The documents shall also contain the following information:-

• Unique reference number

• Title
• Drawing size / scale (scales and dimensions to be using the metric system)
• Document description / content
• Contract package code
• Contractor’s Name (and sub-contractor’s name, if appropriate)
• First submission date
• Requested review return date
• Status
• Order and delivery status for main plant / equipment
The Contractor shall review submittals prior to submission to the Engineer. The
review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified,
and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with the requirements of
the Works and the Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and
identified as to the specific package and/or area of the works will be returned without
being examined and shall be considered rejected.
9.6 Valuations and Payments

Refer to Procedures Manual and IMS for the Project format and procedure.
Following award of the Contract the Contractor and Quantity Surveyor will agree the
Valuation and Payment Schedule that is to be strictly adhered to.
Should the Contractor fail to submit a valuation on time or without adequate
supporting documentation the Employer reserves the right to delay the payment.
9.7 Approval Status Regime

All drawing, material, method statement and specification transmittals will be
approved in accordance with the following regime:-
Approved Status Action
A No objection - proceed to procurement, fabrication, installation and

construction.
B Objection with comments - proceed to procurement, fabrication,
installation and construction incorporating the Engineers comments and
re-submit.
C Objection – Contractor to resubmit for approval following incorporation of
the Engineers comments prior to proceeding with the Works.

9.8 Approval Periods

The Contractor is to allow in the programming of the Works for the following approval
periods:-
• RFI’s - 7 calendar days

• Material Submittals - 7 calendar days
• Method Statements - 7 calendar days
• Calculations - 14 calendar days
• Shop Drawings - 14 calendar days
• Specifications - 14 calendar days
• Programmes - 14 calendar days
These durations will commence from the date of receipt by, and the date of issue by,
the Project Office or Engineer.
9.9 Project Software

The Contractor is to procure the following range of software to ensure compatibility
with the Development IT systems. The software shall be installed on the Engineer’s
and Employer’s computers:-
• Primavera Expedition - Version 10.1

• Primavera P6 - Version 6.2 or above
• Microsoft Windows Office 2010 - Version 1.0
• AutoCAD 2010
Versions to be as stated or latest available updated version or agreed with the
Engineer.
The Contractor is to maintain the software versions listed above throughout the
Contract without modification or updates to ensure compatibility between the
Contractor and Employers computer systems.
9.10 Dating of documents

Documents will be received in the Project document room between the following
hours:
Sun – Thurs 8am – 5pm
Saturday 8am – 1pm
Documents received during these times will be stamped with the date they are
received.

Documents received outside of these times will be stamped with the date of the next
working day.

10 Drawings
10.1 Drawings Provided to the Contractor
The Contractor will receive from the Engineer the contract drawings together with any
further drawings issued under Clause 7.1 of the Conditions of the Main Contract. The
Engineer will provide one paper copy and one electronic copy of all drawings
The management of drawing files, set ups and confirmation of accuracy of these
against hard copies will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
10.2 Shop Drawings Product Data, Samples and Composite

Coordination Drawings
Shop drawings are defined in the Contract Documents as drawings, diagrams,
schedules and other data specially prepared for the work by the Contractor or any of
the Contractor’s manufacturers, suppliers or distributors to illustrate
some portion of the work and includes fabrication, erection, layout, setting out
drawings, manufacturers standard drawings, schedules, descriptive literature,
illustrations catalogues, brochures, performance and test data, wiring and control
diagrams and other drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials equipment,
piping ducting and conducting systems as requested to show that the materials,
equipment or systems and position there to conform to the Contract Documents.
The term “manufactured” as used in the Contract applies to standard units usually
mass produced. The term “fabricated” as used in the Contract means items
specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design
requirements.
Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items,
indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and
electrical installations in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure and
incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions.
Product Data is defined as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,
illustrations, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to
illustrate a material product or system for some portion of the work.
Samples are defined as physical examples submitted by the Contractor, which
illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which
work will be judged.
The Contractor shall, as required by the Contract, submit composite coordination
drawings showing the locations and sizes of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing and
public health installation work in relation to the structural and architectural work
together with all builders work requirements for coordination purposes. The
composite coordination shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail to show overall
dimensions of ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural members and
related architectural features, and shall show clearances between such work together

with all openings and other builders work requirements. Coordination drawings shall
be submitted to the Engineer in the same manner and quantity as for shop drawings.
In particular the Contractor will confirm with the following requirements:-
a. The Contractor shall prepare a dimensioned layout and required sections for
all works as necessary for use as a coordination drawing and distribute
these.
b. The Contractor shall submit individual Shop Drawings following the
distribution of the coordination drawings and shall bear a stamp indicating
that the work has been coordinated with all trades.
c. The Contractor shall employ a senior design coordinator with sufficient
relevant experience in the coordination of services installation to perform
this duty.
The MEP sub-contractor shall prepare composite coordination drawings and
installation layouts, when required, to depict proposed solutions for tight site
conditions. The composite drawings and installation layouts shall be coordinated on
the site by the Contractor for proper relationship to the work of all other trades, based
on the site conditions. Builders works drawings shall show Mechanical and Electrical
requirements combined taking into account of structural beams, columns and the like.
The Contractor shall review approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in
such sequence as to cause no delay in the work of the Employer, all Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples and Composite Coordination Drawings required by the
Contract Documents.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite
Co-ordination Drawings the Contractor represents that he has determined and
verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related
thereto, or will do so and that he has checked and coordinated the information
contained within such submittals with the requirements of the work and of the
Contract and Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents by the Engineer’s approval of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite Co-ordination Drawings unless the
Contractor has specifically informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the
time of submission and Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation.
The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite Coordination Drawings by
the Engineers consent thereof.
The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Composite Co-ordination Drawings, to
revisions other than those requested by the Engineer on previous submittals.
No portion of work requiring submission of a Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples
and Composite Co-ordination Drawings shall commence until the submittal has been

approved by the Engineer. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with
approved submittals.
10.3 Number of Copies for Approval

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following number of copies for
approval: -
a. Shop Drawings - 3 No Paper Copies
- 1 No DVD / CD formatted for AutoCAD 2007.
b. Product Data - 3 No Paper indexed and bound copies
c. Samples - 1 No labelled sample (labels to be on rear side)
d. Composite Co-ordinated - 3 No paper copies
Drawings - 1 No DVD / CD formatted for AutoCAD 2007.
Where the Contractor is connected to an IMS system the Contractor may issue the
copies through the electronic system. This condition does not relieve the Contractor
from submitting the paper copies specified above.
10.4 Contractor’s Responsibilities

All drawings prepared by the Contractor at his own cost shall be submitted at the
appropriate time to the Engineer. The Engineer shall check the drawings in a
reasonable time and stamp them with the appropriate status. The drawings shall then
be returned to the Contractor. This shall be the only accepted and contractual
method. Such approval shall not relieve the aforementioned parties of responsibility
for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in their submittals.
If the Engineer shall instruct the re-drawing, alteration or amending of any of the
submitted drawings which, in his sole opinion, do not properly interpret the intent of
the Contract or for any reason do not comply with good building practices, then the
Contractor shall ensure the carrying out of the Engineers instructions and no claim for
extra payment shall be allowed for any reason in this respect.
The Contractor shall include, within the Clause 14 programme, a detailed programme
for the production for the drawings and information under Clause 7.2 of the General
Conditions of the contract. This shall be issued within 14 calendar days of receipt of
the Contract Agreeement. The programme that will be subject to scrutiny of the
Engineer shall be compatible with the programme for the construction works. The
programme shall show the following in detail:-
a. Dates on which the Contractor shall commence the drawings;
b. Dates on which the Contractor shall submit the drawings to the Engineer;
c. Period for the Engineer to check and approve drawings, which is to be not
less than 21 calendar days;
d. Date of commencement of the relevant work on site;

e. Any other information the Engineer may request.
All drawings and title blocks shall be prepared in accordance with the Procedures
Manual.
All drawings by the Contractor shall be prepared in a clear and proper manner, with
adequate lettering size so that the drawings will be easily legible even when
reproduced on a reduced scale. They shall be drawn in black on a white background
to facilitate printing bearing at the bottom right corner the approved Contractor
reference, title block and number and the Durrat Marina logo.
All drawings by the Contractor shall be orientated to match the design drawings and
shall have a key plan identifying the location or area of the works to which they apply.
They shall also bear indication and make reference to the geographic coordinates of
the site.
When a drawing is revised the particulars of the current revision shall be clearly
marked or clouded, to facilitate checking. All prior revision numbers and references of
drawings possibly superseded by the current issue shall also be clearly shown.
When drawings are submitted for approval without complying with these
requirements, they will be rejected.
Re-submission of drawings not approved shall be made using the same procedures
as in the original submission.
The Contractor shall ensure that drawings etc, submitted for approval are forwarded
in sufficient and reasonable time prior to the date required for approval to permit
amendments to be made.
If the Engineer should instruct the Contractor to alter, amend or re-draw any of the
drawings, which in his opinion are not satisfactory, no claim for reimbursement will be
considered. The Contractor is to comply with this requirement immediately as no
claim for additional payment or an extension of time to complete the Works will be
allowed for any reason whatsoever.
10.5 Design Development

The Contractor shall be responsible for developing typical details indicated in the
Engineer’s drawings into construction details through the use of his own expertise
and that of the specialists employed by the Contractor.
10.6 As Built Drawings

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer at the time of completion of the Works
defined in Clause 48.1 of the Conditions of the Main Contract all relevant “As Built
Drawings” to the approval of the Engineer.
These drawings shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer as indicated in the
General Requirement Section 24.3.

As Built drawings shall be deemed to include the drawings listed in the Conditions of
Contract, together with any further drawings issued under Clause 7 of the Conditions
of the Main Contract and shop and composite coordination drawings as defined in
Clause 10.2 hereof.

11 Programme
11.1 General
The establishment and continual monitoring of a detailed, Critical Path Method (CPM)
programme is essential for the management of the Project. The Employer’s
Representative has established a Master program for the Development; however, the
Contractor is required to provide a detailed CPM programme establishing key
milestones and completion dates for the various sections of the Contract. This
programme will be referred to as the ‘Durrat Marina Infrastructure Programme’ (DMI).
Whilst the Durrat Marina Infrastructure (DMI) Programme is the responsibility of the
Contractor, it is also to be utilised as a project tool by the Engineer, Employer’s
Representative and Quantity Surveyor. Consequently, their input will be required from
time to time and the programme will in effect be owned by all parties.
Primavera P6 (or above) Planning software is to be utilised by the Contractor as the
main programming control software for the Contract. This version will be utilised for
the duration of the Contract and is not to be updated without the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall employ a Planning Engineer proficient in the use of all aspects
of Primavera P6 Planner, for the duration of the Contract. The Planning Engineer
should be experienced in the construction methodology, logic and sequence of
Infrastructure networks, Roads and Bridges and Utility structures including STP,
Overhead and underground water storage structures, MEP, finishes, fit-out and
commissioning. Additional experience is required in project controls systems and
reporting methods.
The Contractor will be responsible for providing, at intervals specified in the Contract,
a Primavera P6 programme, which must establish the following:-
1. A logical succession of design, procurement, manufacturing and installation,
testing and commissioning activities from the commencement of the Project
until Taking-Over by the Employer.
2. A clear definition of each activity including resource, plant, equipment and
major material quantities as resource. If required by the Engineer, the
Contractor will submit a schedule describing the scope of each programmed
activity.
3. A clear identification of key interfacing activities, including design submittals
and approvals, major material and equipment deliveries, off-site
manufacturing processes, and all other external constraints that may affect
the completion of the Project; including all submissions, approvals and
permits from the relevant Statutory Authorities.
4. Key dates for the provision of design information by the Engineer and award
by the Employer of separately procured Contract to meet the completion
date.

5. A clear narrative explaining the timing of events.

6. Agreement of the interim milestones, programme co-ordination
requirements, times for completion and key dates stated in the Contract.
7. Key Date Schedule
8. Detailed plan for the procurement of provisional sums, including latest date
for approval from the Employer.
11.2 Durrat Marina Infrastructure (DMI) Programme (Clause 14

Programme)
12.2.1 The Contractor shall submit the DMI Project Programme to the Engineer, copied to
the Employer’s Representative, within 14 days of the receipt of the Contract
Agreement for a review by the Engineer. The presentation and minimum information
to be included with the Durrat Marina Project programme is as follows.
a) The DMI Project Programme is to be submitted in a Level 3 format. Refer to
11.8 copy and distribution requirements.
b) It shall demonstrate the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry out
the Works and the time limits for the carrying out of each activity, or group of
activities. Appropriate activities shall be logically linked with leads, lags and
constraints in accordance with the proposed sequence of construction.
c) All interfaces and Key Dates as detailed in the Contract.
d) The time limits within which the submission and approval by the Engineer of
any drawings, specifications or other submissions produced by the
Contractor as the case may be are required.
e) The dates by which the Engineer, and/or sub-consultants shall supply all
drawings and information with respect to each activity or group of activities.
f) Imposed dates and contractual dates shall be shown as calendar dates.
The programme is to cover all aspects of the design, approval, procurement,
construction, installation, removal and commissioning of the temporary and
permanent works for the whole of the DMI Project. Refer to Section 11.3, 11.5, 11.6,
11.7 and 11.9 also.
The programme will be prepared in a bar chart format that will indicate a clearly
defined critical path for the Project.
In addition to the DMI Project Programme, the Contractor shall submit a general
description of the methods to be adopted and assumptions it has made regarding
construction containing inter alia the following:
g) Arrangements and methods proposed to be adopted for the execution of the
Works.
h) Assumptions made.

i) Daily working hours, and a schedule of dates on which work will not be
carried out on site.
j) A description of the details of the plant and man-power to be utilised as
graphically demonstrated in the activity resources and histograms included
with the CPM.
k) A schedule indicating which work shall be carried out by the Contractor’s
direct work force and work which is proposed to be carried out by
Subcontractors and/or the Employers Direct Contractors.
l) A statement as to the manner in which the Contractor proposes to monitor
the production output of each of its Subcontractors.
m) Methodology of all temporary facilities installations, maintenance and
management.
11.2.2 The Engineer, in consultation with the Employer’s Representative shall within 14 days
return the DMI Project Programme to the Contractor with comments.
The Contractor shall then develop this programme into a more detailed Level 4
programme taking into account the following further requirements and issue to the
Engineer within a further 42 day period:
n) Inclusion of more detailed activities.
o) A printout in bar chart format, broken down by activity showing the principal
labour and plant resources required for each activity.
p) Histograms and ‘S’ curves for each category of labour and principal items of
plant.
q) All major assumptions such as time units used, etc, shall be indicated.
r) Cost loading
s) Key Performance Indicator graphs for each of the major elements of the
project
11.2.3 The Engineer, in consultation with the Project Manager, shall within 14 days return the
DMI Project Programme to the Contractor with final comments.
Within 14 days of receipt of the Engineer’s final comments on the programme, the
Contractor shall submit a revised conforming programme to the Engineer for his
consent. Upon receipt of the Engineer’s consent, this programme will formally be
known as the DMI Project Programme - Baseline’, the basis against which the Project
progress will be measured. This programme will, in effect, be the ‘Clause 14’
programme.
This DMI Project Programme – Baseline’ will be the fundamental management tool
against which the performance of all parties to the project will be measured.
12.2.4 Programmes, commentaries and recommendations are to be submitted for review
and comment by the Engineer as follows:-

t) The Contractor shall submit with the Contractor’s Monthly Report a

progressed DMI Project Programme to show progress against the baseline
and a commentary on the reasons for any delays, measured against the
baseline programme and details of mitigation measures taken. The
Contractor shall also show labour resource and plant resource within the
monthly report. These programmes must be submitted in accordance with
12.8.
u) The Contractor shall submit, with the Contractor’s Monthly Report,
recommendations for maintaining the Contract on programme including any
associated costs.
v) The Engineer may request that the Contractor submit weekly reports for
sections of the Works where the Engineer considers such sections of work
crucial to the overall progress of the Works.
w) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review all Contractor and
Subcontractors’ procurement, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery
programmes.
Any issue of the progressed DMI Project Programme submitted by the Contractor is
to reflect the Key Date Schedule shown in the Contract and the various
subcontractors’ programmes. As Provisional Sum Subcontractors are progressively
engaged, the Contractor is to update the progressed programme to reflect the dates
agreed with the Subcontractors. These amendments are not to be made to the ‘DMI
Project Programme – Baseline’ unless authorised by the Engineer and Employer’s
Representative.
11.3 Programme Content

The DMI Project Programme shall include the following where applicable, but not be
limited to:-
• Award of Contract
• Key Dates Schedule
• Contractual Milestone Dates
• Completion Date
• Method Statement Submission Dates
• Programme submission dates
• QA/QC and Safety Manual submission dates
• Shop drawing production trade by trade
• Shop drawing approval periods
• Material submission dates
• Material approval periods
• Test Dates
• Procurement windows for provisional sum items
• Temporary Works installation and removal (including cranes / hoists etc.)
• Contractor design and installation periods

• Structures (Pump Stations, Sub-Stations, etc)

• Mains Power ‘on’ date
• Mains water ‘on’ date
• Mains drainage ‘connection’ date (Storm water and Foul water)
• Core finishes complete
• Access dates
• Plant equipment commissioning periods
• Staff training periods.
• Approval of O&M Manuals
• Final Clean
• Sectional completion and handover dates
• Defects liability periods
• Demobilisation of the Contractor from Site
Ideally, activities within the Level 4 programme shall be of no longer than two weeks
in duration, preferably one week, and must be able to be easily monitored and be
accurately progressed on a weekly basis.
11.4 WBS and Activity Structure

The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) and Activity Coding shall be jointly agreed by
the Contractor, Engineer and Project Manager and be consistent with all elements of
the project documentation, i.e. document control, bills of quantities, cost coding,
procurement where possible.
Additionally, any agreed WBS and Activity structures shall be in line with the overall
Durrat Marina Development programming strategy.
11.5 Critical Path Analysis

The Contractor shall include a critical path analysis in the DMI Project Programmes.
In order for this to be meaningful, the programme must be fully linked and contain no
open ended activities to a completion date and is not to include any artificial or forced
constraints.
11.6 Manpower Resource

The Contractor shall input the manpower resources and production rates into the
programme to substantiate the resulting bar chart.
The Contractor shall provide a separate resource histogram indicating the
supervision and manpower allocation over the Contract duration.
11.7 Plant and Equipment

The Contractor shall input the plant and equipment resources and production rates
into the programme to substantiate the resulting bar chart.

The Contractor shall provide a separate resource histogram indicating the plant and
equipment allocation over the Contract duration.
11.8 Programme Issue

All submissions of programmes by the Contractor to the Engineer for review,
including, inter alia, the DMI Project Programme, update programmes, shall conform
with the following:
a) One hard colour copy of each schedule as described hereinafter;
b) Each page of each schedule shall contain:
1. A clear descriptive title;
2. A comprehensive nomenclature;
3. A table indicating programme number, the data date and printing date;
4. A page number indicating the total pages in the set;
5. Signed and approve in line with QA procedures
c) An electronic copy in PDF format.
d) An electronic copy in P6 format, which includes where applicable the baseline
copy. Electronic versions must not be locked or password protected in any way.
e) The Engineer shall review or return each submission to the Contractor with
comments detailing any required amendments.
f) Additionally, one hard colour copy shall be issued to the Employer’s
Representative.
11.9 Commissioning Programme

The Contractor is required to submit detailed system commissioning programmes for
approval by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the commissioning of the
MEP plant and equipment.
These programmes are to be supported by an overall commissioning strategy
supplemented by detailed system commissioning method statements.
The commissioning regime shall be based on “cause and effect” strategy
11.10 Staff Training

Within the commissioning programme the Contractor is to include a series of staff
training and demonstration activities for the benefit of the Employers Facilities
Manager. The Staff Training is to be incorporated in the Works prior to occupancy by
the Client.
There shall be a minimum of 4No training sessions for each Leading or group of
training activities split as follows:-
• 2No Training Session for Management and Supervision

• 2No Training Session for facilities operations.

The Contractor shall issue a detailed training schedule prior to the completion date
for approval by the Engineer and Employer’s Facilities Manager in conjunction with
the commissioning programme for the Works.
The Staff Training shall cover the general operation and maintenance of the
materials, plant and equipment.
The Contractor is to allow the Employer’s Facilities Manager to attend the
commissioning, testing, calibration and handover sequences for the plant and
equipment to permit familiarisation of the operation, servicing and maintenance of the
plant and equipment installed during the commissioning of the Works.
11.11 Prefabrication
The Contractor is encouraged to use prefabricated solutions for many items of work
that offer the advantage of “just in time” delivery and crane these components into the
Permanent Works.
11.12 Out of Hours Working

The Contractor is required to indicate in the Clause 14 programme, where possible,
those Works that are to be undertaken outside of the normal working hours stated in
the Conditions of Contract.

12 Progress Management
12.1 Progress Meetings
The Contractor will be required to attend weekly Progress Meetings with the Engineer
and Employer’s Representative to report the progress of the design, procurement and
construction works. The minuted meeting shall include:-
• Health and Safety

• Design information required
• Procurement Status
• Approval of Submittals.
• Progress of Works.
• Co-ordination Issues
• Programme Review
• Mitigation of Delays.
• Variations
• Payments
• Quality Control
A project inaugural meeting will be held in the Engineer's office within 7 days of the
issue of the Instruction to Commence. The purpose of the meeting will be to set out
and agree the project procedures and the responsibilities of all parties
12.2 Contractor’s Monthly Report

The Contractor’s Monthly Report will form part of the overall Durrat Marina Monthly
Report that will be issued to the Employer on the 28th day of each month.
The Contractor’s Monthly Report is to be issued to the Engineer on the 25th day of
each month containing the following details concerning the Contract:-
• Health and Safety

• Contract commencement date.
• Contract completion date.
• Forecast completion date.
• Reasons for delay and actions taken to mitigate the delay.
• Extension of time requested/awarded.
• Summary of the progress of procurement, contractor design and site works.
• Outstanding approvals.
• Key information required in the next 4 weeks.
• Outline Statement of Final Account
• Quality Control
• Appendix A - Progressed DMSI Project Programme incl. baseline.
• Appendix B - Cumulative labour return for preceding month.
• Appendix C - Progress photographs
• Appendix D - Schedule of EI’s

12.3 Daily Reports

The Contractor shall submit Daily Reports to the Engineer by 10.00am each working
day. These reports shall contain details of the following:-
• Daily Labour Returns for the Contractor.

• Daily Construction Plant and Equipment Returns (in particular the arrival and
departure dates).
• Daily Delivery Schedule (e.g. bulk deliveries or key plant and equipment).
The Contractor shall keep a daily site diary to record general progress and any
significant events, the number of personnel and list of Subcontractors on-site,
temperature and weather conditions, meetings, visits and inspections, delays,
unusual events and accidents.
The original copy of the site diary shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at
any time without notice. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of the
daily diary in part or in full, if directed.
As a guide, the diary records shall include:
• List of Subcontractors at the Site.

• Number of personnel on-site.
• Temperature range, rainfall and general weather conditions.
• Instructions, orders and requests by any relevant Service Authorities.
• Meetings and significant decisions.
• Industrial staff requirements and actions.
• Services connected and disconnected.
• Equipment tests and commissioning.
• Partial completions and occupancies.
• Accidents.
• Unusual events.
• Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
• Emergency procedures and orders.
12.4 Progress Photographs

The Contractor shall arrange for progress photographs to be taken of each area
where works are ongoing, by a professional photographer each month and these
shall be incorporated into the Contractor’s Monthly Report.
The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer 6 No. locations external to the Project
from which record photographs will be taken each month.
The Contractor shall submit to the client and engineer every 2 months a set of aerial
photographs of the site.

In addition, the Contractor shall take other photographs that will support or illustrate
the points described in the summary of the progress of the Works.
Photographs shall be taken using a minimum 5 mega-pixel digital camera and saved
in jpeg format on a CD-ROM. All photographs shall be fully indexed by date. The file
name shall indicate the subject and orientation of the photograph. Printed copies of
progress photographs on photographic paper shall be submitted on a weekly basis to
the Engineer. The CD-ROM shall become the property of the Employer on
completion of Contract.
12.5 Weather Records

The Contractor shall provide a computer based weather station, which shall record
the following:
• Temperature: high-low
• Wind speed and direction
• Rainfall
• Humidity
The Contractor shall provide and operate a Weather Wizard III by Davis instruments
with software or similar approved for data acquisition.

13 Cost Management
13.1 Cost Meetings
To facilitate the cost certainty of the Project, the Contractor will be required to attend
cost meetings with the Engineer, Project Manager, who will chair the meeting and
Cost Manager who will produce a written record of the proceedings. The cost
meetings will be held weekly and will review:-
• Contract Sum
• Status of Variation Account
• Statement of Final Account
• Status of Payment Account
• Commercial Issues
• Instructions Required (EI’s)
13.2 Monthly Cost Report

The Contractor is required to submit an Outline Monthly Cost Report as part of the
Contractors Monthly Report:-
• Outline Statement of Final Account

• Schedule of Provisional Sums
• Payments.
• Cash Flow forecasts
13.3 Cost Management Resource

The Contractor is to provide as a minimum 1 no. Senior QS and 2 no. Assistant QS’s
to satisfy Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract. This resource is to be adjusted
during the course of the Contract to meet the demands of the variation account.
During the construction of the Works, the Employer’s Quantity Surveyor may issue a
“Request for Change” (RFC), giving details of a potential variation and request
assistance in providing the necessary cost and programme estimate required in order
to submit to the Employer for approval. The intention will be to agree in advance,
where possible, the impact on the Contract, if any, of the RFC prior to its issue as a
variation.
The Contractor is to use his best endeavours to give a clear response to all RFC’s
raised by or issued to him within 7 calendar days identifying any cost or time
implications associated with the variation if it were to become an instructed change.
The Contractor is to use his best endeavours to provide sufficient staff and any other
resources required to respond to each RFC within the stated 7 days.
13.4 Cost Management General

Definitions of items marked 'PROVISIONAL'

Items marked "Provisional" included in the Tender Documents shall be deemed to be

an item subject to the Engineer's confirmation or deletion and that in the event that
the item is confirmed then the quantities shall be subject to re-measurement by the
Contractor for the Quantity Surveyors agreement. In the event that an item marked
provisional is deleted from the Contractor's scope of work then the item, and the
stated cost as included in the Tender Document shall be deleted and no claim
whatsoever pertaining to the deletion will be entertained.
Definitions of items marked 'FIX ONLY'
The term "fix only" where used in the Tender Documents in connection with P.C.
Sums for materials and goods to be supplied by domestic Suppliers and materials
and goods supplied by the Employer shall be deemed to include where applicable for
ascertaining exact requirements, placing firm orders anywhere, all bank charges,
inspection of goods before dispatch, for taking delivery, clearing shipping papers,
unshipping and getting ashore, paying port charges and all other charges in
connection therewith, insuring the materials and goods from the time of unshipping to
the time of unloading at the site or such other designated storage area, sorting,
checking and clearing from the dockside and transporting from point of unloading to
the site or other such designated area, taking delivery on site or such other
designated storage area, unloading, unpacking, sorting, replacement of short loaded
or damaged goods and preparing necessary claims for materials and goods missing
or damaged in transit, storing, protecting, fitting and fixing in the manner prescribed
or specified, testing as instructed or specified, returning packing materials carriage
paid and obtaining credit therefore.
Definition of PROVISIONAL SUMS
Unless stated to the contrary, where Provisional Sums are included in the
Tender Documents they shall be deemed to include for Main Contractors' general
attendance and special attendance. Such sums shall be expended as directed by the
Engineer and deducted wholly or in part if not required.
Definition of PRIME COST SUMS
Unless stated to the contrary, where Prime Cost Sums are included in the Tender
Documents they shall be deemed to include for work by domestic subcontractors.
Further Definition of Provisional Sum and Prime Cost Items
Further definition of Provisional Sum and Prime Cost Items and procedures are set
out in Clauses 58.1, 58.1a, 58.2, 58.2a, 58.3 and 58.4 of the Conditions of Contract.
Sub-Contract prices shall be obtained and submitted net of the Contractor's agreed
Profit and Overheads as defined below. The general and special attendances shall
be deemed to be included in the Prime Cost Sums. Procedure for the procurement of
sub-contract works will be as follows:
1. Engineer to prepare and forward the working drawings and specifications /
concept drawings and performance specifications to the main contractor, in

line with the agreed schedule for procurement in accordance with the Key
Dates Schedule
2. Main contractor to submit a list of proposed sub-contractors (Min 3-5) to the
Engineer for formal approval.
3. Engineer in consultation with Employer's Representative review and
approve the list.
4. Main contractor to float the s/c tender enquiry to the approved sub-
contractors strictly in accordance with the main contract conditions. Main
contractor is to provide a copy of all the tender enquiries to the Engineer.
5. The contractor to advise the tenderers should be advised to submit the
tender in two envelops i.e one envelope for the technical matters and other
for the price. Both the envelopes should be put together in a single
envelope. All the tenders should be addressed to the main contractor.
6. All the bids for the sub-contract works should be submitted in the office of
the Engineer, on the agreed date.
7. Upon evaluation of the tenders, Main contractor to enter into a domestic
subcontract agreement with the competitive tenderer and furnish a copy to
the Engineer / Construction Cost Manager
Definition for PC rate for materials
Where a PC rate per m2 or the like is indicated in the tender documents, the PC rate
shall be deemed to be the cost of material delivered to the site excluding profit and
overheads. The PC rate shall be adjusted against the actual net cost per m2 of the
material delivered to site. Any adjustment shall be based on actual costs excluding
profit and overheads. The rate indicated by the contractor for the works shall be
inclusive of wastage, cutting, etc. and the like as detailed in the measurement
preamble
Definition of Profit
For all purposes in this Bill of Quantities "Profit" means the Contractor's gain from
the Works as distinct from Overheads and any other priced items.
Definition of Overheads
For all purposes in this Bill of Quantities "Overheads" means the contribution that the
Works will make to the central office costs of the Contractor's business and shall
cover the cost of all matters not separately priced in the Bills of Quantities.

14 Meetings
14.1 Regular Meetings
The Contractor will be required to attend the following meetings on a regular basis:-
• Core Team Meeting - every month

• Progress Meeting - every week
• Design Meeting - every week
• Change Control Meetings - every week
• Procurement Meetings - every week
• Cost Meetings - every month
• Risk & Programme Meeting - every month
• Health & Safety Meetings - every month
14.2 Infrequent Meetings

The Contractor will be required to attend the following meetings as required by the
Employer, Engineer, or Project Manager:-
• Design Development Meetings

• Quality Control Meetings
• Statutory / Utility Authority Meetings
• Communications Meetings
• Value Engineering Meetings
• Interior Design Meetings
• Operational Meeting

15 Quality Control and Method Statements

15.1 Quality Assurance
The Contractor will be required to have an approved and certified quality
management and assurance scheme in place.
The quality assurance scheme shall be ISO 9002 or other equally internationally
recognised scheme approved by the Engineer.
Materials shall be obtained from supplier’s operating systems in accordance with
either ISO 9002 or an in-house system approved by the Engineer.
15.2 Quality Plan

The Contractor will be required to submit a Project Specific Quality Plan within 28
days of the award of the Contract. The Quality Plan will be structured in the following
format and detail the following provisions to be implemented during the Contract:-
1. Organisation
• Company quality policy statement;
• Director responsible;
• Organisation, resources and responsibilities;
• Resident Quality Manager;
• Accreditation;
• Record Keeping & Audit Trail;
• Bonds & Warranties;
• Cost Control;
• Clients Aspirations;
• Client Operational requirements;
• Tenant Liaison Procedure.
2. Procedures
• Project Scope of Works;
• Company Quality Manual & Procedures’
• Contract Documentation;
• Control of Contractors Works;
• Procurement and Manufacturers;
• Provision of stage quality checklists;
• Off site quality management;
• Information Management;
• Method Statements;
• Inspections and test equipment;
• Workmanship;
• Training;
• Corrective Action Procedures;

• Maintenance of Records;
• Maintenance of Test Certificates;
• Handover Procedure;
15.3 Quality Manager

The Contractor is to employ a suitably qualified Quality Manager to manage the
various quality issues on site and to ensure that all samples, mock-ups and job
standards are provided in a timely manner for the Engineer’s inspection.
15.4 Samples /Mock-ups /Job Standards

The Contractor is to refer to the Specifications to ascertain the Engineer’s
requirements for samples and mock-ups.
Where required in the Specifications, the Contractor shall submit control samples of
products and materials, sections, components and finishes, indicating colour, gloss,
pattern, texture and the like.
The Contractor shall label or mark each sample stating the product name,
manufacturer’s reference number, name of colour, contact details and date, and
cross reference to transmittal number.
The Contractor shall pay costs of delivering samples to and from the Engineer’s office
In addition to these the Contractor is to provide a first in-place installation for each
element of the Works for the approval of the Engineer prior to the bulk installation of
any part of the Works.
The first in-place installation will form part of the Permanent Works if approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor is required to obtain the Engineer’s formal sign-off for all first in-place
installations prior to proceeding with the remaining installation of that element.
Samples, if approved by the Engineer, will be the minimum standard
Costs of any tests are to be borne by the Contractor
15.5 Operation and Maintenance Manual

Please refer to General Specifications Section 24.4.
The Contractor is to review with the supplier of each and every product included in
the Permanent Works and include in all material submissions the recommended:-
• Cleaning method
• Cleaning agents and detergents etc.
• Frequency of cleaning.
• Servicing agents.
• Frequency of regular plant, equipment, system servicing.

• Manufactures recommended list of consumable parts and equipment

• Manufactures cost at source for the list of consumable parts and equipment.
In most instances the selection of these products will be reviewed by the Employers
Facilities Manager with a view to the proper future maintenance of the Development.
The Quality Manager will be responsible for capturing all such approvals and
inserting these documents into the O & M Manual.
15.6 Information Management

The Contractor’s Project Specific Quality Plan is to take full cognisance of the Project
Procedures Manual. All the procedures adopted in this Manual are to be adopted by
the Contractor providing a consistent information management system across the
whole of the Development.
15.7 Method Statements

The Contractor shall submit detailed Method Statements describing how the Works
are to be designed, procured, constructed and completed.
The Contractor is referred to the technical Specifications to ascertain the specific
requirements for each element of the Works.
Within 14 days of the award of Contract the Contractor shall submit a General
Method Statement, with the DMI Project Programme, describing how each stage of
the Project is to be designed, procured, constructed, commissioned and handed over.
Refer to the relevant sections of the technical Specifications of the Contract
documents and include these requirements.
The General Method Statement is to be supplemented during the duration of the
Contract by Detail Method Statements that describe how key works, trades and MEP
systems are to be designed, installed and commissioned.
In addition to the above all hazardous work activities are to be described by the issue
of Detail Method Statement with hazard analysis/ risk assessment/ job safety analysis
All Method Statements are to be issued to the Engineer for his approval.
Each Method Statement shall be structured and prepared by the Contractor in the
following format:-
1.0 Scope of Works
2.0 Access/Egress
3.0 Lighting
Safety Lighting
Task Lighting
Safe Systems of Work


General
Plant and Equipment Schedule
Personal Protective Equipment
Power
Working Platforms
5.0 Materials
6.0 Sequence / method of work
7.0 Programme
8.0 Resource / Labour
9.0 Risks and Controls
Hazards/Risks
Control Measures/Permits
3rd Party Protection.
Environmental Considerations
10.0 Technical Information
11.0 Emergency Arrangements
General
Fire Precautions
Communication
12.0 Training
13.0 Supervision
14.0 Working Hours
15.0 Housekeeping
16.0 Other Information
In addition to the above the Contractor shall amplify the provisions of the Method
Statements with layout drawings, site plans, design drawings, sequence drawings,
craneage plans and traffic management.
If any part of the Contractor's work depends upon for proper execution or results
upon the work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly
report to the Engineer any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such
proper execution and results. His failure to inspect and report shall constitute an
acceptance of the other contractor's work, except as to defects which may develop in
the other contractor's work after its execution.

To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work the Contractor shall measure
work already in place and shall at once report to the Engineer any discrepancy
between executed work and the drawings.
15.8 Prefabrication
The Contractor is encouraged to maximise the use of prefabricated solutions for all
aspects of the Works to achieve the high quality of factory assembled products using
a trained skilled labour force.
15.9 Independent Test House

The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials at an Independent Test
House approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
Refer to the technical Specifications and consult with the Engineer for details of the
materials to be tested.
15.10 Tests and Inspections

The Contractor shall agree the dates and times of tests and inspections with the
Engineer, 7 calendar days in advance, to enable the Engineer and other affected
parties to be present. On the previous working day to each such test or inspection,
the Contractor is to confirm that the work is ready. In the case where the work will
not be ready, the Contractor shall agree a new date and time with the Engineer and
inform all parties.
The Contractor shall engage the services of an approved independent laboratory to
undertake all testing of materials specified in, or may reasonably be inferred from, the
Contract. The results of these tests will be taken into consideration by the Engineer in
deciding whether the quality of materials utilised and workmanship achieved by the
Contractor comply with the requirements of the Specifications. The Contractor shall
be responsible for arranging with the independent testing laboratory for the timely
carrying out of all such testing specified in the Contract, at not less than the
frequencies and in the manner specified. The Contractor shall promptly provide the
Engineer with copies of the results of all such testing carried out by the independent
laboratory.
For the purposes of this specification, an "approved independent laboratory" shall
mean a materials testing laboratory with ISO/IEC 17025 Accreditation placed on the
Bahrain Ministry of Works, Materials Engineering Directorate’s Approved Vendor List
15.11 Test Certificates

The Contractor shall submit a copy of each test certificate to the Engineer within a
time period agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer depending on the
specifics of the tests being carried out. The Contractor shall keep all test certificates
on site.

15.12 Defective Works

As soon as possible after any part(s) of the work or any products are known to be not
in accordance with the Contract or appear that they may not be in accordance, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for all necessary remedial
works in order to rectify the works to follow the contract.
Should such proposal be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Engineer will issue
instructions to the Contractor. All necessary costs associated with the remedial works
shall be borne by the Contractor.
15.13 Inspection and Testing Costs

Wherever the inspection and testing show that the work, materials or goods are not in
accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall bear all costs. The Contractor
shall also bear all costs necessary for re-inspecting and re-testing as necessary.
These measures shall not be considered as grounds for an extension of time.
15.14 Thermometers
Provide onsite and maintain in accurate condition:-
• A maximum and minimum thermometer for measuring the atmospheric shade

temperature on the site.
• A digital thermometer for measuring the concrete and ground temperature.
15.15 Defects
The Contractor is required to adopt a positive attitude towards the treatment of
defects.
During the construction phase the Quality Manager will be responsible for the
generation of Corrective Action Request and Non-Compliance Reports.
The Contractor’s objective shall be to deliver the Project on the completion date with
zero defects. In order to achieve this position the Contractor shall introduce a system
of staged checklists and all stage defects shall be corrected as an ongoing process.
The Quality Manager will be responsible for the collation of all defects lists issued by
the Engineer in the agreed format supervising the remedial works and obtaining the
Engineer’s re-inspection and signoff.
The Contractor will be required to start offering the completed Works for the
Engineer’s inspection at least 2 weeks prior to any Sectional Completion Date or
Completion Date. The Contractor is to endeavour to clear all defects arising prior to
the completion date.
The Contractor is referred to the General Specifications sections for As Built
Drawings and Q & M Manuals.

15.16 Inspections by the Engineer

The Contractor is to provide a minimum of two working day written notice to the
Engineer for all inspections (day or night). The Contractor is to carefully plan and co-
ordinate all night-time inspections closely with the Engineer,
15.17 Location of Materials in the Works

The Contractor shall employ suitable systems of work that allow tracking of all
batched materials and their final location in the Works. This system shall be applied
to the Civil, structural, building and MEP works.
15.18 Tolerances
Tolerances may be specified in several different ways. In the case of linear
dimensions, position, verticality, level, squareness and bow, permissible deviations
shall, unless otherwise stated, be both positive and negative and of equal numerical
value.
In certain cases permissible deviations may be positive or negative but not equal.
Deviations such as twist and bow edge do not usually have any positive or negative
sense. In such cases the permissible deviation is assumed to be positive and is
equal to the tolerance in numerical value.
The Contractor shall construct each of the various parts of the Works to the degree of
accuracy specified. The degree of accuracy may be one of the following:
a. Degree of Accuracy I for use where a high degree of accuracy is

unnecessary, e.g. mass foundations
b. Degree of Accuracy II for what is commonly called “good work”
c. Degree of Accuracy III where the use of special, as opposed to normal,

methods or materials (or both) is warranted despite the probability of higher
costs than will be incurred by the application of Degree of Accuracy II.
Except where another degree of accuracy is specified in a specification or the project

specification or given on the drawings, Degree of Accuracy II shall apply.
The following table indicates the different degrees of accuracy:

Permissible deviation,
Degree of accuracy
I II III
mm mm mm
(a) Reinforcement:
(1) Spacing between two adjacent bars ± 25 ± 20 ± 15
(2) Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars ± 40 ± 30 ± 20
(b) Formwork:
Formwork shall be so constructed as to ensure that the position of the
finished work will be as specified, subject to the relevant permissible
deviation given in (c) or (d) below, as applicable.
(c) Foundations: Mass and reinforced concrete:
(1) Position on plan of any edge or surface measured from the nearest ± 50 ± 35 ± 20
grid line or agreed centre line
(2) Linear dimension on plan cast against excavation sides ± 60 ± 40 ± 20
(3) Linear dimension on plan cast against formwork ± 30 ± 20 ± 10
(4) Level of underside of concrete -40+20 -30+15 -
20+10
(5) Surface level (i.e., top of foundation) (excluding floor slabs) -30+15 -20+10 -10+5
(d) Elements or components above foundations (including floor slabs):
(1) Position on plan of any edge or surface measured from the nearest ± 25 ± 15 ±5
grid line or agreed centre line
(2) Linear (other than cross-section) dimensions ± 30 ± 20 ± 10
(3) Cross-section dimensions -10+20 - 5+15 ±5
(4) Level (deviation from designed level with reference to the nearest -20+10 -15+5 -10+0
transferred datum (TD) of the upper or lower surface, as may be
specified, of any slab or other element or component)
(5) Verticality, per metre of height 5 3 2
(6) Out-of-squareness of a corner or an opening or an element such as a
column (see 6.1.2(c)) for short side of length
(i) Up to and including 0,5 m ± 10 ±5 ±3
(ii) Over 0,5 m up to and including 2 m ± 20 ± 15 ± 10
(iii) Over 2 m, up to and including 4 m ± 25 ± 20 ± 15
(7) Exposed concrete surface:
(i) Flatness of plane surface 10 5 3
(ii) Abrupt changes in a continuous surface 10 5 2
(8) Exposed concrete surface to be plastered:
(i) Flatness of plane surface 15 10 *
(ii) Abrupt changes in a continuous surface 10 5 *
(e) Cover to reinforcement:
No deviation from the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement
will be permitted.
(f) Location of bolding-down bolts:
(1) the centre line of a holding-down bolt from its designated location in plan * ±3 *
(2) The top of the bolt from its designated elevation * -3+5 *
(g) Constituents in concrete mix (including water): % % %
PD of quantities from approved or designated or prescribed mix, as ±5 ±5 ±5
applicable

Where a tolerance given in any specification covering an early stage of construction

conflicts with any tolerance given in a specification covering a subsequent stage of
construction. The tolerance applicable to the subsequent construction stage shall
take precedence.
Where specific references are specified for particular elements of the works, either on
the Drawings or in the relevant Specifications, such specific tolerances shall take
precedence to the general tolerances (degree of accuracy) as specified in Clause
6.2.
No guarantee is given that the full specified tolerances will be available independently
of each other, and the Contractor is cautioned that the liberal or full use of any one or
more of the tolerances may deprive him of the full or any use of tolerances relating to
other aspects of the work.
Except where the contrary is specified, or when clearly not applicable, all quantities
for measurement and payment shall be determined from the 'authorised' dimensions.
These are specified dimensions or those shown on the Drawings or, if changed, as
finally prescribed by the Engineer, without any allowance for the specified tolerances.
Except if otherwise specified all measurements for determining quantities for payment
will be based on the 'authorised' dimensions.
If the work is constructed in accordance with the 'authorised' dimensions plus or
minus the tolerances allowed, the calculation of quantities will be based on the
'authorised' dimensions, regardless of the actual dimensions to which the work has
been constructed.
When the work is not constructed in accordance with the 'authorised' dimensions plus
or minus the tolerances allowed, the Engineer may nevertheless, at his sole
discretion, accept the work for payment. In such cases no payment shall be made for
quantities of work or material in excess of those calculated for the 'authorised'
dimensions, and where the actual dimensions are less than the 'authorised'
dimensions minus the tolerance allowed, quantities for payment shall be calculated
based on the actual dimensions as constructed.

16 Health and Safety Regulations

16.1 Employer’s Environmental Health & Safety Policy
Effective health and safety management is an integral part of the Durrat Marina
culture and represents a key element in all of its business objectives.
Corporately, Durrat Marina is committed to the active promotion and implementation
of the highest standards appertaining to Health and Safety and Welfare and the
Environment. This not only ensures that we fully comply with the requirements of
statutory legislation but also reflects our commitment to the progressive improvement
of current Construction Industry standards. This culture of improvement is applied to
all of our business activities in which we have an interest or influence.
Durrat Marina Health & Safety Policy will be issued to Contractor
16.2 Legislation
The Contractor must comply in full with all applicable Environmental Health and
Safety local and national legislation.
Prior to commencing work on site the Contractor must make himself aware of all the
requirements for the Works and the Site including the Engineer’s requirements, all
relevant legislation, codes of practice and Environmental, Health and Safety
Requirements. In this connection and without limitation, the Contractor shall comply
with all the E. H. & S. requirements, which shall be deemed a fundamental condition
of this Contract.
The Health and Safety Policy to be adopted on site by the Contractor shall comply, as
a minimum standard, with Kingdom of Bahrain Municipality Laws and By Laws.
The Contractor must attempt to implement safety ‘best practice’ wherever possible,
and strive to comply with the following regulations also:
• Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 (UK)

• OH SAS 18001
• And any other system approved by the Engineer
16.3 Project Specific Health and Safety Plan

The Contractor is required to demonstrate a positive attitude to Health and Safety
through the implementation of a preventive management style. The Contractor will be
required to submit prior to commencement of the Works:-
• Company H & S Policy.

• Summary of their recorded accident statistics for the last 5 years.
• One copy of their company H & S Procedures Manual.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Project Specific Health and Safety Plan
in the following format within 28 Calendar days of the award of Contract. The Health
and Safety Plan will detail the following provisions to be implemented during the
Contract.
1. Organisation
• Company Health and Safety Policy statement signed by the MD/CEO
• Statement of Intent
• Statement of Commitment
• Date of Policy
• Director Responsible
2. Arrangements
• Project scope of works
• Training
• Environmental Issues (dust, noise, pollution)
• Distribution of information and communication
• Protective Equipment
• First Aid
• Fire Precautions / Fire Plan
• Emergency Procedures/Evacuation
• Accident Reporting and Audit
• Record Keeping
• Method Statements
• Risk Assessments
• COSHH (Control of Substance Hazardous to Health)
• Safe systems of work
16.4 Residual Risks

The Contractor will be required to identify any residual risks resulting from the design
and construction of the works that are to be taken into account in the construction of
the future building works.
The Contractor in compiling the Operations and Maintenance Manual will be required
to identify any residual risks and hazardous areas resulting from the design and
construction of the building that are to be taken into account in the proper operational
management of the building
16.5 Health and Safety Manager

The Contractor will employ a qualified full time H&S Manager on the Project who will
be responsible for the implementation of the Project Specific H&S Plan and fulfil all
the duties specified therein.
This duty will include the review of all Method Statements and ensuring that the
safety provisions are incorporated and implemented.

The Contractors H&S Manager will inspect the Contract works on a weekly basis and
issue a report to the Contractor and Engineer. Additionally, the Senior Safety Officer
will inspect the works everyday.
The H&S Manager will inspect the Contractor, Subcontractors and fit-out contractors
work each week and issue green, yellow or red cards as appropriate. The H&S
Manager will issue a weekly report to the Engineer including a spreadsheet indicating
the number of green, yellow and red cards issued to the various contractors.
All red card offenders are to be reported to the Engineer who will address this with
the Contractor and Subcontractor.
16.6 First Aid Provisions

All Contractor Offices are to be provided with a First Aid Box. The Contractor shall
provide a First Aid Room adjacent to the permanent works and employ a suitable
number of qualified First Aider’s to be on duty day and night.
16.7 Meetings/Audits/Inspection
The Contractor will be required to arrange/attend the following meetings at regular
intervals during the Contract: -
Site Safety Induction - Every new employee and visitor
Tool Box Talks - At least weekly for each operative
on site
Health and Safety Inspections - Weekly
Health and Safety Meetings - Every 4 weeks
Health and Safety Plan Audit - Every 3 months
Safety Policy Review - Once a year
All the above Meetings/Inspections will be documented by the Contractor and issued
to the Engineer.
A schedule of the Meeting/Audits/Inspections shall be issued to the Engineer within
14 calendar days of the award of Contract.
The Contractor will be responsible for the provision of Tool Box talks to the directly
employed and Contractor’s workforce.
16.8 Accident Reporting

All accidents shall be reported to the Engineer/Contractor immediately. The
Contractor shall submit a formal report to the Engineer/Contractor following the
occurrence of the accident detailing the following information:-
3. Accident Report

• Date of accident
• Location of accident
• Name, address, nationality of injured party
• Nature of injuries sustained
• Treatment rendered including hospital report
• Accident investigation
• Record Photographs
• Remedial measures to be implemented
• Delay to programme
• Lost working hours
• Accident rating
• Insurance claim details.
4. Close-Out Report
• Date injured operative returned to work
• Other details
The Contractor shall issue the completed written Accident Report to the Engineer
within 24 hours of the accident occurring.
The Contractor shall issue the completed Close-Out Report to the Engineer within 3
working days or when all the injured operatives return to work.
16.9 Employer’ Direct Contractors

The Contractors H & S duties will include the policing of the safe working practices of
all contractors employed on site. This includes the Direct Contractors who may be
employed on the project.
The Direct Contractors, whilst on site, will be managed, with regard to Health &
Safety, by the Contractor and will be obliged to follow the Contractors Health & Safety
Plan in its entirety. The Direct Contractors Health and Safety Plan must be in line with
the Contractors Health & Safety Plan
All breaches of the Contractors Health & Safety Plan by the Direct Contractors are to
be curtailed by the Contractor and formally reported to the Engineer.
16.10 Notification of Employer’s Insurance Company

The Engineer shall forward all Accident Reports and Incident Reports to the
Employer’s Insurance Company.
With regard to other insurance incidents, the Contractor shall report all incidents to
the Engineer immediately and provide a report to the Engineer within 24 hours of the
occurrence of the incident detailing:-
1. Incident Report
• Date of Incident

• Location of Incident
• Investigation of Incident
• Record Photographs
• Cause of Incident
• Lost of working hours
• Estimate of financial loss
• Proposed remedial measures and programme
• Estimate cost of remedial measures.
2. Close-Out Report
• Date remedial Works completed
• Engineers Approval
• Loss Adjusters Approval.
16.11 Personal Protective Equipment

The Contractor is to supply all workmen with a safety hat, gloves, safety footwear and
high visibility clothing indicating the company name. This condition is mandatory for
entry onto site. Anyone seen without PPE on site will be removed from site.
In addition, the Contractor will ensure that each workman is provided with the safety
equipment necessary to undertake all hazardous tasks in safety.
The Contractor’s responsibility will extend to the control of the specialist and fit-out
contractors.
16.12 Fire Prevention

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent personal injury, death
and damage to the Works and other property from fire. The Contractor shall comply
with the ‘Joint Code of Practice for Fire Prevention on Construction Sites,’ published
by the Building Employers Confederation and the Loss Prevention Council.
16.13 Fire Plan

The Contractor will provide a Project Specific Fire Plan for the Project. The
Contractor shall comply with the Fire Plan. This may be a dedicated section within the
H & S Plan. This plan will detail:-
• What to do in the event of a fire.

• Who to contact
• The location of fire points
• Method of Alarm (Fire Bell)
• The means of escape.
• Location of Assemble Point.
• Fire Warden and duties
• Evacuation procedure and plans.
• Training

• Communication.
• Reporting.
Fire plans are to be displayed strategically throughout the building and offices. In all
circumstances the upper floors of the building are to be served by a minimum of at
least 2 No. clear, safe, well lit operational staircases. Such staircases shall be located
within a reasonable travel distance from the Work activity. Where the permanent
staircases are not available the Contractor must provide temporary stairs (ladders are
not acceptable).
16.14 Fire Points

The Contractor shall provide within the temporary accommodation and the
Permanent Works a series of Fire Points that will contain as a minimum: -
• Fire Alarms
• CO2 Extinguishers
• Foam Extinguishers
• Fire Blanket
• Eye Wash Kit
This equipment is to be located in “Fire Boxes” that will be painted red and will
display the “Escape Route” from the site to the “Assembly Point”.
The Fire Points are to be located on the Contractors site location plan and at all
levels in the building.
Emergency flowcharts to be displayed, provide monthly report on the activities carried
out on HSE with matrices
16.15 No Smoking
All areas of the site are deemed to be “No Smoking” areas with the exception of:-
• Messing Areas located outside the Permanent Works (building).

All Contractors Offices are deemed “No Smoking” Offices. The Contractor shall
define smoking areas outside the buildings for those employees who wish to smoke.
The Contractor shall provide litterbins with sand trays at these locations.
16.16 Fuel Storage

No fuel is to be stored within or adjacent to the Permanent Works (buildings).
All fuel storage tanks are to be located 30m from the Permanent Works (buildings).
The storage tanks are to be elevated and be contained within concrete bunds equal
to 110% of the storage capacity of the tank. The fuel dispensing tap or nozzle shall
be lockable and located over a sand filled container to collect any spillage. The sand
container will be replaced by the Contractor once a week or as needed to avoid
ground contamination.

The Contractor will be responsible for the immediate removal and replacement of all
contaminated ground resulting from the leak or spillage of fuel at his own expense
and the disposal of the contaminated material in accordance with Environmental
Plan. Report to be submitted to the Engineer within 48 hours.
The Contractor shall provide spillage kits and spillage response teams that will
immediately respond to any contamination spillage occurred on the site.
16.17 Safety Signage

The Contractor shall display at the entrance to the Project and at the entrance to the
buildings official safety signage in English, Arabic, Hindi and Urdu indicating:-
• Safety Hats
• Safety Footwear
• Hi-visibility vests or jackets
• No Smoking
• No food
• Speed limits for vehicles
In other designated work areas where other hazards are presented the Contractor will
provide the following signage: -
• Eye Protection.
• Ear Defender
• Other appropriate Signage and Screens.
The Contractor will provide Emergency Exit signage indicating a clear, well lit, safe
route out of the building to the Assembly Points that will be identified with signage.
16.18 Temporary Electricity & Safety Lighting

• All temporary electrical circuits must include a Residual Current Device, Earth
Leakage Circuit Breaker or Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter at source.
• Adequate lighting must be provided to enable safe access to and egress from
every place on a site where persons are liable to work, in addition to necessary
task lighting for specific works. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
provision of safety lighting throughout the Project for use by the Contractor and all
site personnel.
• The minimum lighting level measured at floor level will be 100 lux on all access
and egress routes.
• The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of his own task specific
lighting and for his Subcontractors.
16.19 Stability
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability and structural integrity of the
Works during the Contract, and support as necessary.

The Contractor shall prevent over loading. Details of the permanent loads may be
obtained from the Engineer.
16.20 Noise
The Contractor is to comply with the following during the completion of the Works:-
• Bahrain Municipality regulations, and also with BS 5228 -2. 2009 if possible.
• Fit effective silences to all compressors, percussion tools and vehicles of a type
recommended by the manufacturers.
• Do not use noisy plant and equipment at night or on Fridays without the consent of
the Engineer.
• Radios and other audio equipment are not permitted on site.
16.21 Pollution
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent pollution of the site,
the Works and the general environment including streams and watercourses.
If pollution occurs the Contractor is to inform the appropriate Authority and the
Engineer without delay and provide all the relevant information.
All waste materials and rubbish shall be segregated and removed from the site within
24 hours of its being created. The Contractor shall make positive plans for the
removal of waste materials and rubbish from the work areas to nominated waste
containers and skips. These plans shall form a part of the site-specific safety plan,
and be agreed with the Engineer.
No material or liquid is to be allowed to spill down drains or be discharged onto
ground soils unless this has been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. The
Method of cleanup of paint, tools & equipment is to be agreed with the Engineer.
16.22 Nuisance
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent nuisance from smoke,
dust, rubbish, vermin and other causes.
The Contractor shall ‘wet down’ all haul roads around the Contract work area every 3
hours regularly to suppress the dust generated at site.
16.23 Working at Height

Where safe working places fitted with guardrails cannot be provided at locations
where persons or materials could fall, suitable and sufficient fall protection devices
such as approved harnesses, catch nets, must be provided and used.
All persons working on suspended scaffolds/cradles/gondolas must wear and use
approved appropriate fall prevention equipment so as to protect them effectively, at

all times when they are at risk from any failure of any part of the
scaffold/cradle/gondola, including its suspension system.
Free-standing scaffold towers used externally must not be higher to the top platform
level than three times the minimum base dimension, unless secured to a permanent
structure. For internal use only, the height to platform may rise to 3.5 times the
minimum base dimension. Wheels must be locked when towers are in use. No
person is permitted to remain on a tower platform while a tower is being moved.
Holes, shafts and edges from or through which persons could fall a distance of more
than 2 metres must be adequately protected by covers or barriers so as to prevent
falls of persons and materials. Covers over floor penetrations and shafts are to be
fixed in place so that they cannot be easily removed or kicked out of position and
signage to identity the opening.
Contractor to compile, update and periodically submit to the Engineer Inspections
Forms. Contractor to operate a permit to work system.
16.24 Safety Accreditation and Operation of Plant and Equipment

Powered cranes and hoists, aerial platforms and scissor lifts must be certificated as
safe for use by a third party, or by a person or persons holding a certification
recognised by local or national legislation, and have a competent driver. All plant to
be approved by Engineers Certificate etc. The Health & Safety Manager is to approve
all lifting plans for any lifting operations to be carried out for the works.
16.25 The Role of the Project Manager

The Project Manager shall have full discretion as to whether the E.H.& S
requirements are met and the Contractor shall comply with any reasonable instruction
or direction stipulated by the Project Manager to ensure that the E.H.& S.
requirements are met.

17 Other Contractors
17.1 Adjacent Projects
The Contractor will be required to operate within the designated boundary of their
Project work area. The Contractor should note and consider when programming and
valuing the Works that other projects are, and will be, proceeding in the vicinity of the
development.
17.2 Directly Employed Contractors

The Employer may from time to time during the course of the Contract engage
Directly Employed Contractors to complete Other Works as directed by the Employer,
within the Durrat Marina Development site
The Contractor is to allow for clear, safe, access to these Directly Employed
Contractors, together with other services as described within the Scope of Works,
within the Durrat Marina site.
17.3 Statutory / Utilities Authorities

The Statutory/Utilities Authorities and adjacent projects, will be installing services to
the Durrat Marina Development in the road margins leading to the site boundaries.
The Contractor is to provide unimpeded access to these areas for use by the
Statutory Authorities and their Contractors.
The Contractor will not be permitted to use the Bahrain Municipality Land as storage
areas or laydown areas, without the consent of the appropriate authorities and
adjacent projects.
17.4 Perimeter Roads Contracts

The Contractor is to provide unimpeded access to the road construction zone and
road margins for use by the Ministry of Works &Housing (Roads) Contractors and the
Infrastructure Main Contractor.
The Contractors attention is directed to other Main Works in progress; namely but not
limited to:
• Adjacent Projects
17.5 Sub Contractors

The contractor is to indicate what proportions of the contract he intends to sub
contract as detailed in Appendix J of the Form of Tender and in accordance with sub
clause 4.1 of the Conditions of Contract.

18 Not Used

19 Protection of Works
19.1 General
In addition to the Contractor’s obligations stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall
be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the following Permanent and
Temporary Works for the duration of the Contract.
• Causeway to Island A
19.2 Bahrain Municipality Demarcation Points

The Contractor shall protect the demarcation points surrounding the project.
19.3 Contractor’s Temporary Accommodation

Refer section 6.6 for provision of accommodation.
The Contractor is to allow for the maintenance of his own temporary accommodation
to meet with the standard expected by the Employer.
19.4 Hoardings to Contractor’s Offices

The contractor is to allow for the regular cleaning and also re-decoration of the
perimeter hoarding.
19.5 Water
The Contractor shall prevent damage from rain water and surface water and keep the
site and all excavations free of water. This does not include water arising from
abnormal marine tidal effects.
19.6 Moisture
The Contractor shall prevent the work from becoming wet or damp where this may
cause damage. Dry out the Works thoroughly. Control the drying out and humidity of
the Works and the application of heat to prevent:-
• Blistering and failure of adhesion

• Damage due to trapped moisture
• Excessive movement.
19.7 Infected Timber

The Contractor shall inspect all timber upon delivery to site. Reject and remove from
site all timber affected by fungal and insect attack. Remove all infected timber
installed in the Works and bear all costs.

19.8 Work in all Sections

The Contractor shall adequately protect all types of work and all parts of the work
during its installation and up to handover upon completion of the project.
The Contractor shall allow for all temporary protection, repairs and replacement of all
damaged finishes prior to the handover upon completion of the project.
19.9 Existing Services

The Contractor shall ensure that all procedures relating to the procurement of
Bahrain Municipality NOC’s are strictly adhered to.
Before starting work the Contractor is to check the position of the existing mains /
services. Where positions are not shown on drawings, the Contractor is to obtain the
relevant details from the services authorities or other owners.
Service Authority recommendations for work adjacent to existing services must be
observed.
The Contractor shall adequately, protect and prevent damage to all services and will
not interfere with their operation without consent of the service authorities or other
owner.
If any damage results from the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer and appropriate service authority immediately. The Contractor will make
arrangements for the Works to be made good without delay to the satisfaction of the
service authority or other owner. Any measures taken by the Engineer to deal with an
emergency will not affect the extent of the Contractors liability. All costs associated
with any damages occurred by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall replace any markers, tapes or protective covers disturbed during
the site operations to the services authorities’ recommendation.
The Contractor shall scan for existing services and utilise a permit system. The
Contractor shall comply with the regulations of public utilities authorities concerning
work adjacent to equipment, plant, cables, etc., shall take precautions to avoid
damage to such items and will be held liable for the cost of repairing any damage
The Contractor shall maintain and protect, as required by the authorities and the
Engineer, all overhead and underground utilities and services on or adjacent to the
site which may be affected by work operations. Before commencing any work in an
area, the Contractor shall ascertain the presence and true position of all services on,
under, over or within the Site.
The Contractor shall, in collaboration with the Engineer, obtain the most up-to-date
available plans indicating the positions of all services existing on the Site. Neither the
Employer nor the Engineer offer any warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of
such plans. The Contractor shall ascertain the true location of services depicted on
such plans by means of careful inspection of the Site and the provision and utilisation

of suitable detecting and testing equipment and the associated costs thereof shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor’s tendered rates and prices included in the
Breakdown Of Lump Sum (BOLS)
Thereafter, the Contractor shall carefully expose the services at locations agreed with
the Engineer for the purposes of verifying their exact location. These same
procedures shall be followed in respect of services not shown on the plans but which
may reasonably be anticipated by an experienced Contractor to be present on the
site.
All such serviced shall be designated as 'Known Services’. The Contractor shall
indicate the locations of all Known Services on a separate set of drawings a copy of
which shall be furnished to the Engineer for record purposes. No separate payment
will be made to the Contractor in respect of the costs of preparing such Drawings and
those costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s tendered rates and
prices included in the BOLS.
As soon as any service which had not been previously identified is encountered
within the Site, it shall henceforth be deemed to be a ‘Known Service’. The
aforementioned procedures for locating; verifying and recording its position on the
Site shall apply. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately when any such
service is encountered on the Site.
The Contractor shall be liable for all loss of or damage to ‘Known Services’ including
any consequential damage, whether caused directly by the Contractor’s operations or
by the lack of proper protection measures.
The Contractor shall provide approved protection to existing utilities, roads and
services that may be affected by his work operations including any affected by the
temporary works access for the site.
The Contractor shall take precautions and conduct operations in such a manner as to
prevent damage occurring to all ‘Known Services’ during the execution of the Works.
Services left exposed shall be protected from damage in such a manner that will
eliminate any danger to the public and/or workmen and in accordance with the
requirements of any prevailing legislation and related regulations.
The Contractor shall not carry out alterations to existing services. When any such
alterations become necessary, the Contractor shall promptly inform the Engineer,
who will either make arrangements for such work to be executed by the owner of the
service, or instruct the Contractor to make such arrangements himself.
The Contractor shall not remove any utility or service line, conduit or associated
structure without prior written permission from the Engineer.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the concerned authority or
company in the event of any damage to existing utilities or services. The Contractor
shall co-operate with the Engineer and the owner of such utility or service and shall

repair, or pay for repairing if not within the Contractor’s ability, the damage in
accordance with the requirements of the Engineer and the owner.
In urgent cases the Contractor shall take appropriate steps to minimise damage to
and interruption of the service. No repairs of telecommunication cables or electric
power lines and cables shall be attempted by the Contractor.
The Employer will accept no liability for damages due to a delay in having alterations
or repairs undertaken by the respective service owners. The Contractor shall provide
all reasonable opportunity, access and assistance to persons carrying out alterations
or repairs of existing services.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any damage to utilities or
property caused by the Contractor whilst carrying out the Works.
The Employer upon receiving any claim for payment in respect of any such damage,
and not paid by the Contractor, will deduct the cost charged to the Employer from the
Contractor in accordance with the Contract.
19.10 Roads and Footpaths

The Contractor shall adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to
the site and keep clear of mud and debris. Any damage to roads and footpaths
caused by the Contractors traffic or otherwise consequent upon the Works shall be
made good to the satisfaction of the Authorities or other owner and the Contractor
shall bear all costs.
19.11 Adjoining Property

The Contractor shall:-
• Prevent trespass of work people.

• Take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to adjoining property.
• Obtain permission as necessary from the owners if requiring to erect scaffolding
on or other use of the adjoining property, and pay all charges.
• Remove and make good on completion or when directed.
• Bear the cost of repairing any damage arising from execution for the Works.
• No works shall be carried out that might cause inconvenience or disturb those
attending the adjacent buildings without the approval of the Engineer.
19.12 Existing Structures

The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the execution of the Works all
incidental storing, strutting, needling and other supports as may be necessary to
preserve the stability of the existing structure on the site, or adjoining, that may be
endangered or affected by the Works.

Support existing structures as necessary during the cutting of new openings or

replacement of structural parts.
The Contractor shall not remove any supports until the new work is strong enough to
support the existing structure and prevent overstressing of completed work when
removing supports.
Contractor to report to Engineer prior to work to and/ or on adjacent structures

20 Temporary Works
20.1 Locations
The Contractor shall formally confirm to the Engineer the need for and intended
location of all Temporary Works and services.
20.2 Installation, Maintenance, Relocation and Removal

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer all necessary temporary
works drawings and/or design calculations. The Contractor shall install, maintain,
alter, adapt and relocate Temporary Works and services as necessary to
accommodate the Works. Complete relocation within 7 calendar days of the issue
date of the Engineer's written instruction. The Contractor shall bear all costs.
20.3 Power Supply

Refer section 6.10
20.4 Water Supply

Refer section 6.11
20.5 Meter Readings

The Contractor is to allow for the joint reading of all meters with the appropriate
Authority at the point of possession and termination of the service. Report all meter
readings to the Engineer in writing.
20.6 Design Responsibility

The Contractor will be responsible for the design of all Temporary Works.
All Temporary Works designs are to be submitted for review by the Engineer. The
Contractor will identify all loads imparted to the ground or Permanent Works and
issue this information to the Engineer. This information is to be submitted to the
Engineer
14 calendar days prior to the date this information is required for incorporation into
the Works.
The Contractor is responsible for design of some elements of the Works which are
described elsewhere in the Contract documents
The tenderer is required to allow the payment of all fees related with temporary works
to the local authorities.

The Contractor will confirm to the Engineer the type of mobile/fixed plant and
equipment that is required or proposed for use in the construction of the Works

including temporary back-up proposals, for instance generators, in case of power

failure.
20.8 Power Demand

If the Contractor is to use mains electricity for the site temporary power supply then
the Contractor shall provide a Power Load Schedule indicating the maximum
electricity demand the Contractor will require for the execution of the Works.
20.9 Lifting and Craneage

The Contractor is responsible for the lifting and craneage of all plant and equipment
into its final position. However the costs of such craneage will be part of the special
attendance and will be priced under the respective Provisional sum package if the
respective subcontractors do not supply.
The Contractor is required to submit a lifting and craneage plan, and indicate how the
plant and equipment are to be moved horizontally and vertically throughout the
various phases of the Works. This is to be included as part of the specific Method
Statement for each element of the works and is to include hazard analyses and risk
assessments
The Contractor is to co-ordinate the crane requirements to ensure no crane tracks
over the Project work area boundary or the Project Office.
Where it is absolutely necessary to track over the site boundary the Contractor shall
obtain the Engineer’s formal permission and comply with any requirements of the
adjacent Project or landowner.
20.10 Traffic Management

The Contractor is required to submit a traffic management and logistics plan for the
delivery vehicles moving outside and within the site.
The Contractor’s traffic plan should as far as possible demonstrate the anticipated
volumes, timings and types of vehicles entering and leaving the site and how these
will be accommodated at the access and egress points.
20.11 Effluent Storage Tanks

The Contractor shall allow for the provision of buried effluent storage tanks adjacent
to each Consumer Manhole to collect any discharges into the drainage system prior
to the connection being made to and the completion of the Phase 1 sewerage
network. The Contractor shall allow for the regular removal of all effluent and pay all
costs up to completion of the project.
The contractor is to provide, maintain and demobilise a Washing Bay to the
Engineer’s approval. The washing bay is to consist of an adequately sized hole in the
ground, lined with polythene. All concrete washout is to be deposited in hole, rather

than at random locations around the development and neighbourhood. At periodic

times the concrete shall be removed, broken out and used elsewhere where possible.

21 Materials Storage and Handling

21.1 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Elements that are stored, in the place of manufacture or on site shall be supported at
such bearing positions as will ensure than any stresses induced in the elements are
always less than the permissible design stresses.
Bearing on elements that will be exposed to prevent discoloration of the exposed
surfaces is to be avoided.
Materials shall be handled or supported only at the points described on the working
drawings, or as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be handled and placed
without impact.
All materials shall be delivered to site and stored on site palletised whenever
possible.
Premixed material should be used when ever possible and placed directly into their
final position. The delivery of loose materials is to be avoided.
21.2 Delivery of Materials

The Contractor via the subcontractors will be solely responsible for the ‘just-in-time’
delivery of materials to site and the subsequent unpacking, checking and re-packing
of all deliveries to site and ensuring that the components delivered are in accordance
with the Delivery Note, Order Dispatch, Specification and not damaged.
In the event of non-compliance, the Contractor shall be responsible for replacement
of the components delivered in time to meet the installation programme, and bear all
associated costs.
21.3 Vertical and Horizontal Distribution of Materials

Vertical distribution at the perimeter of the building is desirable with horizontal
distribution at each floor. Wherever possible materials should not be distributed or
handled manually through the building, or structure.
21.4 Materials Handling

All materials should remain palletised and be mechanically handled wherever
possible.
21.5 Prefabrication
Wherever possible the Contractor is encouraged to use prefabricated systems and a
“just in time” delivery system to maximise efficient use of the site and maximise the
programme benefits.

21.6 Protection of Materials

The Contractor will be responsible for the protection of all materials stored on site for
incorporation into the Works. All material found to be damaged by whatever means
shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
21.7 Hazardous Materials

The Contractor will be responsible for the proper storage of all hazardous materials in
accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
No hazardous materials are to be stored within the Permanent Works (buildings).
21.8 Waste Management

The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection of all waste material and its
removal and disposal at a licensed tip.
The Contractor shall collect and dispose of all waste material arising from their works.
The Contractor is to employ a dedicated and adequately manned housekeeping gang
and full-time supervisor who will keep the site clean, tidy, safe and presentable at all
times to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide all skips and waste disposal vehicles.
The Contractor shall arrange to dispose of all waste material at an appropriately
licensed tip, in accordance with local availability, and pay all costs.
21.9 Hazardous Waste

The Contractor shall allow for the separate collection of hazardous waste and the
disposal of this waste in accordance with local availability and pay all costs borne.
21.10 Documentation
The Contractor shall retain on site for inspection by the Engineer all non-hazardous
and hazardous waste transfer documentation.
21.11 Quality
The expressions ‘product’ and ‘materials’ have the same meaning and maybe
interchangeable as the context requires, and include component parts and complete
systems incorporating several component products.
All products shall be (of):-
• Best quality throughout.

• Suitable for the required purpose.
• Adequate strength and stiffness.

• Free from defects impairing appearance, strength, durability and performance.

Products shall be reputable proprietary products, factory manufactured under a
recognised quality certification system in accordance with the relevant standards.
Products shall be types that are commonly available, successfully used in similar
recent applications, and are likely to be available at a later date for maintenance,
rectification or additional work.
Products shall be new and un-used unless otherwise indicated or approved.
To the greatest practicable extent, the Contractor shall obtain products from the same
manufacturer for each generic type.
21.12 Product Selection

Where the Contract Specifications, do not nominate a particular product but refer to
approved products, the Contractor shall select suitable products and submit details of
the proposed manufacturers and products.
The Contractor shall submit final colour selections before ordering products.
The Contractor shall select proprietary products and systems with regards to the site
conditions and the performance requirements indicated in the Specifications.
The Contractor shall select products to ensure a coordinated and consistent visual
effect.
21.13 Product Naming and Alternatives

The naming of particular products in the Contract documents does not mean an
exclusive preference for such products.
Where particular proprietary products are indicated in the Contract documents, the
Contractor may propose equivalent alternative products.
The Contractor shall submit details to verify that the alternative products comply with
the Contract documents.
The Contractor shall carry out all additional work resulting from the use of alternative
products, including additional or revised statutory approvals, changes to adjacent
work, re-submission of shop drawings and shall pay for any costs incurred by the
Engineer in assessing such alternative products.
Proposal for substitution shall include details of:-
• Changes to adjacent work, if any.

• Cost differences, if any.
• Quality differences, if any.
• Lead-time and program changes, if any.

The origin of all materials must be stated and verified.

22 Setting Out of the Works

22.1 Municipality Regulations
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the necessity for informing in advance and
calling the Municipality Engineer to the site to check and approve the dimensions and
layout of any building, before pouring the first substructure concrete. The Contractor
shall obtain the Municipality Engineer's signature after his site inspection. No
concreting work shall commence on site unless the above formality has been
completed.
22.2 Benchmark
The Contractor, using an Independent Survey Company shall provide a land
surveying Benchmark on site that is cross referenced with at least three Bahrain
Municipality datum levels local to the Development.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Independent Survey Company to agree a
suitable location for the benchmark on the project.
22.3 Demarcation Points

The Contractor shall complete a triangulation check on the Bahrain Municipality
Demarcation setting out points, and check this against the Benchmark provided on
the plot. Any discrepancy is to be reported to the Engineer immediately.
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the Benchmark from any damage
during the course of the Works. If the Benchmark needs to be removed, or is
damaged, or the Contractor believes that the Benchmark needs to be re-checked
then the Engineer must be notified.
22.4 Project Work Areas

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out his work area located within the
Project boundary. The Engineer and Contractor shall jointly set out the project
boundary
22.5 Independent Survey Company

The Contractor shall arrange for the Independent Survey Company to carry out the
following duties:
• Install original Land Surveying benchmark

• Quarterly checks of the building grid and benchmarks laid down by the Contractor;
• Establish grid interfaces with adjacent projects.
All levels on the site are to be taken in the presence of the Engineer prior to
commencement of the work.

22.6 Plot Demarcation Certificates

The Contractor shall be responsible for the plot demarcation certificates for the Phase
1 package.

23 Attendance on Domestic Sub-Contractors

23.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the following general attendances
and special attendances to each of the Domestic Sub-Contractors. The cost of these
obligations shall be included in the priced items for General Attendance, and Special
Attendance.
23.2 General Attendance provided by the Contractor

• Design Co-ordination.
• Co-ordination of the whole of the Works, including works by the Contractor and
Domestic Sub-contractors.
• Programming of the Works and co-ordination of the Works to comply with the
Contractors Programme.
• Safety Supervision (including induction, first aid facilities & performance
monitoring)
• Welfare Facilities
• Provision of safe, clear, illuminated access to the work areas.
• Shared use of temporary roads and hardstandings.
• Provision of plant, equipment and materials storage areas.
• Provision of grid lines, datum levels and other survey data, including checking and
verification.
• Provision of safety lighting to 100 lux at floor level, including all fuel and power
supply costs.
• Provision of water for the Works including installation, testing and maintenance
(excluding water required for testing & commissioning)
• Provision of electric power for the Works, including all fuel and power supply costs
(excluding power required for testing & commissioning)
• Provision of Tower Craneage (as per the Contractors logistics plan)and within the
limitations of available hook time and capacity, the crane has not been sized for
loads associated with the structural steel elements
• Space for the Sub-Contractor’s offices, storage areas and laydown areas.
• Clearing away and disposal of rubbish, waste and debris from agreed waste
collection areas
• The supply, connection, disconnection and removal of the attendances provided
above.

23.3 Not used

23.4 Not used
23.5 Special Attendances
Special attendances will be provided for by the domestic subcontractors and included
within the provisional sum subcontracts.

24 Project Closeout
24.1 Final Clean
Not more than 28 calendar days prior to the agreed completion date the Contractor
will conduct the final clean of the internal and external Permanent Works, such that
on the Completion Date all permanent works are clean.
24.2 Handover
On the day on which the Works are agreed as complete the Contractor will issue to
the Engineer the following approved documents:-
• As Built Drawings
• O&M manuals
• Authority Approved Services Drawings
• Civil Defence Completion Certificate as per fire fighting etc
• Security system with mechanical and electrical locking devices
The taking over certificate will not be issued until all these documents have been
provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
24.3 As Built Drawings

The Contractor is responsible for bringing all shop drawings up to ‘A’ status approval
in the duration of the Contract and prior to completion of the Project. The Contractor
will update these drawings periodically to maintain an “as installed” set of record
drawings.
A complete set of all approved record/as built drawings will be issued to the Engineer
by the Contractor on the agreed completion date.
The Contractor shall provide the following number and type of copies of the As Built
drawings:-
Employer - 3 No A1 size bound paper copies
- 3 No A3 bound paper copies.
- 3 No CD electronic copies in CAD & PDF
Engineer - 1 No A1 size bound paper copies
- 1 No A3 bound paper copies
Project Manager - 1 No A1 size bound paper copies
- 1 No A3 bound paper copies

All full size (i.e. A0, A1, A2, and A3) paper copies of the drawings will be provided
and bound along the left-hand edge. Each set of drawings will have a cover page
containing the ‘Durrat Marina Development” graphic / logo, the project name and the
discipline of the drawings.
The A3 copies of the As Built drawings will be bound on the left hand edge with a
suitable binding screw bolt device.
The electronic copies will be provided in CD formatted in AutoCAD 2010. Where
drawings have not been drawn in AutoCAD 2010, the Contractor shall electronically
scan these drawings and insert them as PDF files.
24.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor is responsible for the preparation of fully indexed and cross
referenced O&M Manuals from the out-set of the Contract. Refer to the technical
specifications for the detailed requirements for each O & M Manual.
The Contractor shall update the O&M Manuals periodically to maintain a set of “as
installed” record documents.
The Quality Managers duty shall include the responsibility for compiling the O&M
Manuals for each trade included in the Works incorporating all approved documents
relative to the proper operation and maintenance of the building on completion. This
duty shall include obtaining the following details from all manufacturers and suppliers
for incorporation into the O & M Manual:-
• Recommended cleaning methods, agents and detergents.

• Recommended operational procedures.
• Recommended maintenance requirements.
• Recommended list of spare parts for a 12 months maintenance period, including a
list of ex-factory costs.
The Contractor shall utilise the above information and provide a Planned Preventative
Maintenance Schedule advising the Employer how to operate and maintain the
installed plant and equipment following the issue of the Taking Over Certificate in
accordance with a fully indexed set of manufacturers instructions that will be
designed to allow the Employer to operate, service and maintain the Works whilst
observing, protecting and maintaining the warranties issued for such materials, plant
and equipment.
The Contractor shall submit all the O&M Manuals 8 weeks prior to the Clause 14
programme completion date for approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor will issue the approved O&M Manuals to the Engineer on the agreed
completion date.
The Contractor shall provide the following number and type of copies of the O & M
Manual:-

Employer - 3 No. paper copies

- 3 No. CD electronic copies (Adobe Acrobat PDF files)
The paper copies shall be A4 size and bound into loose leaf plastic ring binders with
a front pocket. The Contractor will insert the “Durrat Marina Development” graphic
into the pocket, the Project name, the volume number, the discipline i.e. Architectural,
Structural, MEP or other.
The O&M Manuals will contain colour copies of all manufacturers’ product and
maintenance literature. Black and white copies of these documents will not be
accepted.
24.5 Commissioning
The O&M Manuals will contain the original plus copies of the following
documentation:-
• MEP System commissioning certificates

• List of Warranties and guarantees provided.
• Plant and Equipment Warranties / guarantees
• Spare parts list, component reference number, supplier and cost.
24.6 Defects
The objective of the Contractor shall be to deliver a defect free Project on the day the
Development opens to the public.
The Contractor shall implement his own progressive defective works inspection
regime on site to allow the Project to be handed over defect free. This requirement
will be an important part of the sub-contractors pro-active project specific quality plan.
Refer to the Quality Control Section
The Engineer will issue a final list of defects for the architectural, structural and MEP,
operational works within 14 calendar days of the agreed completion date.
The Contractor will be required to clear and have the Engineer sign off all defects
within a reasonable period of time agreed with the Engineer following the date of
issuance of the Taking-Over Certificate. This period of time will be subject to the type
of defects outstanding.
24.7 Contract Spares (Not Used)

24.8 Warranties
Warranties of a minimum of 12 months, or longer where indicated in the individual
specification sections, shall be provided for all equipment and components and shall
indemnify the Employer against manufacturing defects and / or failures caused by
defective installation.

The Contractor shall provide a schedule of all warranties provided under the Contract
to the Engineer for review 4 weeks prior to the Taking Over due date. The schedule
shall include, but not be limited to the following:
• The applicable equipment or material

• The period of the warranty. Where a manufacturer’s guarantee exceeds one year,
the longer guarantee shall govern.
• The commencement date of the warranty; which shall be the date of Taking Over
by the Employer.
• The expiry date of the Warranty
• Any special terms or condition attached to the warranty
• The cost of extending the warranty for a period of 12 months beyond the defects
liability period.
A copy of the warranty shall be provided complete with the signature of an authorized
official of the company and where applicable, the seal of the company.
24.9 Insurance Inspections

The Contractor will provide all attendance on the Employer’s Insurance Company to
facilitate any insurance inspection or demonstration requested by the insurance
company.
These requirements shall be in addition to the Contractor’s obligations to
demonstrate the completed Works to the Engineer under the Contract.
24.10 Commissioning Plans

The contractor will provide a commissioning Plan to ensure that all issues relating to
commissioning are considered and managed throughout the life of a project.
It is primarily aimed at identifying and minimising risk around the delivery of any new
asset and also ensures that all related activities are identified and managed.
The Commissioning Plan is a live document managed throughout the whole project
life to capture known commissioning risks and constraints.
A commissioning plan checklist for the Solution Commissioning is to be included as
below.
1. Key Names and Contact Details
Communications, people, locations, methods & equipment, working hours, manning
levels, organogram (must reference responsibilities)
2. Simplified Process Schematic
Include new asset and interfaces with existing assets.
3. Simplified Process Description

Define project drivers, process treatment and flow rates, phases and timescales.
4. Interfaces
List each of the interfaces that will require to be accommodated by the project and
how these will be managed at the commissioning phase.
• Impact on existing assets (up/ downstream on site processes, networks and
other treatment works),
• Hydraulic connection of new to existing works. Ensure continuing performance
during commissioning. On/ off-line work
• Tie in to existing power, telemetry, MCC, SCADA and PLC
5. Commissioning Risk
Identify risks, control measures and contingency plans e.g. Conditions (drought
demand, storm conditions)
6. Constraints on Commissioning
Issues that could affect planned commissioning:
• Impact of outages on existing assets, customers, network, changes to supply
(interdependencies)
• Physical constraints, regulatory requirements (license applications) other 3rd
party issues
• Temporary discharges: Testing, by-product disposal, regulatory requirements
• Services (Telemetry, Power & Utilities): Type, complexity, interface with
existing, actions and requirements, timing. Plan interface with telemetry and
other service providers internal/ external.
7. Commissioning Sequence
Commissioning and Project Programme: proposed order, rationale and timescale
estimates, state linked and dependant activities/steps.
Plant start up strategy and sequence, consider:
Process Commissioning, Start on full flow/ build up, Commission to supply?
Biological process development method of achieving full design flow &/or loading,
Start up in manual/ automatic, Failure and restart procedures – Power/
SCADA/ PLC/ Control, Impact on the customer, Start up materials (e.g. raw water,
wastewater, sludge, chemicals, instrumentation), services and relevant licenses.
Who is responsible for optimisation, to what level, additional equipment & specialist
personnel required?

Method Statements & Risk Assessments Outline of requirements, and list of

commissioning risk assessments to be referenced in the text and inserted in
appendices.
Tests requiring operations to witness should be listed and operators given 2 weeks
notice for attendance.
8. Condition of existing assets
Existing asset and temporary works condition/ serviceability, impact on
Commissioning and new asset. Could fault status, unserviceable condition or
Process failures affect commissioning? Identify to the Project Manager.
9. Acceptance criteria
Specify measurable acceptance criteria (process parameters & reliability)
• Final Performance Testing.
• Environmental Performance
• Operational costs (power and chemical consumption)
• Sampling schedule acceptance criteria
• Permission to Process (and WIS), Handover.
10. Training
Plan outlining requirements, resource, scope, number of trainees process and

maintenance staff, timing to fit with working pattern.
Identify skills & training requirements, impact on existing operations resources.
Outline of training delivery; process, software and maintenance experts to deliver
relevant sections
Documents: Training Plan/Attendance Register/Feedback forms
11. HAZCOMM (Hazards in Commissioning)
• HAZCOMM report on standard proforma following meeting chaired by appointed
representative and recorded by the Contractor.
• All HAZOP (Hazards in operation) reports should be available.
12. Sampling Requirements
• Consider establishment, existing processes and performance testing
• Define Responsibilities (sampling, analysis, transport, interpretation)
• Requirements format of results and turnaround.
• Data logging requirements, equipment and any training.
13. Statutory Test Records

Lifting equipment certification, equipment in zoned areas, pressure vessels, reservoir

panel engineer reports, equipment test sheets etc.
Telemetry Test Records
14. Factory Acceptance Test Results
Schedule of all equipment to be tested, responsibilities and records

15. Record of Safety Inspections
16. Asset Coding
17. Defects List
18. Onwards as defined by the Contractor
Test records (LIVE, These may run to several volumes)

• Installation Checks, Dry Testing, Wet Testing.
• Handover certificates, checklists etc.
• Other testing Noise, odour, vibration, chemical and power consumption
• Safe Systems of Work
• Critical spares outline requirements
• Safety and Environment
• QA Requirements
• H&S file Location, progress plan, responsibilities, COSHH sheets, site specific
procedures etc.
The Delivery commissioning plan is to be completed by the Site Commissioning
Team. It is a live document holding all records and documentation. Some sections
will require to be signed off as complete before progression is allowed to the next
stage of work. It is a continuation and development from the preceding solution
commissioning plan
19. Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary day to day maintenance of all
equipment installed, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, until
the date of Taking Over by the Employer. The Contractor shall be required to remove
and replace equipment not maintained to the required standard.
20. Public security regulations
Allow for complying with all Public Security Regulations.

APPENDIX 1
Site Location Plan
Specification for Infrastructure Works Phase 1 – Section 1 and 2 June 2011

92
APPENDIX 2
Phasing Plan

94
APPENDIX 3
Site Office Layout Plan

96
Section 3
Technical Specification
Table of Contents
1 ROADWORKS ................................................................................... 1
1.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROADWORKS ........................................................ 1
1.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR ROADWORKS ..................................................... 1
2 WATER ............................................................................................... 5
2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER ...................................................................... 5
2.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR WATER ................................................................ 7
3 VACUUM SEWER (NOT USED) ...................................................... 11
4 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE ........................................................ 12
4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE ............................. 12
5 UTILITIES PLOT (INLET PS, STP, FIRE & IRRIGATION PS) ........ 18
5.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 LOCATION...................................................................................................................... 18
5.3 TEMPORARY SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT ............................................................. 18
5.3.1 Principles of Schematic Design .................................................................................. 18
5.3.2 Flows and Loads ........................................................................................................... 19
5.4 PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT PROCESSES ....................................... 21
5.4.1 Flow Measurement........................................................................................................ 21
5.4.2 Screening and Grit Removal ........................................................................................ 22
5.4.2.1 Coarse Screening ........................................................................................................... 22
5.4.2.2 Grit Removal ................................................................................................................... 22
5.4.2.3 Fine Screening ................................................................................................................ 23
5.4.2.4 Equalisation Basins and Return Pumping ....................................................................... 23
5.5 SECONDARY TREATMENT PROCESSES ................................................................... 24
5.5.1 General Considerations ............................................................................................... 24
5.5.2 Anoxic Basins ............................................................................................................... 24
5.5.3 Chemical Phosphorus Removal .................................................................................. 25
5.5.4 Aeration Basins............................................................................................................. 27
5.5.5 Aeration System............................................................................................................ 27
5.5.6 Membrane Filtration System ........................................................................................ 28
5.5.7 Disinfection ................................................................................................................... 28
5.6 SLUDGE HANDLING ...................................................................................................... 29
5.6.1 General Considerations ............................................................................................... 29
5.6.2 Sludge Thickening ........................................................................................................ 29
5.6.3 Sludge Dewatering........................................................................................................ 30
5.7 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING ................................................................................. 30
5.7.1 Strategy.......................................................................................................................... 30
5.7.2 Software Testing ........................................................................................................... 30

5.7.3 Control of Plant Application Software ........................................................................ 31
5.7.4 Plant Testing ................................................................................................................. 31
5.7.5 Wet Testing.................................................................................................................... 32
5.7.6 Training .......................................................................................................................... 32
5.7.7 Plant Start-up: Process Commissioning .................................................................... 33
5.7.8 Plant start-up: Reliability Testing ................................................................................ 33
5.7.9 Performance Testing: General ..................................................................................... 34
5.7.10 Performance Test 1 – Hydraulic Throughput ............................................................. 34
5.7.11 Performance Test 2 – Process Performance.............................................................. 35
5.8 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 37
5.8.1 Final Completion ........................................................................................................... 37
5.9 OTHER REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 37
5.9.1 General Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 37
5.9.2 Civil Works and Buildings ............................................................................................ 38
5.9.3 Common Services and Ancillaries .............................................................................. 38
5.9.4 Asset Life ....................................................................................................................... 39
5.9.5 DSEAR Assessment ..................................................................................................... 39
5.9.6 Logic Operator Interface (LOI) ..................................................................................... 40
5.9.7 Actuated valves and Penstocks .................................................................................. 40
5.9.8 General Pump Control .................................................................................................. 41
5.9.9 Instrument Installations ............................................................................................... 41
5.9.10 Process and Instrumentation ...................................................................................... 42
5.9.11 Maintenance Requirements ......................................................................................... 42
5.9.12 Lifting Equipment ......................................................................................................... 43
5.9.12.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 43
5.9.12.2 Davits .............................................................................................................................. 43
5.9.12.3 Protective Finish and Identification ................................................................................. 43
5.9.12.4 Testing and Certification ................................................................................................. 43
5.9.12.5 Legislation, Standards and Codes .................................................................................. 44
5.9.13 Access Covers .............................................................................................................. 44
5.9.14 Chamber Access ........................................................................................................... 44
5.9.15 Noise Levels .................................................................................................................. 44
5.10 SEWAGE PUMPING SYSTEMS .................................................................................... 46
5.10.1 General........................................................................................................................... 46
5.10.2 General Mechanical Specification ............................................................................... 46
5.10.3 Submersible Pumps ..................................................................................................... 47
5.10.3.1 Pump Sets ...................................................................................................................... 47
5.10.3.2 Pump Casing .................................................................................................................. 48
5.10.3.3 Pump Mounting ............................................................................................................... 48
5.10.3.4 Identification .................................................................................................................... 48

5.10.3.5 Bearings and Seals ......................................................................................................... 49
5.10.3.6 Detachable Fittings ......................................................................................................... 49
5.10.4 Wet Well ......................................................................................................................... 49
5.10.5 Valves & Penstocks ...................................................................................................... 49
5.10.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 50
5.10.5.2 Non-Return Valves.......................................................................................................... 50
5.10.5.3 Gate Valves .................................................................................................................... 51
5.10.5.4 Penstocks ....................................................................................................................... 51
5.10.6 Pipework & Fittings ...................................................................................................... 51
5.10.6.1 Pipework with the Pumping Station / Valve Chamber ..................................................... 51
5.10.6.2 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings ........................................................................................ 51
5.10.6.3 Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings ...................................................................................... 52
5.10.6.4 Mechanical Couplings ..................................................................................................... 53
5.10.6.5 Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers ..................................................................................... 53
5.10.6.6 Gaskets ........................................................................................................................... 54
5.10.7 Design Life..................................................................................................................... 54
5.10.8 Mechanical Installation................................................................................................. 54
5.10.9 Take-Over Procedures, Testing and Commissioning ............................................... 54
5.10.10 On-site Testing of Pumpsets ....................................................................................... 55
5.10.11 Odour ............................................................................................................................. 55
5.11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................... 57
5.11.1 List of Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 57
5.11.2 Reference to Manufacturers ........................................................................................ 58
5.11.3 Compliance with Standards and Regulations ............................................................ 58
5.11.4 General Electrical Specification .................................................................................. 59
5.11.4.1 MCC/LCP ........................................................................................................................ 59
5.11.4.2 Telemetry ........................................................................................................................ 60
5.11.4.3 MCC/LCP Kiosk .............................................................................................................. 60
5.11.4.4 Electrical Installation ....................................................................................................... 60
5.11.5 Pumping Station MCC’s/Control Panels ..................................................................... 61
5.11.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 61
5.11.5.2 ICA Section ..................................................................................................................... 62
5.11.5.3 Instrumentation ............................................................................................................... 62
5.11.5.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 62
5.11.5.3.2 Level Instrumentation ...................................................................................................... 63
5.11.5.3.3 Flow Instrumentation ....................................................................................................... 63
5.11.5.3.4 Telemetry / SCADA Signals ............................................................................................ 63
5.12 IRRIGATION - TSE TRANSFER AND DISTRIBUTION ................................................. 65
5.12.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 65
5.12.2 STORAGE ...................................................................................................................... 65

5.12.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ...................................................................................... 65
5.12.3.1.1 PUMPING OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 65
5.12.4 IRRIGATION SUPPLY PUMPS - PUMP SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 66
5.12.4.1.1 Pumping station Manufacturer ........................................................................................ 66
5.12.4.1.2 Filter Specifications ......................................................................................................... 66
5.12.4.1.3 General Specifications and Options................................................................................ 66
5.12.4.1.4 Fire Protection Switch and Pump Swap Capability: ........................................................ 67
5.12.5 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 67
5.12.6 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 67
5.12.7 CONTROL PANEL, LOGIC AND SENSORS ................................................................ 68
5.12.7.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 68
5.12.7.1.2 Main Disconnect ............................................................................................................. 68
5.12.7.1.3 Motor Combination Starters- Breaker ............................................................................. 68
5.12.7.1.4 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ..................................................................................... 69
5.12.7.1.5 Solid State Soft Starter (Optional; must be called for in the Technical
Specifications)................................................................................................................. 69
5.12.7.1.6 Control Transformer ........................................................................................................ 69
5.12.7.1.7 Premium Lightning Arrester ............................................................................................ 69
5.12.7.1.8 Secondary Control Circuit Breakers ................................................................................ 70
5.12.7.1.9 Main Panel Power and Motor Phase Monitor ................................................................. 70
5.12.7.1.10 Corrosion Inhibiting Modules ......................................................... 70
5.12.7.1.11 Control Logic .................................................................................. 70
5.12.7.1.12 Automatic Pressure Regulation Based On Variable Flow ............. 70
5.12.7.1.13 Lead Pump Selection ..................................................................... 70
5.12.7.1.14 Alarms ............................................................................................ 70
5.12.7.1.15 Operator Interface .......................................................................... 71
5.12.7.1.16 Pressure Transducer ..................................................................... 72
5.12.7.1.17 Flow Sensor ................................................................................... 72
5.12.8 SKID ELECTRICAL ........................................................................................................ 72
5.12.8.1.1 Skid Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 72
5.12.8.1.2 Junction Boxes................................................................................................................ 72
5.12.9 PUMP ASSEMBLIES ..................................................................................................... 73
5.12.9.1.1 Vertical Turbine Irrigation Pump ..................................................................................... 73
5.12.9.1.2 Discharge Head .............................................................................................................. 73
5.12.9.1.3 Column Pipe ................................................................................................................... 73
5.12.9.1.4 Submersible Pressure Maintenance Pump ..................................................................... 73
5.12.10 MOTORS ........................................................................................................................ 74
5.12.10.1.1 Main Irrigation Pump Motor ........................................................... 74
5.12.10.1.2 Main Motor Winding Condensate Heater ....................................... 74
5.12.10.1.3 Pressure Maintenance Pump Motor .............................................. 74

5.12.11 SKID, PIPING, VALVES, GAUGES, & MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ........................... 74
5.12.11.1.1 Skid Construction ........................................................................... 74
5.12.11.1.2 Fabricated Piping ........................................................................... 74
5.12.11.1.3 Drains ............................................................................................ 75
5.12.11.1.4 Pump Check Valve ........................................................................ 75
5.12.11.1.5 Isolation Valve ............................................................................... 75
5.12.11.1.6 Relief Valve .................................................................................... 75
5.12.11.1.7 System Air Release ....................................................................... 76
5.12.11.1.8 Pressure Gauge ............................................................................. 76
5.12.12 ADDITIONAL SKID MOUNTED AND CONTROL INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT ........... 76
5.12.12.1.1 Power line conditioner (3 KVA as called for in the
Technical Specification) .................................................................................................. 76
5.12.12.1.2 Inside Panel Lighting Package (Standard) .................................... 76
5.12.12.1.3 Electronic Butterfly Valve Back-Up Pressure Regulation on
Main Pumps Only 76
5.12.12.1.4 Filtration System (200 Micron Screen) .......................................... 77
5.12.13 ADDITIONAL SHIP LOOSE INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT ............................................ 78
5.12.13.1.1 Discharge Drop Pipe (As called for in the Technical
Specification) 78
5.12.14 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................... 78
5.12.15 PAINTING ....................................................................................................................... 78
5.12.16 TESTING ........................................................................................................................ 79
5.12.17 ON-SITE PUMPING STATION OFF LOADING & SETTING ......................................... 79
5.12.18 ON-SITE PUMPING STATION START UP .................................................................... 79
5.12.19 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................... 79
5.12.20 SITE PREPARATION DRAWINGS ................................................................................ 79
5.12.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL .............................................................. 80
5.13 FIRE PROTECTION SUPPLY PUMPING STATIONS ................................................... 81
5.13.1 Basic Specifications ..................................................................................................... 81
5.13.2 Contractor Responsibility ............................................................................................ 81
5.13.3 Pumping station General Specifications and Options .............................................. 81
5.13.4 Fire Protection Switch and Pump Swap Capability: .................................................. 81
5.13.4.1.1 Freight: ............................................................................................................................ 81
5.13.5 Start-up and Calibration: .............................................................................................. 81
5.13.6 Pumping station Discharge Drop Pipe and Adapter ................................................. 82
6 PRIMARY IRRIGATION ................................................................... 83
6.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ..................................................................................... 83
6.1.1 PURPOSE ...................................................................................................................... 83
6.1.2 DESIGN .......................................................................................................................... 83
6.1.2.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 83

6.1.2.1.2 Design Criteria ................................................................................................................ 84
6.1.3 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 84
6.1.3.1.1 Installation Criteria .......................................................................................................... 84
6.1.3.1.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals ............................................................................. 85
6.1.4 SUPERVISION ............................................................................................................... 85
6.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM ................................................................................. 85
6.2.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ..................................................................................... 85
6.2.2 PUMPING STATION ...................................................................................................... 86
6.2.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 86
6.2.3.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 86
6.2.3.1.2 Pipes and Fittings ........................................................................................................... 86
6.2.3.1.3 Fire Hydrants .................................................................................................................. 88
6.2.3.1.4 Electric Solenoid Valves ................................................................................................. 88
6.2.3.1.5 Valve Boxes .................................................................................................................... 88
6.2.3.1.6 Communication Circuitry ................................................................................................. 88
6.2.3.1.7 Automatic Controller ....................................................................................................... 88
6.2.3.1.8 Quick Coupling Valves .................................................................................................... 88
6.2.3.1.9 Manual Valves ................................................................................................................ 88
6.3 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 89
6.3.1 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES .................................................................................. 89
6.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING .............................................................................. 89
6.3.3 PIPES ............................................................................................................................. 89
6.3.4 CONTROL WIRE ............................................................................................................ 89
6.3.5 SLEEVING ...................................................................................................................... 89
6.3.6 IRRIGATION WATER SUPPLY ..................................................................................... 90
6.3.7 IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTROLLER ......................................................................... 90
6.3.8 ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALVES ................................................................................... 90
6.3.9 VALVE BOXES .............................................................................................................. 90
6.3.10 IMPROPERLY OPERATING OR LOCATED EQUIPMENT ........................................... 90
6.3.11 THRUST BLOCKS ......................................................................................................... 90
7 SECONDARY/ TERTIARY IRRIGATION ......................................... 92
8 ELECTRICAL AND STREET LIGHTING ......................................... 93
8.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................... 93
8.1.1 Scope of Electrical Works ............................................................................................ 93
8.1.2 EDD List of Approved and Pre-qualified Manufacturers ........................................... 94
8.1.3 Standards ...................................................................................................................... 94
8.1.4 Environmental and Service Conditions ...................................................................... 94
8.1.5 System Details .............................................................................................................. 94
8.1.6 Drawings and Technical Data to be provided with the Tender ................................. 94
8.1.7 Tests During Manufacture ............................................................................................ 95
8.1.8 Operation and Maintenance Instructions ................................................................... 95
8.1.9 Spare Parts .................................................................................................................... 95
8.1.10 EDD List of Accredited Contractors ............................................................................ 95
8.1.11 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 95
8.1.12 Testing and Commissioning ........................................................................................ 96
8.1.13 Maintenance Period ...................................................................................................... 97
8.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 97
8.2.1 Substation Civil Works ................................................................................................. 97
8.2.2 Distribution Transformers ............................................................................................ 97
8.2.2.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 97
8.2.2.1.2 Applicable EDD Standard Specification .......................................................................... 97
8.2.2.1.3 Particular Requirements ................................................................................................. 97
8.2.3 11 kV Ring Main Unit (RMU) ......................................................................................... 98
8.2.3.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 98
8.2.4 Low Voltage Distribution Boards ................................................................................ 99
8.2.4.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 99
8.2.5 11 kV Cables ................................................................................................................ 100
8.2.5.1.1 Scope of Supply ............................................................................................................ 100
8.2.5.1.2 Applicable EDD Standard Specification ........................................................................ 100
8.2.5.1.3 Particular Requirements ............................................................................................... 100
8.2.5.1.4 Cable Laying and Installation Works............................................................................. 101
8.2.6 Low Voltage Cables .................................................................................................... 101
8.2.6.1.1 Scope of Supply ............................................................................................................ 101
8.2.6.1.3 Particular Requirements ............................................................................................... 102
8.2.6.1.4 Cable Laying and Installation Works............................................................................. 103
8.2.7 Earthing and Bonding ................................................................................................ 103
8.2.8 Substation Building Services .................................................................................... 104
8.2.9 Streetlighting ............................................................................................................... 104
8.2.9.1.1 Scope of Supply ............................................................................................................ 104
8.2.9.1.3 General Requirements .................................................................................................. 105
8.2.9.1.4 Street Lighting Design Criteria ...................................................................................... 106
8.2.9.1.5 Street Lighting Pole ....................................................................................................... 106
8.2.9.1.6 Street Lighting Luminaires ............................................................................................ 108

8.2.9.1.7 Lamps and Accessories ................................................................................................ 108
8.2.9.1.8 Foundation for Poles ..................................................................................................... 108
8.2.9.1.9 Feeder Pillars ................................................................................................................ 108
8.2.9.1.10 Contactors..................................................................................................................... 109
9 TELECOMS .................................................................................... 111
9.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS ................................................................................................... 111
9.2 SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................... 111
9.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONTAINMENT INFRASTRUCTURE .............................. 111
9.3.1 Provision of Sub-surface Ducts ................................................................................ 112
9.3.2 Provision of Access Chambers ................................................................................. 115
9.3.3 Provision of Central Office ......................................................................................... 116
9.3.4 Provision of Temporary Access Ducts from Mainland ........................................... 116
10 MEICA (NOT USED) ...................................................................... 117
11 CONCRETE WORKS ..................................................................... 118
1 ROADWORKS
1.1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROADWORKS
The Standard Specification referred to in this document means “THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS 2009” Ministry of Works,
Bahrain and subsequent amendments up to the tender closing date. The works of
Highways installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the Standard
Specifications. The Standard Specifications are published as a series of 21 stand
alone modules each addressing a single distinct area of the construction process. The
above specifications were not issued with this document and shall be obtained by the
contractor at his own expense from the office of the Ministry of Works. The Road
Works covered under the following modules of Standard Specifications:
• Module No. 01 Guidance and General Specifications

• Module No. 03 Earthworks
• Module No. 19 Road Works
• Module No. 20 Landscaping
Precedence
Particular Specifications will take precedence over the Standard Specifications. Where
an apparent conflict between the requirements of two or more modules of the standard
specifications the Engineer shall adjudicate and provide guidance to the contractor.
The latest version available at the date of tender of any national or international
standard quoted in the standard Specifications shall be used.
1.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR ROADWORKS

Particular (Project Specific) Specifications are provided and form part of the Contract.
Particular Specifications contain and address matters relating to design and to specific
project requirements which are not addressed within the Standard Specifications.
Particular specifications provide modifications, alterations, amendments, deletions or
additions for those articles in the “Standard Specifications” which are specially
required for their application to this contract. Where no modifications, alterations,
amendments, deletions or additions appear in the Particular Specifications, the full text
of the “Standard Specifications” shall apply and the Contractor shall carefully co-
ordinate both the documents as no claim based on ignorance or error in this respect
will be entertained.
Particular Specifications of Road works are listed in the sections to follow under each
module.

Module 1 GUIDANCE AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Module 1: PART 1 Guidance and Use
Add the following additional clauses after 1.7 clause
1.8 Terms and Abbreviations
1. The term “Overseeing Organization” means, the Ministry of Works, the Kingdom of
Bahrain, and the Engineer.
2. The following abbreviations are used in the specifications
CMC : Central Municipal Council

EDD : Electricity Distribution Directorate
SLD : Street Lighting Directorate
BATELCO : Bahrain Telecommunication Company
SEPPD : Sanitary Engineering Planning & Projects Directorate
SEOMD : Sanitary Engineering Operation & Maintenance Directorate
CC TV : Closed Circuit Television
CPU : Central Planning Unit
WDD : Water Distribution Directorate
PSD(W) : Planning & Studies Directorate –Water
PSD(E) : Planning & Studies Directorate –Electricity
ETD : Electricity Transmission Directorate
EWA : Electricity & Water Authority
1.9 Thickness of Materials and Tolerance
Works shall be constructed to achieve levels of accuracy within the permissible

deviations in the documents listed in the preface to volume.
1.10 Silence of Specifications
The apparent silence of the specifications (General or Special), plans, or other

Contract documents as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed
description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
general practice is to be used. The Engineer on this basis will make any interpretation
of the specifications.
1.11 Contractor’s Submittals
During construction the Contractor is required to make a number of submittals to the

Engineer, and the Contractor will most likely submit certain inquiries and
recommendations. Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply
calculations, test reports, data sheets, etc. to support his detailed working and
fabrication drawings. The contractor shall submit all documents, drawings and all site
correspondence in electronic format plus 4 copies in hard copy, and submittals shall
remain the property of the Engineer.

Where any approval of the Employer and /or Engineer may be required, the
Contractor must allow a period of four (4) weeks for responses to be prepared and
returned. Every reasonable effort will be made by the Engineer to minimize the
review/comment/approval period.
Module 1 : PART 2 General Specifications

2.4.3 Construction Health, Safety, Environment And Quality-General
Add the following additional clause after 2.4.3.3

2.4.3.4 Safety
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent personal injury or death
or damage to the works or other property, including but not limited to:
• Provision of fire fighting facilities in all vulnerable areas and as instructed by the
Engineer
• Marking escape routes and illuminating them if necessary
• Instructing workmen in fire precautions and use of fire equipment and displaying
notices on fire safety and procedures in the event of a fire on site.
The Contractor shall provide protective clothing and other miscellaneous safety
equipment. All protective clothing and safety equipment shall be new and approved by
the Engineer. All items will be considered expendable items and deemed to be Non-
Returnable items.
Add the following additional clauses after 2.9
2.10 Setting Out
1. The Contractor shall set out work from benchmark reference points, existing
surveys and employ qualified Surveyors registered to practice in the Kingdom of
Bahrain and approved by the Engineer to confirm accuracy of layout, record the
site limits, dimensions, ground levels, obstructions and any other features.
2. The Contractor shall carry out a check of the setting out of utility works as shown
on the Tender Drawings or as instructed on site by the Engineer. Stake out shall be
revised if, as directed by the Engineer, modification of utility line or grade is
advisable.
3. Levels on the drawing refer to the National leveling datum established by the
National Survey Directorate, Kingdom of Bahrain unless shown otherwise and all
benchmark levels to be verified by the contractor before commencement of the
works.
Module No. 03 EARTHWORKS

No Particular Specifications Listed under this module.

Module No. 19 ROAD WORKS

2.12 Traffic Signs
Add the following new paragraph under 2.12.1 sub clause
A Nominated Sub-contractor approved by the Roads Projects and Maintenance
Directorate shall carry out Road Markings and Traffic Signs works.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Nominated Sub–Contractors to ensure that traffic
signs and road markings are provided in a timely manner.
Add the following additional clause after 2.14
2.15 Temporary Fencing
The required temporary fencing for the Overseeing Organizations site office shall be in
place until demobilization of the site office.
The Contractor shall pay all fees to Government or Municipal authorities in connection
with the erection and maintenance of fencing.
Temporary fencing shall be Chain Link fencing complying with BS 1722: Part 1 in
accordance with the UK Highway Agency Manual of Contract Documents for Highway
Works, Volume 3, HCD Drawing H11.
Module No. 20 LANDSCAPING

No Particular Specifications Listed under this module.

2 WATER
2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATER
General Specification for Water will be the standard “Specification of Items (Common)
for Water/Electricity Supply”, issued by the Ministry of Electricity and Water.
Amendments to the Ministry of Electricity and Water Specifications of items (Common)
for water/electricity supply are listed in the table below:
Clause Clause Title and Outline
Number
W 2.00 Materials and workmanship
Replace the contents of sub-clause W.2.03 with the following:

W.2.03
“Water conveyance pipes shall be of Ductile Iron. Specified diameter will mean
internal diameter of pipe if not specially stated otherwise.”
W 5.00 Coating For the Ductile Iron Pipe
Clause W. 5.01 – Replace the contents of sub-clause W.5.01 with the following:
W. 5.01 Internally the pipes are factory lined with cement mortar in accordance with the BS
EN 545. Pipes which show any cracking or blistering in their lining should not be
used. No site repairs are permitted.
W.9.00 Sluice valves

W.9.01
Sluice valves shall be supplied and delivered with the necessary ends, boxes and
fittings by the Contractor. All iron body valves in contact with the soil (installed with
valve boxes) shall be protected with Densotape as recommended by the
manufacturer
W. 10.00 Valve Boxes and Chambers

W.10.02
Replace “will be enclosed in R.C.C. chambers as per the standard drawings.” with
“will be enclosed in chambers as per Drg. No. B1085-00-PW-DE-3900.”
W.14.00 Hydrostatic Tests

W. 14.01
Replace “to be included in the Schedule of Rates.” with “to be included in the
Schedule of Rates or equivalent document.”


Number
Replace paragraph 2 of sub-clause W.14.02 with the following:

W.14.02
“The hydrostatic test pressure shall be minimum 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure for the different pipes by the class of the pipe for distribution mains unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer.”
W.17.00 Fire Hydrants

W.17.01
Fire Hydrants shall be supplied and delivered by the Contractor and shall be
positioned so that the outlet should be not more than 500 mm below the finished
level of the surface box.
W.21.00 Water Meter and Meter Chambers

W. 21.01
Water Meters, as provided and delivered by the Contractor, shall be installed in

ground or in the boundary wall as per BS EN14154. In-line meters shall be of a
Class appropriate to the maximum admissible pressure and sized according to the
nominal pipe diameter. From the water supply, a gate valve followed by non-return
valve shall be installed upstream of the meter. All materials for installation/
replacement/relocation of meters shall be provided and delivered by the Contractor.
W. 21.02
Meter chambers shall be installed to house the items described in W.21.01.
W21.03
Replace “construct the concrete chamber…by the Employer.” With “construct the
concrete chamber and provide the cover as directed by the Engineer

2.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION FOR WATER

General Specification for Water will be the standard “Specification of Items (Common)
for Water/Electricity Supply”, issued by the Ministry of Electricity and Water.
Amendments to the Ministry of Electricity and Water Specifications of items (Common)
for water/electricity supply are listed in the table below:
Number
W.1.00 Pipe bedding and surround
Add the following sub-clauses to Clause W.1.00
W.1.15 Imported granular material shall have a PI < 6 and shall be free from sharp-edged
particles exceeding 19 mm.
The Standard Drawing (Drawing No.WDD/001) shall be amended as follows:
Replace “Clause 2.31.0” and “Clause 2.32.0” with “Clause W.1.00”.
W 2.00 Materials and workmanship
Add Sub Clause W.2.05 to clause W2.00 series
Satisfactory temporary end covers shall be provided for the protection of threads,
flanges, and prepared ends of plain-ended pipes and fittings, and to prevent
W.2.05 damage to internal lining during transportation and during handling on site. Pipeline
materials shall be transported, stored, and handled such that pipes are not
overstressed at any time and fittings are not damaged in any way. All thin-walled,
flexible, and soft-coated pipes shall be handled with particular care and shall be
stored such that they are not subject to concentrated pressure from stones or other
objects. Pipes damaged or cracked in any way shall be removed from site.
Add the following sub-clauses after Clause 21.05

W.22.00 Protection During Construction
Major excavating equipment and other Plant shall not be operated dangerously
close to Known Services and concrete structures buried in the ground. Where
necessary, excavation in close proximity to Known or Existing Services as indicated
on the drawings or pointed out by the Engineer shall be carefully carried out with
suitable hand tools, excluding picks wherever their use could damage the services.
Should any service not being a Known Service be discovered or encountered during
the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall, in addition to complying with the
requirements of the contract, immediately notify the Engineer thereof and implement
such measures as will prevent damage of such service or, if it was damaged in the
course of discovery, will prevent and minimise the occurrence of any further damage
occurring.
W.23.00 Removal of Existing Pipelines


Number
Where shown on the Drawings or where so instructed by the Engineer, the

Contractor shall excavate, expose and remove from the ground, existing water
pipelines.
If so instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, before commencing with the
excavation of the pipeline, expose the pipeline to be removed by means of careful
hand excavation at positions agreed with the Engineer.
Thereafter, the existing pipelines to be removed shall be carefully opened up by

machine excavation to a depth of not more than 300 mm above the pipes after
which the whole pipeline shall be fully exposed by means of careful hand
excavation.
The pipes and all specials encountered (e.g. bends, valves, valve box covers and
the like) shall be removed from the trench in a manner as to avoid causing damage
and as approved by the Engineer, cleaned sufficiently as to allow inspection of the
pipes and specials by the Engineer and stacked in such a manner as will facilitate
the inspection of each pipe and special by the Engineer.
Pipes and specials which are declared unsuitable by the Engineer for reuse shall be
transported to a spoil site and covered with spoil material to a depth of not less than
300 mm.
After removal of the pipelines, the trenches shall be backfilled using the excavated
material and compacted as according to the standard specification.
W.24.00 Pipe and Conduits
All pipes passing through concrete floors, walls or slabs shall be cast into a concrete
member simultaneously with the casting of the member. Openings for pipes shall
only be left in concrete members when so directed by the engineer or when shown
on the drawings. Pipes shall be installed in such openings according to the details
shown on the drawings.
If water tightness is a requirement where pipes are cast into walls, floors and slabs,
the contractor shall ensure water tightness where smooth-surfaced pipes are used
by using an approved method such as tape wrapping the pipes prior to casting in.
Openings left for pipes shall be filled with approved non-shrink grout.
W.25.00 Concrete Casing
Where the Engineer requires pipes to be encased, a strength 15 Mpa/37.5 mm, or

such other strength as is scheduled, shall be used. No part of the concrete casing
shall be closer than 150 mm to any flexible joint of a concrete-encased pipeline. The
pipe trench for a concrete-encased pipeline shall be excavated to the depth below
the bottom surface of the pipe, as ordered or shown on the drawing, and to sufficient
width to allow for the concrete to be placed to the full specified width. The bottom of
the trench shall be trimmed true to the line and grade. A light concrete screed shall
be placed on the bottom of the trench, concrete saddles or pads of the requisite
thickness spaced suitably, and the pipeline laid on them true to line and grade. After

Number
being jointed the pipes shall be tested in accordance to the applicable tests, care
being taken to ensure that the pipes do not move during testing. After the pipeline
has been tested, suitable formwork shall be erected and concrete carefully placed
and vibrated in position underneath the pipe and up both sides. The concrete level
shall be raised equally on both sides of the pipe until encasement is complete and a
cover over the surface of the pipe is provided that is nowhere less that that ordered
or shown on the drawings. No earth filling over the concrete shall be commenced
until at least 7 days after the concrete has been placed or until the concrete has
attained 10 Mpa strength.
W.26.00 Storage and Holding of Pipes
Method Statements must be approved by the Engineer for the transportation,

handling and storage of pipes before any pipes are delivered to site.
All pipes shall be handled and stored in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations subject to the following limitations:-
Pipes shall be transported, handled and stored with such packing and in such a
manner that damage does not occur and that contact is avoided with sharp edges
which may cause damage. During transit, pipes and fittings shall be well secured
and adequately supported along their length.
At every point of loading or unloading, all pipes or castings must be handled by

approved lifting tackle unless specified elsewhere. Unloading by rolling down planks
or any other form of inclined ramp will not be allowed. Pipes shall not be tipped or
dropped.
Pliable straps, slings or rope shall be used to lift pipes, and steel cables or chains
will not be used without written permission.
Nesting of pipes for transportation will be permitted provided method statements

demonstrate that effective precautions will be taken to protect inner surfaces from
damage.
All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly inspected on arrival at site after off-loading
and prior to installation for detection of any damages.
Damages to coatings, if any, shall be made good in a manner approved by the

Engineer. For other damages, proposals for repairs shall be submitted in writing for
the Engineer's approval. If in the Engineer's opinion the nature of any damage is
such that the condition of a pipe has been impaired and cannot be repaired, the pipe
concerned shall not be incorporated in the Works.
Suitably smooth and level storage areas shall be provided at or near the site and
made secure to prevent unauthorised access.
Pipes of different sizes and thickness shall be stocked separately
W.27.00 Automatic Air Vents


Number
Automatic air vents shall be supplied and delivered with the necessary ends, boxes
and fittings by the Contractor as per Drg.No.B1085-00-PW-DE-3900. All iron body
valves in contact with the soil (installed with valve boxes) shall be protected with
Densotape as recommended by the manufacturer.

3 VACUUM SEWER (NOT USED)

4 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE

4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR SEWERAGE AND
DRAINAGE
General Specification for Sewerage and Drainage will be the “Standard Specification
for Sewerage and Drainage, Civil Engineering Works”, issued by the Ministry of Works
2009
Amendments to the standard specification for sewerage and drainage civil engineering
works are listed in the table below:
For items related to Mechanical and Electrical works please refer to section 9 of this
specification (Section 3 Technical Specifications)
Number
SECTION D: PIPELINES AND PIPEWORK

D1.8 GROUP B (FLEXIBLE) PIPES
Replace the contents of sub-clause D1.8 with the following:
D1.8.1.2 Replace “Gravity pipes and fittings shall be to BS 4660 and BS 5481, pressure…”
with “Gravity pipes and fittings shall be to BS 4660 BS 13476 and BS EN 1401-1,
pressure…”
D3.4 PIPE LAYING GENERAL
Replace the contents of sub-clause D3.4 with the following:
Replace “Pipelines shall not be laid to a curvature…allowed by the manufacturer.”

with “uPVC/GRP pipes shall achieve the necessary curvature between chambers by
angular deflection at joints and/or by curvature of the flexible pipe as per the
manufacturers’ recommendations. Notwithstanding, where flexibly jointed pipes are
laid to curves, the angular displacement at any joint as laid shall not exceed three
quarters of the maximum allowed by the manufacturer.”
Add the following paragraphs to sub-Clause D3.4:
All precautions shall be taken to protect pipes. Prior to installation, all pipes shall be
checked for soundness and cleanliness. Any material found to be defective should
be marked and removed from the trench in such manner that neither the pipe nor
the trench will be damaged or disturbed and so as to prevent earth or debris from
falling onto the previously prepared pipe bed. Particular care must be taken when
handling pipes to prevent damaging the material of the pipe.
Pipes and fittings shall be laid and jointed according to the manufacturers’
instructions to give a watertight pipeline, true to line and grade.


Number
Trenches shall be kept dry and pipes shall not be laid when the condition of the
trench is unsuitable for such work. Under no circumstances shall water from
trenches be allowed to run through the pipes during construction.
At all times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be
securely and satisfactorily closed with caps supplied by the Contractor as
recommended by the pipe manufacturers so that no water, sand or other substance
will enter the pipe or fittings.
All pipes must be inspected and approved by the Engineer/Supervising Officer

before they are covered.
The Contractor shall offer the work for inspection by the Engineer at the following
stages:
a) When the alignment has been set out.
b) When the trench is excavated to formation level.
c) When the bed has been prepared thoroughly.
d) When the pipeline has been laid on the bedding but before any
granular surround is placed.
e) When the pipe has been subjected to hydraulic pressure and is

ready for being approved against the hydraulic test pressure.
f) When the connection with an existing system is being made.
g) When the samples of water after flushing and disinfections are being
taken for analysis (if necessary).
h) When the trench is being backfilled and samples of the compacted

backfill are being taken for testing in laboratory.
No further work shall proceed until such time as the Engineer has inspected and
approved each stage. Such inspection by the Engineer shall be made without
unreasonable delay but after reasonable notice.
Add the following sub-clauses after Clause D5.4.2

D6.00 Materials and Workmanship
Pipes, valves, hydrants, cast iron frames and covers and all other construction
materials shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to
avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped.
6.01 No hooks shall be used inside the pipe. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be
skidded or rolled against pipe or other materials already on the ground. Pipes and
fittings shall be stacked on site 300 mm above ground. They shall be supported on
timbers and must be covered with a tarpaulin to prevent foreign objects entering the
pipes.


Number
6.03 Foul Sewerage and Drainage pipes shall be of unplasticised polyvinyl chloride for
the pipe diameters up to 200mm. (uPVC), whereas pipes above 200mm diameter
shall be Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP)
Pipes shall be supplied in standard commercial lengths. However, sufficient

6.04 quantity of short pipes may be supplied to be installed where the pipes connect with
valves or other fittings and where pipes are laid on a curve depending upon the site
conditions.
Satisfactory temporary end covers shall be provided for the protection of threads,
flanges, and prepared ends of plain-ended pipes and fittings, and to prevent
damage to internal lining during transportation and during handling on site. Pipeline
6.05 materials shall be transported, stored, and handled such that pipes are not
overstressed at any time and fittings are not damaged in any way. All thin-walled,
flexible, and soft-coated pipes shall be handled with particular care and shall be
stored such that they are not subject to concentrated pressure from stones or other
objects. Pipes damaged or cracked in any way shall be removed from site.
D7.00 PROTECTION TO CONCRETE STRUCTURES
External surfaces of concrete structures below ground shall be protected in

7.01 accordance with either of the alternative Systems detailed below, appropriate to the
site conditions and as instructed by the Engineer/Supervising Officer.
System 1
Concrete work in water bearing ground conditions shall have the following protection
to the finished concrete surfaces:
7.02
External surfaces of below ground concrete structures shall be protected with an
approved bitumen/polythene membrane.
The membrane shall only be applied to clean dry surfaces.
The membrane shall be applied with laps of at least 80 mm when applied

horizontally and 150 mm when applied vertically to walls and the junction between
horizontally and vertical tanking shall be properly made.
Membrane applied to walls and top surfaces of horizontal members shall be

protected by means of plywood not less than 6 mm thick or similar approved
materials which shall be placed against it and held in position by temporary struts or
other means while backfilling is being placed, care being taken to prevent loose
stones damaging the membrane or protection.
Where a membrane is applied to horizontal surfaces of an underground structure, a

50 mm layer of concrete Class “A” made with 10 mm down aggregate shall be
placed as soon as practicable after the completion of laying the membrane. The

Number
limits of the concrete protection shall correspond precisely with the formation level
plan of the structural concrete so as to enable the vertical membrane to be joined to
the horizontal membrane in the manner specified. The top surface of the concrete
protection shall be finished accurately to level with a tamped texture and the
concrete shall be allowed to set thoroughly for at least 48 hours before any
subsequent operations on the structure are commenced. The bitumen/ polythene
membrane shall be provided in 2 layers both horizontally and vertically and all
angles shall be properly made with an approved 50 mm x 50 mm mortar fillet.
System 2
The details under this system shall be applicable when the ground conditions are
7.03 dry. As such, the concrete external surfaces shall have the following protection:
Under System 2 protection, the blinding concrete and external surfaces of

underground structure shall be painted with 3 coats of an approved bituminous
paint. The painted surfaces shall be further protected with polythene sheeting and
plywood not less than 6 mm thick or similar approved.
7.04 Membrane for Tanking Protection of Concrete
Membrane for tanking protection of concrete surfaces shall consist of a strong

impervious self-adhesive laminated bitumen/polythene membrane. The membrane
shall be capable of withstanding cracking of the concrete at substrate up to a crack
width of 0.6 mm and shall have minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
D.8.00 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

8.00
Major excavating equipment and other Plant shall not be operated dangerously
close to Known Services and concrete structures buried in the ground. Where
necessary, excavation in close proximity to Known or Existing Services as indicated
on the drawings or pointed out by the Engineer shall be carefully carried out with
suitable hand tools, excluding picks wherever their use could damage the services.
Should any service not being a Known Service be discovered or encountered during
the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall, in addition to complying with the
requirements of the contract, immediately notify the Engineer thereof and implement
such measures as will prevent damage of such service or, if it was damaged in the
course of discovery, will prevent and minimise the occurrence of any further
damage occurring
D.9.00 CONCRETE CASING
9.00
Where the Engineer requires pipes to be encased, a strength 15 Mpa/37.5 mm, or
such other strength as is scheduled, shall be used. No part of the concrete casing
shall be closer than 150 mm to any flexible joint of a concrete-encased pipeline. The
pipe trench for a concrete-encased pipeline shall be excavated to the depth below
the bottom surface of the pipe, as ordered or shown on the drawing, and to sufficient
width to allow for the concrete to be placed to the full specified width. The bottom of
the trench shall be trimmed true to the line and grade. A light concrete screed shall


Number
be placed on the bottom of the trench, concrete saddles or pads of the requisite
thickness spaced suitably, and the pipeline laid on them true to line and grade. After
being jointed the pipes shall be tested in accordance to the applicable tests, care
being taken to ensure that the pipes do not move during testing. After the pipeline
has been tested, suitable formwork shall be erected and concrete carefully placed
and vibrated in position underneath the pipe and up both sides. The concrete level
shall be raised equally on both sides of the pipe until encasement is complete and a
cover over the surface of the pipe is provided that is nowhere less that that ordered
or shown on the drawings. No earth filling over the concrete shall be commenced
until at least 7 days after the concrete has been placed or until the concrete has
attained a strength of at least 10 Mpa
SECTION F: FITTINGS AND FABRICATED ITEMS

F9 ACCESS COVERS AND FRAMES
F9 (i)
Replace the contents of clause F9 (i) with the following:
Replace “Unless otherwise specified…shall be medium duty” with “Access covers

and frames shall be of cast steel and to BS EN 124. Chamber tops (covers/manhole
tops) shall be to Class B125 where located in footways, pedestrian areas or at the
non-traffic side of footways in the verge. Chamber tops (manhole tops) shall be to
Class D400 where located in carriageways, central reservations, parking spaces or
adjacent to the kerb in the verge.”
F9 (iii)
Replace the contents of clause F9 (iii) with the following:
Replace “minimum clear opening of 675 x 675mm shall be heavy duty” with
“minimum clear opening of 675 x 675mm shall be Class D400 to BS EN 124.”
F9 (vi)
Replace the contents of clause F9 (vi) with the following:
5No. sets of lifting keys for each cover type shall be submitted to the Engineer
before the Contractor gives notice under Clause 48 (1) of the Conditions of Contract.
F15 STEP IRONS
Add the following to Clause F15:
Step irons shall be provided in chambers over 1000mm in depth (including catchpits
where provided). The topmost rung shall be 450mm maximum from chamber cover
level. Horizontal rung spacing shall be 300mm apart in two parallel vertical rows.
Vertical rung spacing in each row shall be 300mm; vertical rung spacing between
each row shall be offset 150mm to create alternating steps. The bottommost rung
shall be 300mm maximum above benching.
F16 GULLIES, GULLEY GRATINGS AND FRAMES
Replace the contents of clause F16 with the following:


Number
Replace “cast grey or…to BS 497:1976, Table 6.” with “cast steel and to BS EN 124.
Gully tops (gratings) shall be to Class D400.”

5 UTILITIES PLOT (INLET PS, STP, FIRE &

IRRIGATION PS)
5.1 GENERAL
Under phase 1 of the works the contractor shall be responsible for design and build of
the following elements forming the utilities plot A-S6 within the Durrat Marina
development.
• 1No Inlet Pumping Station

• 1No Temporary STP (including equalisation facilities)
• 1No Combined Irrigation and Fire Water Storage Tank
• 1No Irrigation Pumping Station
• 1No Fire Pumping Station
It should be noted that the intention is to use Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE)
from the temporary STP for distribution through the irrigation & fire fighting
network, resulting in the requirement of high quality TSE as provided by the
MBR process. This specification should be considered as the minimum
requirement to meet with the Bahrain Civil Defence Directorate (CDD)
prerequisite for the removal of Nematode Eggs to enable the TSE to be used for
fire fighting. Alternatives methods of treatment may be proposed for
consideration; however they should as a minimum meet the CDD and SEPPD
TSE requirements and be submitted with a no objection from these departments
to apply its use.
5.2 LOCATION
The Phase 1 Durrat Marina Temporary Sewage treatment plant shall be located within
the Utilities Plot A-S6. A nominal area of 17mx26m has been allowed for Temporary
STP Plant and TSE storage within the plot.
5.3 TEMPORARY SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT

5.3.1 Principles of Schematic Design
Design characteristics are given for the individual process units that will comprise the
temporary STP.
The plant will be designed and constructed above ground with a view to minimising
the footprint and facilitation dismantling and removing from site at a later stage.
The plant shall be designed to minimise visual impact.
The plant shall be designed for a variable sewage intake ranging from 0 - 500 m3/day.
5.3.2 Flows and Loads
The Durrat Marina development is to have separate systems for foul sewage and
drainage collection, i.e. the sewer system is to convey no stormwater flow to the
temporary STP.
The temporary STP is to discharge the final effluent to an adjacent TSE storage tank.
Sewage flows for phase 1 from the overall development, at 100% occupancy, will be
approximately 500 m3/day.
The expected daily peak irrigation demand for the fully developed area are
summarised in the table below.
Phase Peak Irrigation
Demand (m3/day)
Phase 1 204
The common infrastructure and inlet works (before equalisation tank) shall be
provided for maximum capacity needs of 500 m3/day flows. This figure is the Average
Daily Flow (ADF) for design purposes.
In the design of the temporary STP, also the Peak Hour Flow (PHF) is to be taken into
account. The ratio PHF:ADF for the Durrat Marina temporary STP is expected to be
2:1.
Other factors important in overall design include average annual and Maximum Month
Loading (MML) used for sizing the secondary treatment system and the effluent
quality required for reuse. The average annual influent constituent loading values are
typically for local conditions. The design input flows and loads are shown in Table 1.
Effluent quality requirements are listed in Table 2.
Table 1: STP Influent Flows and Loads for Design Purposes
PARAMETER, UNITS UNITS VALUE

INFLUENT FLOW
Average Daily Flow (ADF) m3/d 500
INFLUENT (AVERAGE ANNUAL) LOAD

FACTOR
BOD mg/l 250
COD mg/l 575
TSS mg/l 250
TKN mg/l 50
Alkalinity mg CaCO3/l 200-250
pH pH Units 6.9-7.3
INFLUENT (MAXIMUM MONTH) LOAD
FACTOR
BOD mg/l 300
COD mg/l 690
TSS mg/l 300
TKN mg/l 60

Table 2: STP Effluent Quality Requirements
PARAMETER 1 UNITS Maximum Annual Average

PHYSICAL
Temperature ºC 30 -
Total Suspended Solids mg/l 10 5
Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 3500 1,750
Turbidity 2 NTU 5.0 2.0
CHEMICAL
Aluminium mg/l 25 15
Ammonia, Total as N mg/l 3.0 1.5
Arsenic mg/l 0.5 0.1
Barium mg/l 2.0 1.0
BOD5 mg/l 10 5
Boron mg/l 2.50 0.75
Cadmium mg/l 0.05 0.01
COD mg/l 50 50
Chloride mg/l 1,000 500
Chlorine Residual 3 mg/l 0.5 (min)
Chromium mg/l 1.0 0.1
Cobalt mg/l 2.0 0.1
Copper mg/l 0.5 0.2
Cyanide mg/l 0.1 0.05
Dissolved Oxygen 4 mg/l 2.0 (min)
Fluoride 5 mg/l 5 1
Iron mg/l 10 5
Lead mg/l 0.1 0.01
Manganese mg/l 1.00 0.02
Mercury mg/l 0.005 0.001
Nickel mg/l 0.5 0.2
Oil and Grease mg/l 15 8
pH pH units 6-8.5 6-8.5
Phenols mg/l 1.0 0.10
Phosphorus, total as P mg/l 15 7.5
Sodium mg/l 1,000 500
Sodium Adsorption Ratio SAR units 15 10
(SAR)
Sulphate mg/l 800 300
Sulphide mg/l 0.10 0.05
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen mg/l 20 10
Total Organic Carbon mg/l 150 50
Zinc mg/l 5.0 2.0
BACTERIOLOGICAL
Total Coliforms 6 MPN/100ml 2.2 1.1
PARASITOLOGICAL
Nematodes No./10ml 1 -
Protozoan Cysts No./10ml 1 -
Platyhelminths (Worms) No./10ml 1 -

Notes:
1) For any parameters not identified, specific standards will be determined on a case-
by-case basis
2) Maximum turbidity not to be exceeded more than 5% of the time in the 24-hour
period
3) Free chlorine residual after 30 minutes of contact
4) Dissolved oxygen level is a minimum concentration requirement
5) Fluoride levels assume sandy soil for irrigation which will not be used for forage
6) Reclaimed water shall at all times be adequately disinfected, oxidized, clarified and
filtered.
7) The wastewater shall be considered disinfected if the median number of coliform
organisms in the effluent does not exceeds 1.1 total coliforms MPN per 100 ml as
determined from the results of the last seven days for which analyses have been
completed
6) In addition to these parameters the effluent quality shall meet all of the
requirements imposed by the Kingdom of Bahrain, Ministry of Works, Sanitary
Engineering Operation and Maintenance Directorate for the use of treated sewage
effluent for irrigation purposes.
5.4 PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT

PROCESSES
All penstocks and valves required for the effective operation, isolation and control of
the entire preliminary treatment plant shall be provided.
5.4.1 Flow Measurement
Flow measurement of the total flow treated by the treatment plant shall be provided.
Generally, flow measurement shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
BS3680, or other standard acceptable to the Engineer, Flow measurement shall be
undertaken by one of the four appropriate systems to the anticipated flow range.
• Rectangular Throated Flumes with a level invert

• Rectangular Throated Flumes with a curved invert
• Thin Plate Weirs
• Electromagnetic Flow Meters
Flow shall be measured using ultrasonic level measuring devices having integral
indication, recording and alarm generation.

The measuring device shall be calibrated in accordance with manufactures

instructions. It shall be calibrated for the actual measurement of the flow structure and
not design figures. A fixed calibration point shall be set up for the ultrasonic measuring
devices. All measurements of the structure, datum and reference levels shall be
achieved under no flow conditions with clean water. Certificates shall be provided by
the manufacturer to show calibration is correct.
5.4.2 Screening and Grit Removal
A higher level of pre-treatment than commonly practised in sewage treatment is

required to prevent clogging of the space between membrane fibres or plates and
abrasion damage to the membrane surface. All the necessary pipework, penstocks,
valves, flow diversions etc for the effective manual and fully automatic operation and
control of the total preliminary plant shall be provided. All the necessary electrical
controls, instruments, telemetry etc. for the effective manual and fully automatic
operation, control and monitoring of the total plant shall be provided.
5.4.2.1 Coarse Screening
Coarse screening is required to remove large material prior to grit removal and
potential discharge to the equalisation basin, and to limit the accumulation of large
material on the fine screens. Coarse (6 mm) 2-D screening will be provided, as the
influent sewage enters the head works facilities. For the ultimate requirement of 500
m3/d, sufficient rotary drum screens (duty/standby) shall be installed, capable of
handling the design peak hourly flow to the facility as well as the low flows
experienced during startup. The screens shall be equipped with a washing, de-
watering system to reduce the quantity of offensive, odorous material discharged to
the skip for disposal. Skips shall be covered prior to removal from site. The Contractor
shall determine the screenings quantity and loading rates and design the screens and
screenings handling plant accordingly. The screenings handling plants shall be
designed by the Contractor to deliver washed screenings that are not less than 45%
w/w dry solids. Additionally, the washed screenings must be acceptable for off-site
disposal as required by the Engineer. Two or more screenings handling plants, each
of at least 50% capacity, shall be provided. Each plant shall be designed to receive
screenings from either of the screens and to deliver washed, dewatered and
compacted screenings to the screenings skip. Each handling plant shall normally
deliver screenings to its own screenings skip but provision shall be made for discharge
to the other screenings skip by the use of a manually moveable chute. The screenings
handling plant shall be designed to operate in a duty/standby arrangement, initiation of
the standby unit, including all valves and flow changes, shall be fully automatic.
5.4.2.2 Grit Removal
A manufactured grit removal system will effectively remove grit. The system shall
consist of vortex grit tanks, each one having an airlift pump to remove the
accumulated grit from the tank or duty/standby degritting pumps, a cyclone/classifier

to wash and dewater, and a bagging device to contain odours from the grit until it can
be removed for disposal. Grit removal shall also be provided for 500 m3/d capacity.
All grit collectors shall be designed and sized by the Contractor to remove all grit over
0.2 mm diameter with a specific gravity of at least 2.65 at 15° C. The Contractor shall
determine the grit quantity and loading rates to design the grit collection and grit
handling plant accordingly. As an indicative range a grit volume of 0.03 m3/1000 m3
with a peak multiplier of 10 can be considered typical. However, it is stressed that the
values are heavily dependent upon local conditions. The grit handling plants shall be
designed to produce a product acceptable for off-site disposal, containing no more
than 30% organic and volatile matter and not less than 50% w/w dry solids.
Grit removal facilities shall be provided with a grit collector bypass channel capable of
handling Average Daily Flow (ADF).
Equalisation of the flow will occur after coarse screens and grit removal and prior to
the fine screens.
5.4.2.3 Fine Screening
Suggestions for screen openings of 0.5 to 2 mm in size are common among the
manufacturers of the membrane fibre systems. The plate design of Kubota
membranes has a 7-mm path opening between plates and allows use of a wider
screen opening. Testing has been successfully performed using screens with
openings of 2.5 to 3.2-mm, making a 3-mm opening acceptable with the Kubota
system. The Contractor shall supply and install screens compatible with the offered
membrane systems.
The membrane manufacturers recommend screens to be of a two-directional design
rather than rectangular slots. These screens collect more of the hair and stringy fibres,
which pass the screens but then form larger material in the aeration basins that can
clog the area between the membrane plates and fibres. Perforated plates as proposed
by some MBR suppliers are acceptable as an alternative to screens.
With the need for good screening for the long-term health of the membranes, the
standby screening unit shall be an additional mechanical screen as described above.
The installation of a manual bar screen will not be permitted.
The fine screens shall be installed for 500 m3/d capacity. These screenings shall be
washed, dewatered and compacted, to reduce the quantity of offensive, odorous
material discharged to a skip before removal from site. To further reduce odours from
the skip, screening from the discharge chute will be discharged into airtight containers.
5.4.2.4 Equalisation Basins and Return Pumping
Equalisation is one of the key elements to the success of the temporary STP. It must
provide adequate capacity to accommodate peak flows (due to diurnal flow variations
on the ADF and any peak flows created by pumping stations). Because of the limited
capacity of the membranes to process flows greater than ADF, the effective volume
allocated to equalisation must fully dampen the influent flow to produce a flow to the
downstream treatment processes equal to the ADF. Typically, the volume needed to
equalise the influent flow to a STP is 0.2 x ADF.
The equalisation basin shall be located downstream of the coarse screening and grit
removal facilities, but upstream to the fine screening. The basin requires frequent
cleaning to control the accumulation of odorous material. Removal of much of this
material prior to the basins will result in less frequent cleaning requirement of the
basins and be less offensive when cleaning is undertaken. Two basins shall be
constructed to allow the basins to be individually removed from service for cleaning
and maintenance without taking the complete equalisation process out of service.
A gate or weir prior to the fine screening facilities shall limit the flow to the screens in
order to prevent overloading. Excess flow shall overflow side weirs along the channels
into a distribution box to the basins. Gates on the feed to the basins shall allow
isolation of each basin for cleaning and maintenance.
Due to the wide operating depths of the equalisation basins, a dedicated mixing
system, shall be installed in each basin to mix and aerate the sewage to prevent
septicity. Submersible pumps with aspirating jets are the preferred method to provide
mixing and aeration down to a minimum liquid level.
Pumping facilities located in each basin shall return flow back to the fine screens. Two
submersible pumps shall be located within each basin. The return pump flow rate shall
be based on the influent flow rate, as the sum of the return flow rate + influent flow will
need to be < 500 m3/d. The control shall rely on flow measurement from the upstream
inlet pumping station to set the flow rate of the return pumps.
Mixer pumps shall be provided with spare parts to facilitate rapid repair of units. The
mixing and return pumps shall be installed on rail systems to facilitate removal without
entering the equalisation basins.
5.5 SECONDARY TREATMENT PROCESSES

5.5.1 General Considerations
The secondary treatment system is the bioreactor portion of the MBR process.
Through the biological activity, organic and nutrient constituents in the sewage are
removed. The system consists of two processes:
1. Anoxic basins that combine the influent sewage with returned biomass to remove
nitrogen,
2. Aeration (oxic) basins that reduce the organics.
5.5.2 Anoxic Basins
The anoxic basins are operated in an oxygen deficient mode requiring the bacteria in
the biomass to use the nitrates (NO3-N) in the returned sludge as their oxygen source
to sustain their activity. The stripping of the oxygen from the nitrate compound results
in the release of nitrogen gas molecules and its removal from the waste stream. The
anoxic basins also performs the task of providing some foam control by inhibiting the
growth of filamentous bacteria.
To be successful in removing nitrogen to the low levels required by the effluent
standards, and to control foam, the anoxic basins must have an oxygen deficient
atmosphere.
It can be seen that the influent TKN may be as high as 60 mg N/l and the alkalinity
may be as low as 200 mgCaCO3/L (Table 1) and so the STP needs to be designed to
cope with this level of alkalinity. The main way to minimise alkalinity depletion is to
provide sufficient denitrification to recover the alkalinity, as for each g of nitrate
converted to nitrogen gas approximately 3 g of alkalinity is recovered.
The level of denitrification is governed by four factors:
• Anoxic mass fraction of the reactor;

• Degree of nitrates recycled back to the reactor by the Mixed Liquor Recycle (MLR)
pumps has been set at 3 times influent flow rate;
• Temperature, like most biological processes the denitrification rate is temperature
dependent and so it is important that the anoxic zone sizing is based on the minimum
reactor temperature of 24ºC;
• COD fractionation, the higher the level of ready biodegradable soluble COD the quicker
the denitrification rate.
All calculations to define and size the anoxic reactor shall be provided to the Engineer
for approval.
The design of the anoxic basins shall provide for multiple point addition of alum or
metal salt for chemical precipitation of phosphorous.
Baffling of the anoxic basins shall be installed to create multiple zones (minimum of
three) to be operated in series.
Submersible mixers provide agitation to keep the contents of the basins in
suspension. Spare parts located at the temporary STP for the mixers must be
provided to facilitate rapid repair of the units.
5.5.3 Chemical Phosphorus Removal
Phosphorus removal shall be achieved by chemical precipitation at three points in the

process, these are listed in order of preference and where applicable:
• Primary Precipitation: chemical shall be added to the raw wastewater with formed
precipitates being removed with the primary sludge;
• Secondary Precipitation: chemical shall be added during the secondary treatment
process with the formed precipitates being removed with the waste biological sludge
(activated sludge plants only);
• Tertiary Precipitation: chemical shall be added after secondary treatment with the
formed precipitates being removed by means of an additional solids separation device.
The dosed chemical shall be either ferric chloride or ferric sulphate. Ferrous sulphate
may be used on activated sludge plants.
The dosing of these chemicals reduces alkalinity therefore this aspect needs to be
demonstrated within the process design calculations. This is especially applicable at
nitrifying plants treating wastewater with low alkalinity.
The design parameters for the phosphorous removal process are shown in Tables 3
and 4 below.
Table 3: Phosphorous Removal: Secondary Precipitation
Design 1 mg P/l 2 mg P/l

Parameters
Design dosage rate molar basis 1.6 moles Fe3+ per 1.2 moles Fe3+ per
mole total P mole total P
as Ferric 2.9 kg Fe3+ per kg total 2.2 kg Fe3+ per kg total
P P
Mass of precipitate due to Ferric 2.6 kg per kg Fe 2.6 kg per kg Fe
added to sludge added added
Table 4: Phosphorous Removal: Tertiary Precipitation
Design 1 mg P/l 2 mg P/l

Parameters
Design dosage rate molar basis 2.0 moles Fe3+ per 1.5 moles Fe3+ per
mole total P mole total P
as Ferric 3.6 kg Fe3+ per kg total 2.7 kg Fe3+ per kg total
P P
Mass of precipitate due to Ferric 2.5 kg per kg Fe 2.5 kg per kg Fe
added to sludge added added
All works with a phosphorus standard shall be equipped with an automatic, flow
proportional dose control system
Ferric dosing and an on-line phosphate analyser (Chemphos or similar linked to a
phosphate monitor) shall be provided downstream of the fine screens for automatic
control of chemical dosing. The system shall control on a diurnal P load profile in the
event of failure of the phosphate monitor.
Chemical addition shall be at a point of high turbulence to ensure effective use of
chemical dosed.
For tertiary dosing, 5 minutes contact time at average flow shall be provided for
coagulation.
The increase in sludge production due to the phosphorous removal process (in terms
of dry solids content and sludge volume) and its implication on sludge handling plant
shall be considered when implementing chemical precipitation.

When using chemical precipitation to remove phosphorus it may be necessary to

incorporate acid washing chemicals in the membrane cleaning stage. This issue shall
be specifically addressed by the Contractor.
5.5.4 Aeration Basins
A design sludge age of 23 days will provide the flexibility needed to accommodate
removing basins from service and ADF conditions, by allowing the sludge age to be
lowered while still maintaining a highly stabilised sludge for removal from the
temporary STP.
The aerobic volume required to satisfy the chosen sludge age is made up of the
process volume provided by the membrane tank and the remaining volume is provided
by the aeration tank. The anoxic volume is additional to the aerobic sludge age and is
sized based on the discussion defined in the previous section.
The aeration system shall be installed to provide full-floor coverage in a tapered
pattern. This will provide greater air (oxygen) at the start of the basins to match the
oxygen demand of the mixed liquor as it exits the anoxic zone. The later portion of the
basins shall have a lower concentration of aeration devices providing air to assure
mixing while being adequate to provide nitrification. A minimum of 4 separate grids
shall be provided per basin to allow adjustment of the air flow to the grid based on the
air demand in that portion of the basin.
It is recommended that the basins are configured in a long, narrow arrangement, so
that a plug flow scheme can be created, optimising the performance of the basins for
nitrification. Alternative arrangements will be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
5.5.5 Aeration System
A mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) concentration of 12 g/l allows for a

reasonably efficient transfer of oxygen. It also provides flexibility to hold solids in the
aeration system without significantly increasing the solids inventory and inhibiting the
transfer of oxygen to the biomass.
The aeration system, consists of the blowers, air piping and diffuser grid and must be
sized to provide sufficient air for aerobic treatment of the influent sewage under ADF
conditions as well as when one treatment train is out of service. The design must take
into account operation during the summer (sewage temperature = 36ºC) as well as
during colder conditions (sewage temperature = 22ºC).
The design of aeration systems commonly is based on maximum month loading
conditions, with all basins in service. Sizing the aeration system based on ADF
conditions (incorporating a daily peaking factor of at least 1.5), with one basin out of
service, will result in the system being adequately sized for maximum month
conditions. The airflow under standard conditions (Normal air) shall be determined
from the greater of either the airflow needed for crossflow generation or the combined
oxygen demand from organic carbon (BOD) ammonia loading.

The blowers for the aeration system shall be of the multi-stage centrifugal type to
control vibration and noise. Fine bubble diffusers of the membrane (EPDM) type
configured in a full floor grid pattern shall be installed. Separation of the grid pattern
into several diffuser grids with isolation valves on the drop lines allows the air to be
more efficiently applied where it is needed for treatment. Ten-percent spare diffusers
(including membrane disks and holder components) shall be provided for quick
replacement.
5.5.6 Membrane Filtration System
The membrane filtration system (MFS) is the key to the high quality performance that
the MBR process is able to achieve and has a physical limitation to its ability to pass
water. Adequate consideration in the sizing of the facilities will provide the flexibility
needed to accommodate a wide range of conditions, including ADF. For submerged
membrane bioreactors it is essential to maintain continuous crossflow aeration over all
membrane surfaces whilst filtration is occurring. A crossflow aeration of at least 0.5
m/s velocity shall be maintained at all times to limit fouling.
The Tenderer shall offer justification as to whether flow through the membranes can
be accomplished by gravity or with the use of permeate (vacuum) pumps. Typically the
pressure loss through the membranes (transmembrane pressure, TMP) is in the range
of 0.07 to 0.21 bar.
If gravity is used to generate the operating TMP then sufficient freeboard and flexibility
of operation of the water depth shall be provided to permit an adequate membrane
flux to be achieved under all operating conditions. The maximum sustained design flux
rate at the operating temperature shall be justified by calculations.
Modulating valves shall be required on each permeate gravity line to control the flow
rate through the membranes to maintain a constant water surface in the aeration and
membrane basins.
As permeate is drawn through the membranes, the clear water is separated from the
sludge resulting in the remaining sludge becoming more concentrated. The sludge
transfer rate is estimated to be 3 times the ADF rate to the plant.
For schematic design purposes, a Kubota system or equal shall be configured.
Membranes from other manufacturers could be installed in a reduced membrane tank
volume as the schematic design, although this would result in an increase in the
required aeration tank volume to maintain the 23 day aerobic sludge age.
Flow meters shall be installed on each permeate header prior to discharge to the
storage tank to measure the plant flow and pace the feed of sodium hypochlorite
solution for disinfection.
5.5.7 Disinfection
Membranes are effective in removing pathogens from the wastewater, but they are not
infallible. Therefore disinfection is required.

The permeate discharge from the membranes will be chlorinated prior to discharge to
the downstream irrigation (TSE) storage tank. The tank shall function as a chlorine
contact basin with suitable baffling to provide contact time for backup disinfection and
to provide a chlorine residual for the distribution system. Sodium hypochlorite shall be
used as the chlorine source for several other uses in the plant - odour control, foam
control and membrane cleaning. It will be delivered in concentrated form (14%) and
require dilution before use.
The expected chlorine residual concentration is 0.5 (minimum) to 1.0 mg/l.
Additional pumps shall be installed to feed hypochlorite to other uses such as for
odour control and cleaning of the membranes.
5.6 SLUDGE HANDLING

5.6.1 General Considerations
To control foam, sludge will be wasted from the plant from the surface of the MLR
pumping channel.
Tenderers will be required to price for two alternative sludge management options:
• Thickening and tankering;

• Dewatered sludge (assumed by centrifuges unless otherwise specified by the
Engineer).
5.6.2 Sludge Thickening
Thickening of the sludge to a higher concentration reduces the truck traffic, but adds a
treatment process. Thickening the 1.5% dry solids (%ds) waste sludge to > 4%ds will
reduce the truck traffic. A short-term storage tank with a minimum of 4 days storage
shall provide flexibility in the hauling schedule to avoid the truck traffic during the
weekends and allowing for some down time in the hauling operation.
Several types of equipment are available to accomplish the thickening task. These
include gravity belt thickeners, dissolved air flotation, centrifuges and rotary drum
thickeners. Each has the ability to produce a thickened sludge of 4 to 5%TS. Gravity
belt thickeners are the least complicated of the processes and have extensive
operating experience. Progressive cavity pumps are used to feed sludge to the
thickeners. Thickened sludge shall be discharged by gravity to the sludge holding
tank. Sludge shall be withdrawn from the sludge holding tank and transferred to the
hauling vehicles by pumps located in the holding tank.
The sludge thickening system will incorporate at least two units, and shall be sized to
allow the thickening process to be completed in less than 8 hours per day, 5 days per
week. In the event of a unit being out of service for an extended period of time, the
remaining unit shall still be capable to complete the thickening operation through
extended hours of operation.

The air supply to the sludge holding tank shall be provided by the process air blowers.
5.6.3 Sludge Dewatering
Dewatering aerobically stabilised sludge by centrifuges or belt presses, typically

achieves 15%ds, which substantially reduces the volume of sludge to be transported
off site. The stabilised cake would be loaded into covered skips prior to transport of
site.
The system will incorporate 2 no. centrifuges to operate 5 days per week, 8 hours per
day. As with the thickening option, during maintenance the duty machine would
operate for up to 16 hrs per day.
The dewatered cake would discharge from the centrifuge or belt press directly onto a
belt conveyor. The belt conveyor would then discharge into covered skips or covered
truck trailers.
5.7 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

5.7.1 Strategy
The following testing requirements shall be successfully completed prior to

Certification of Completion of the STP:
• Plant testing;
• Training;
• Start Up;
• Performance and Reliability Testing.
During the test phase’s staff nominated by the Engineer will selectively witness the
testing, including Factory tests.
The Contractor shall manage the commissioning with the Engineer coordinating
activities.
5.7.2 Software Testing
The Contractor is responsible for providing Test Specifications, which shall be based
upon performance requirements. The Engineer shall be informed of the schedule for
testing and invited to witness. Tests are to be followed within 7 days by a written test
record.
Control procedures to be clarified for application software installed on site. In particular
attention to the Backing-up and storage of software versions as described below:
The Site Acceptance Testing (SAT) will be based on the FAT but will include the
actual plant operation sequence and interlocks, as defined in the Functional Design
Specification.

The SAT shall repeat all the FAT plus any tests that could not be performed at the
FAT and other additional performance tests to meet the contract specification.
5.7.3 Control of Plant Application Software
The Contractor will record the revision and make back-up copies available at the
following stages:
• Version 1.xx: Contractor verified Software that meets the requirements of the FDS and
is available for Factory Acceptance Testing;
• Version 2.xx: Factory Acceptance Tested software, modified as a result of the FAT and
available for site installation;
• Version 3.xx: Site Acceptance Tested and modified as a result of the SAT, available
“As Installed” for inclusion in the O&M manual.
5.7.4 Plant Testing
Factory Testing: All items to be Factory Tested are to be agreed between the
Engineer and Contractor before commencement.
Dry Testing: All items to be Dry Tested are to be agreed between the Engineer and
Contractor before commencement, but as a minimum should include:
• NIC / EIC Electrical Safety Inspection;

• Lift out demonstration of pumps, gearboxes, motors etc, as appropriate;
• Verification of all safety systems including emergency stops and safety interlocks;
• Motor rotation checks;
• Instrument and loop testing;
• Set up of ultrasonic level transducers and float switches etc;
• Verification of telemetry alarm system in accordance with the Specification;
• Demonstration of automatic control of all associated equipment.
In addition, prior to the commencing the tests detailed above, the Contractor shall
provide signed documentation for the following installation checks:
• Equipment installation, alignment and guarding checks;

• Confirmation of correct lubrication of all equipment;
• Checks on Serviceability and access to equipment;
• Checks on cable ducts seals;
• Check that all safety signs have been installed;
• Calibration certificate for the installed flow meters;

• Hazardous zone rating of Mechanical motors / valve actuators, Instrumentation,

Cabling and junction boxes within chambers.
5.7.5 Wet Testing
Items to be Wet Tested are to be agreed between the Engineer and Contractor before
commencement, but as a minimum should include:
• Interstage Pumping Stations water tightness;

• Interstage pumps;
• MBR tanks water tightness;
• Recirculation pumping station water tightness;
• Filter feed pumps;
• Recirculation pumps;
• All Dosing Pumps;
• Hydro pneumatic washwater booster set – Flow rate and pressure;
• Functionality of all items of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment. The
detailed test requirements shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval;
• Integrated System Tests. The detailed test requirements shall be developed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for collection/temporary over-pumping of final

effluent together with disposal at the TSE storage tank drain manhole on completion of
the test. (Note: during storm conditions, it may not be possible to dispose of the
effluent)
5.7.6 Training
The Contractor shall produce a training plan outlining all training activities and shall
submit a copy of the plan to the Engineer, for approval, prior to commencement of
training.
The Contractor shall allow two training sessions for each topic to be covered,
arranged to allow the phased attendance of the Client’s staff. Training shall be
completed prior to the start-up phase.
Training shall at all times refer to the relevant sections of the O&M Manuals and
drawings and include specific training to cover the following:
• “Operational” training where the Client’s designated operators are given both classroom
and “site-based” training by the Contractor’s staff;
• “Maintenance” training where the Client’s maintenance staff are given both “classroom”
and site-based training.

A log of attendees is to be kept by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also collect
training feedback responses from each attendee. The feedback responses shall be
submitted to the Project Manager on completion of training
5.7.7 Plant Start-up: Process Commissioning
Process Commissioning will be undertaken in order to confirm that the design process
is satisfying the specified performance criteria.
The Contractor shall fully develop his plant start-up procedures within his
commissioning plan.
The Sequence of start-up of the works and bringing plant on line will be discussed and
agreed with the Client and the Contractor with liaison through the Engineer at regular
Commissioning stage to verify that the plant is meeting the process performance
criteria. Sampling arrangements to be detailed at a later stage.
Process performance of items of plant will be monitored by the Contractor at all stages
of start-up, with the possibility of the Engineer attending.
5.7.8 Plant start-up: Reliability Testing
A 10 day continuous reliability test shall be carried out on the process unit to
demonstrate its reliable operational performance under automatic control.
The process unit shall be deemed to have passed its reliability test if the plant and
equipment operates without failure/breakdown during the continuous 10 day test
period. For the purpose of the test, any malfunction of duty plant and equipment,
bringing into use standby/assist plant and equipment, shall not be deemed a failure.
However, a repeat malfunction will be deemed a failure of the reliability test. In this
event the 10 day reliability test shall be re commenced once corrective actions have
been carried out by the Contractor.
The Reliability Tests for the STP shall not commence until:
• Successful completion of Factory, dry and wet testing;

• Draft Operating and Maintenance Manuals have been issued;
• A full and detailed method statement and programme for the Reliability Tests has been
approved by the Engineer;
• Training Programmes have been issued.
During the Reliability Testing, the Contractor shall carry out tests to demonstrate the
satisfactory operation of the STP in all respects. All facilities shall be provided to the
Engineer and the Client to allow the witnessing of the Contractor’s operations.
The following requirements will be met:
• The Contractor shall give the Engineer 3 working days notice of the date, time and
location of each test or inspection;

• The Contractor shall provide all labour and works required to operate the STP during
the Reliability Tests. One or more competent Contractor’s Representatives whose
name or names shall have been notified in writing to the Engineer shall be present
throughout the whole of the period of the Reliability Tests
5.7.9 Performance Testing: General
The purpose of these tests are to demonstrate as far as is practicable that the STP
and equipment are reliable in their operation, their output and performance meets the
stipulated criteria and that the STP is capable of passing the required flows. The
Contractor shall provide all measurement equipment, sampling and testing necessary
to monitor the STP performance until the Contractor achieves completion.
The Performance Tests for the STP shall not commence until successful completion of
dry and wet testing and reliability testing.
All facilities shall be provided to the Engineer and the Client to allow the witnessing of
the Contractor’s operations. To comply with these requirements:
• The Contractor shall give the Engineer 7 working days notice of the date, time and
location of each test or inspection;
• The Contractor shall provide all labour required to operate the STP during the
Construction Performance Tests. One or more competent Contractor’s Representatives
whose name or names shall have been notified in writing to the Engineer shall be
present throughout the whole of the period of the Construction Performance Tests.
The Performance Tests shall comprise:
• PT1 – Hydraulic Throughput ;

• PT2 – Process Performance.
Under each test the following criteria shall be defined:
• Sampling Methodology;
• Performance Requirements;
• Method of Parameter calculation, i.e. definition of average and method of
determination.
5.7.10 Performance Test 1 – Hydraulic Throughput
The items to tested for hydraulic throughput are to be agreed between the Engineer
and Contractor before commencement, but as a minimum should include:
• The maximum designed throughput of the works including distribution chambers, feed
pipework and process units shall be demonstrated by the Contractor. Tests shall be
conducted to confirm that the STP is hydraulically capable of passing the specified ADF
capacity;

• The interstage pumping stations shall be tested in order to verify the volumetric output,
head generated and power input over the total operating range for each pumping
combination;
5.7.11 Performance Test 2 – Process Performance
The purpose of the Process Performance Test is to:
• Ensure the STP is fit for handover to the Client;

• Ensure the STP can meet final effluent quality requirements.
• To test the plant under variations in flow and load and include maximum and minimum
combinations;
• To verify the performance parameters;
• To test the plant under different climatic conditions.
The Process Performance Test shall not commence until successful completion of
hydraulic throughput test.
A 28 day Process Performance Test will be carried out on the STP to demonstrate its
ability to achieve the required final effluent quality. The Test shall be carried out
following successful completion of all dry testing, wet testing and process
commissioning.
Final effluent quality data shall be supplied to the Engineer and the Client in the form
of original results from the Contractor's accredited laboratory.
Details of the Process Performance Test are to be supplied to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencement of the test.
The Contractor shall monitor final effluent by taking one daily composite sample and
one daily spot sample. Spot samples are to be staggered by one hour per day for the
duration of the Test.
For the purpose of this test, the final effluent quality required for the composite
samples are those specified in the ‘Maximum’ column of Table 2, using a 95%ile
statistical basis.
For the purpose of this test, the final effluent quality required for the spot samples is
that specified in the ‘Annual Average’ column of Table 2, using a 95%ile statistical
basis.
BOD5 samples shall have nitrification suppressed using ATU.
Suspended solids samples shall be dried to 105°C.
Each sample shall be analysed using the standard methods defined in the current
version of “Methods for the Examination of Water and Associated Materials” published
in the UK by Her Majesty’s Stationary Office. The Contractor’s sampling and testing
shall be carried out at the expense of the Contractor at an accredited laboratory
approved by the Engineer.
Samples shall be representative of the sample stream and taken as 24 hour

composite samples. Samples shall be taken from 09:00 on the sample day to 08:45 on
the following day. Samples shall be taken with an automatic sampler set to extract
samples at maximum intervals of 15 minutes for deposition into a single composite
sample bottle. The sampler shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense and shall
maintain the sample at less than 4°C (but prevented from freezing) at all times. The
composite sample bottle shall have a minimum volume of 3 litres.
Each composite sample taken from the automatic sampler shall be split equally into
three separate samples. Prior to the division of the sample, the sample shall be
homogenised. One sample shall be taken by the Engineer, one sample shall be given
to the Contractor for their analysis at the Contractor’s volition and cost and one
sample retained in refrigerated storage (at less than 4°C but prevented from freezing)
until 7 days after issue of the results. The refrigerator shall be provided free of charge
by the Contractor and located within the site boundary.
‘Final effluent’ samples shall be taken from a position representative of the final
effluent to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer prior to
commencement of the test.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to collect all samples. Samples shall be
collected and stored in a refrigerator by the Contractor ready for pickup by the Client
or the Engineer. The refrigerator shall be provided by the Contractor and located
within the site boundary.
Instantaneous flow to treatment shall not exceed the ADF ± 10% as measured by the
flow meter located in the final effluent channel.
A minimum of 14 final effluent samples must be collected for a TEST to be valid.

If the temperature of the final effluent is below 7°C for the period of one of the
samples, then the results from that final effluent sample may be discounted at the
request of the Contractor. Temperature measurement shall be provided at the
Contractor’s cost.
The Client may extend the test period to get additional valid samples at the Client’s
cost.
The Contractor shall prepare a summary of the test results at the end of each week
and transmit these to the Engineer. The Contractor shall remain on site at his own
cost until all results from the test have been transmitted.
The STP shall be deemed to have passed its Process Performance Test if the plant
and equipment operates without failure/breakdown during the continuous 28 day test
period. For the purpose of the test, any malfunction of duty plant and equipment,
bringing into use standby/assist plant and equipment, shall not be deemed a failure.
However, a repeat malfunction shall cause the test to be suspended.
The test shall be restarted upon successful repair to the approval of the Engineer.
Additional trial costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

The Client may perform one additional performance test in the 12 month maintenance
period following issue of the certificate of completion. The test shall be for a 28 day
period. The test shall give the Contractor 7 days notice of his intention to begin the
test. The Contractor may attend site prior to and during the period of the test at his
own expense to ensure the STP is being operated in the correct manner.
5.8 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS

5.8.1 Final Completion
Final completion of the temporary STP takes place when the following items have
been completed successfully:
• Receipt of relevant final O&M Manuals;

• Appropriate Training;
• Hydraulic throughput test;
• Process performance test.
5.9 OTHER REQUIREMENTS

5.9.1 General Responsibilities
The general responsibilities of the Contractor for the temporary STP are:
• Construction of the temporary STP;

• Civils, building and temporary works design;
• Mechanical and electrical plant design;
• Provision of a Design Co-ordinator for the duration of the contract;
• Testing and Commissioning of the works;
• Provision of training for the nominated Client’s employees;
• Provision of as-built drawings, Operations and Maintenance Manuals;
• Removal and disposal off site to suitably licensed tip, all surplus excavated materials;
• Liaison with third parties including Utilities as required;
• Liaison with the Landscaping Contractor;
• Provision of temporary site accommodation and welfare facilities within the Contractor’s
compound arrangements for the use of the specialist suppliers;
• Contact and compliance with the Bahrain requirements with regard to noise constraints;
• Provide progress and other reporting to the Engineer;
• Provide documents and obtain approval from the Engineer;

• Attendance at Progress and Design Review meetings as required by the Engineer;

• Asset coding and labelling;
• Clearance and reinstatement upon completion;
• Compliance with all applicable Health and Safety requirements.
5.9.2 Civil Works and Buildings
A hardstanding area shall be constructed adjacent to the STP in order to allow for
truck delivery of chemicals and sludge, screenings and grit removal. This area shall
include bunding elements so that 110% of the total volume capacity of the truck can
be contained within the bunding in case of accidental spill.
Fixed access to all plant and equipment will be designed and constructed to permit
safe operation and maintenance.
Adequate security fencing or similar shall be provided to guarantee protection against
intruders.
The Contractor shall be responsible for design and construction of all cable ducts,
drawpits and all other items required for installation, testing and commissioning of the
mechanical, electrical and ICA equipment.
The STP will be contained within one single warehouse building which the Contractor
must design to the specifications of the Architects. This building will incorporate the
necessary welfare facilities such as a sink unit and WC, odour control equipment and
noise abatement measures.
5.9.3 Common Services and Ancillaries
The following elements will be provided for the STP:
• Lifting davits and hoists: Minimum number of different size to suit the lifting
requirements of the mechanical plant to be installed on the site;
• Access Steps, ladders, platforms and handrailing as required;
• MCC located in the designated Control Building to provide automatic control for the
complete works;
• Connection of the MCC to the designated metering point;
• Application software for the PLC and LOI;
• Provision of all LV power, control, instrumentation and data cabling, ducts,
containment, segregation and support systems (cable tray etc.) and any other cabling
and installation materials necessary to provide a functional works to the requirements
of the contract;
• Power and control interfaces with any other units specified by the Engineer;
• Building services, including lighting, ventilation, lightning protection and small power;

• Intruder alarm system for the control building;

• Distribution boards;
• Instrumentation (including flow recording);
• Hardwired interlocks;
• External lighting to roads, walkways and working areas;
• Earthing of all new electrical plant and equipment including equipotential bonding of
exposed conductive parts and structural steelwork;
• Marshalling box for interfacing with telemetry outstation including cabling of the
telemetry alarms and status signals to the marshalling box; power supply point for the
telemetry unit and earth connection point for the lightning protection unit (LPU) for
telecommunications line;
• End-to-end testing of the telemetry with the supervision of the Engineer;
• STP inflow and effluent sampling facilities.
5.9.4 Asset Life
The general asset lives are given in Table 5 below.
Item Life to first major Asset Life

maintenance
Civil below ground 40 years 60 years
and concrete
Steelwork and steel 20 years 25 years
tanks
Buildings 20 years 25 years
Mechanical Plant 15 years 25 years
Electrical Plant 15 years 25 years
ICA 10 years 15 years
5.9.5 DSEAR Assessment
The Contractor is required to complete an assessment of the proposed STP scheme

in accordance with the Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres
Regulations 2002 that shall, as a minimum:
• Identify dangerous substances and fire and explosion risks;

• Define control measures in place to either remove those risks or, where this is not
possible, control them;
• Put controls in place to reduce the effects of any incidents involving dangerous
substances;

• Provide plans and procedures to deal with accidents, incidents and emergencies
involving dangerous substances;
• Set out the guidelines for employees to be properly informed about and trained to
control or deal with the risks from the dangerous substances;
• Identify and classify areas of the workplace where explosive atmospheres may occur
and avoid ignition sources (from unprotected equipment, for example) in those areas.
5.9.6 Logic Operator Interface (LOI)
The LOI shall as a minimum provide the following facilities:
• Display instantaneous and cumulative values for all analogue signals;

• Display the status of digital signals;
• Display cumulative electricity consumption when specified;
• Display the current stage and condition of sequentially operated processes;
• Display and acknowledgement of alarms with an alarm log giving individual status;
• Display and adjustment of control setpoints, timers, counters, and alarm limits;
• Display and selection of duty/assist/standby status of individual drives with auto rotation
facility based on hours run.
Password protection shall be provided for the adjustment of individual parameters.

Graphical representations of plant items shall be provided on the LOI only as a means
of simplifying the display as these facilities are limited by the LOI technical
specification.
5.9.7 Actuated valves and Penstocks
Each actuated valve or penstock shall have 4no. PLC inputs and 2no. PLC outputs.
The PLC inputs shall be:
• Auto selected – the actuator is in automatic mode;

• Healthy – from the actuator monitor relay (available/tripped);
• Open – from the actuator open limit switch;
• Closed – from the actuator closed limit switch.
The PLC outputs shall be:
• Open – request generated in accordance with the Control Philosophy;

• Close – request generated in accordance with the Control Philosophy.
Open/Close requests shall only be generated if the actuator is selected to Auto and
Healthy.

Modulating valves / penstocks shall be used for flow control – the actuators shall be
suitable for the increased number of starts per hour. They shall include a means of
accepting a remote 4-20mA signal for position control and be capable of transmitting a
4-20mA signal representing the position achieved. The PLC shall include analogue I/O
for this purpose.
5.9.8 General Pump Control
Pumps operating in a well shall be controlled by an ultrasonic level monitor unless

otherwise specified. Alternatives, including conductive level probes and float switches,
shall only be used with the approval of the Engineer. The 4-20mA output from the
ultrasonic controller shall be connected to the PLC. On smaller installations, requiring
minimum control, volt free contacts of the programmable relays in the ultrasonic
controller shall be allowed, with the approval of the Engineer.
Hard-wired back-up controls shall provide a basic pump control in the event of
ultrasonic failure. In this case, the pump shall start if the high level float or probe is
operated – the pump shall not stop when the high level device is cleared as this
causes “hunting” and is detrimental to the pump. The pump shall stop at the low low
level device or after a preset time has elapsed – the timer shall be hard-wired and be
located in the pump starter. The timer shall be adjustable and the range shall be
determined by the particular application.
Hard-wired low level cut-off protection shall be provided for all pumps – this shall
operate in all circumstances.
A pump shall stop if, due to conditions downstream, continued operation will cause
flooding.
5.9.9 Instrument Installations
Power supplies to instruments shall normally be 110VAC – for certain equipment,

particularly hazardous area installations, this shall reduce to 24VDC or 24VAC. Power
supplies shall be derived within the panel ICA compartment and individually fused via
terminal rail fuses.
Instruments shall be earthed via the instrument earth bar within the ICA compartment.
Field earths or screens shall be as specified by the instrument manufacturer.
Lightning protection shall be provided for instruments.
Sensors shall be mounted so as to be easily accessible for replacement or
maintenance. Sensors suspended over open tanks or channels shall be mounted on
hinged brackets to allow movement of the sensor to the side of the tank/channel. The
bracket shall be lockable in its normal operating position. Chains shall be attached
permanently to allow pulling of the sensor away and back to its position.
Sensor cables shall be terminated in a local junction box to allow easy removal unless
an unbroken connection to the transmitter is specifically required by the manufacturer

Ultrasonic sensors shall be mounted directly on a fixed plate – the proprietary bracket
giving angle adjustment of the head shall not be used unless specified.
Float switches shall be mounted so as to minimise movement of the float in the media
– long lengths of cable result in the float switch migrating and the float becoming
trapped on other equipment within the tank or channel.
The following methods are acceptable:
• locating the cable inside a suitably supported conduit with the minimum length of cable
protruding from the end to allow sufficient movement to operate the float;
• attaching the cable to a weighted chain suspended safely in the tank or channel with
the minimum of cable free to allow correct float movement.
After commissioning, when the float switch location is satisfactory then the surplus
cable shall be rolled up and secured safely.
• Flow meter failure shall be generated when the 4-20mA signal is out of range. The
Reset button on the ICA compartment shall be pressed to reset the device.
• Ultrasonic level monitor failure shall be generated when the 4-20mA signal is out of
range and the loss of echo signal is present. The Reset button on the ICA compartment
shall be pressed to reset the device.
All instruments shall be monitored for failure.
5.9.10 Process and Instrumentation
An outline P&I diagram will be provided to the Engineer for approval at an early stage
of the detailed STP design stage.
5.9.11 Maintenance Requirements
A structural steel platform complete with toeboards and handrailing, shall be provided
as necessary to give access to each item which requires routine maintenance.
Greasing points and lubrication fill points shall be easily accessible from the access
platforms.
Guide rails for pumps shall terminate at floor level.
Davits shall be mounted on the access platform steelwork or on top of an adjacent
wall. They shall be capable of raising the pump or mixer from its working position and
lowering it to the ground.
When the item is removed from its operating position, it shall swing out over the
handrails and clear of the access platform without the need for the operative to lean
over the access platform handrailing. Lifting wire ropes shall be long enough to lower
the unit to the ground.

5.9.12 Lifting Equipment
5.9.12.1 General
Each item of equipment shall be provided with a lifting point located to provide a safe
and balanced lifting point for the design load.
Submersible pumps shall have a suitable lifting point about the centre of gravity of the
pump. Each Pump shall be supplied with lifting chains permanently connected to the
pump lifting point. Each chain shall be fitted with a locking device or padlock to allow it
to be secured at the top of the well.
The lifting chains, and any eye bolts or shackles used to lift the pumps shall be
supplied with individual load test certificates. The lifting chains shall extend a minimum
of 1m above the top of the well when the pump is in position.
All Plant supplied and /or included in the Contract that is submersed totally or partially
below top liquid level and which is required to be lifted by a chain; shall be provided
with 50 grade stainless steel lifting chains and hooks. The lifting chains shall be
provided with lifting links at one metre intervals fitted directly within the chain. Chains
shall be in accordance with BS 818: Parts 1 to 9.
All lifting equipment shall be operated by chain. Wire rope devices shall not be used.
5.9.12.2 Davits
Davits shall be provided for lifting plant with weights up to 500kg.

Davit systems with cast in, floor bolted, or other type of davit socket shall also be proof
load tested to 125% SWL on Site. Each socket shall be marked with the SWL and
provided with a separate certificate.
A cover plate shall be fitted to each davit socket to prevent the ingress of dirt and
water whilst not in use.
Stainless steel anchors shall be used to secure davit sockets and a sealant or other
means shall be used to prevent the ingress of water between anchor and concrete
thus preventing any damage.
Davits shall incorporate at least two lifting points to attached a chain block and slave
chain. Slave chains for pump support during intermediate lifting transfer shall be
supplied where required; Chains shall be in accordance with BS 818: Parts 1 to 9.
5.9.12.3 Protective Finish and Identification
All Lifting Appliances inclusive of gantries, portable/fixed lifting systems and

associated equipment shall be protected against corrosion. The finished colour shall
be a full gloss yellow colour no. 356 to BS 381C or equivalent reference 08 E51 to BS
4800. All Lifting Appliances shall include identification of the Safe Working Load
(SWL).
5.9.12.4 Testing and Certification
All lifting Appliances shall be tested and supplied with:

• Individual Test Certificate (Certificate of Conformity), for each item of lifting equipment,
which shall include the name of the “Owner or Occupier”.
• All individual items of Lifting Equipment shall be clearly marked with their respective
serial number and safe working loads.
• Where lifting equipment is provided with the purpose of forming an assembly, then one
test certificate shall be provided for the complete assembly. The test certificate shall
clearly and unambiguously identify the complete assembly.
5.9.12.5 Legislation, Standards and Codes
Codes of Practice and Regulations, inclusive of both PUWER and LOLER Regulations
HSE Guidelines: Manual Handling Regulations 1992
BS 466 Specification for power driven overhead travelling cranes
BS 2573: Part 2 Rules for the design of cranes.
BS EN 1677-5 Components for slings- safety forged steel components
Grade 8.
BS 302 Stranded steel wire ropes.
BS 818: Parts 1 to 9 Short Link Chain for Lifting Purposes
5.9.13 Access Covers
All below ground chambers shall be provided with covers to facilitate access,
equipment inspection and maintenance.
Adequate security shall be provided to prevent unauthorised access or vandalism.
Cover selection must take into consideration location of wet well and vehicular
movements and loadings.
5.9.14 Chamber Access
No fixed man access system shall be provided into the wet well, however
consideration shall be given to safe access to the wet well and equipment for essential
maintenance.
5.9.15 Noise Levels
Mechanical installations shall be designed and constructed to reduce the operating

noise levels as much as possible. The Contractor shall supply all sound absorbing
materials and silencers, if required.
Under all operational conditions the noise level of pumps and equipment shall not
exceed the following figures, unless otherwise specified:

• The overall noise level should not exceed 85 dB (A) measured at a distance of 1 m
from the pump well.
• The noise level from any one individual item of equipment should not exceed 80 dB (A)
measured at a distance of 1m in any direction from the noise source.
• Special effort should be made to eliminate noise with tonal characteristics such as
whistles, screeches and hums.
• ISO R 532 and VDI 2058 shall be the basis for assessment of the noise levels.

PHASE 1 – DURRAT MARINA
ROADS AND UTILITIES NETWORKS
5.10 SEWAGE PUMPING SYSTEMS

5.10.1 General
An inlet pumping station located on lot A-S6 will pump effluent to the head of the
temporary STP and shall comprise a Wet Well, valve chamber and discharge
pipework. The pumping station shall be constructed in accordance with SEPPD
standard specifications.
The scope of supply shall comprise but not be limited to the following:
• 2 No. submersible type pumps complete with close coupled motors operating on a
Duty/Standby basis.
• 2 No. discharge stools.
• 2 No. sets of guide rails complete with brackets.
• 2 No. pairs of stainless steel lifting chains with intermediate lifting rings.
• Discharge Pipework, flange adaptors, flexible couplings etc. complete with non-
return valves, isolation valves and all necessary pipe and valve supports.
• All Instrumentation, 1 No. U/S level instrument for pump control, 1 No. discharge
electromagnetic flow meter, and float switches for backup control.
• 1 No. motor control centre (MCC) housed within a prefabricated GRP kiosk with
lighting and 13A 230V RCD protected socket.
• All electrical power, control, signal and earthing cabling between the pumps,
sensors, instruments and control panels etc. to provide a complete system. This
shall include for cable management, identification, glanding and termination etc. to
comply with EDD/R-1 and BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations and
WIMES.
• Access Covers for Pump Well, Valve Chamber and Flow Meter Chamber.
Where required all equipment shall be rated to operate continuously in a at low
level within the wet well and shall be manufactured from appropriate tested,
corrosion resistant materials or provided with proprietary coating systems to
ensure corrosion resistance over the life of the pumpset.
Provision shall be made at the pumping station to prevent flooding in the event of
complete power failure.
The storage volume shall be a minimum of 30 minutes at peak design flow.
5.10.2 General Mechanical Specification
This section shall be read in parallel with Section 10 of this Specification –

Mechanical.

5.10.3 Submersible Pumps
5.10.3.1 Pump Sets

The pumps must be of the close-coupled, fully submersible, non-clog, centrifugal
type. They must be constructed from materials resistant to corrosion.
The pump sets shall be manufactured by one of the following vendors, or an
approved alternative:
• ITT Flygt Ltd

• KSB Ltd
• ABS Pumps Ltd
The pumps shall be selected with a pump head-flow curve stable with the tangent
at any point directed downward in the direction of increasing flow rate. The pump
shall avoid runout conditions with the well at maximum water level.
The pumpset shall be capable of continuous operation over its full operating range,
either partially or fully submerged. Cooling of the motor shall be an integral part of
the pump design and shall not rely on separately supplied or driven cooling supply.
Pumps must be capable of passing spheres of at least 80 mm diameter. The
design of the pump must include every precaution to eliminate choking of the
pumps and other mechanical breakdowns.
All pumps shall be designed for both continuous and intermittent operation capable
of a minimum of ten (10) starts per hour.
Pumpset speed shall not exceed 1500 r/min. Only in exceptional circumstances
will pump speeds in excess of 1500 r/min be considered. These will require
specific project approval.
The pumpset shall be capable of withstanding the effects of short-term reverse
rotation following pump stop.
The pumpset shall be capable of operating at zero flow rate (closed valve) for a
period not less than 2 minutes.
Pumpsets from 5 kW to 11 kW shall be fitted with stator temperature switches,
pumpsets from 11 kW to 54 kW shall be fitted with stator temperature switches
and seal leakage detectors, and pumpsets over 54 kW shall be fitted with stator
temperature switches, seal leakage detectors and lower bearing temperature
detectors.
The enclosure for the motor shall be IP68 rated with continuous submergence
depth rating of 10m.
The direction for rotation of the motor shall be clockwise when viewed from above
the motor, the direction of rotation must be clearly and permanently marked on
each pump housing.
The pump shall be capable of running dry for short periods during maintenance,
inspection or rotation checks.

The pump sets shall be designed, manufactured and erected in accordance with
the latest valid issues of codes, standards, IEC recommendations, accident
prevention regulations and legal regulations.
5.10.3.2 Pump Casing
The material for the pump casing must be a high quality close grained grey cast
iron, free from burrs, sand, gas holes, cold sheets or other defects.
The pump casing must be designed for easy access to all parts.
The pump casing must be able to withstand a hydrostatic test head of twice the
maximum possible delivery head.
Impellers must be made from high quality, close grained, grey cast iron. The
impellers must be machined and fitted to reduce leakage and friction to a
minimum.
5.10.3.3 Pump Mounting
Pumps must be mounted on a discharge pedestal that allows the pumps to be
easily removed without the need to remove bolts or drain or enter the pump well.
Pedestals, base plates or frame support for pumpsets installations shall be
designed to prevent the pumpset exceeding the permissible vibration levels, the
design and installation of pedestals and base plates shall prevent air pockets
forming during grouting.
Pumpsets installed in wet wells shall be supported and automatically coupled to
the outlet pipework by their own weight and positively guided during the lowering
operation. The connection shall allow the pump to be raised from the top of the
sump without the need to enter the sump.
Holding down bolts must be Grade A4 stainless steel set in resin anchors.
The discharge coupling must ensure that negligible leakage occurs when the
pump is fitted into its operating position.
Guide rails shall be fixed and positioned to allow the pump sets to slide freely and
seat correctly when lowered into the working position. The Guide rails are to be
supported by brackets mounted at equal intervals spaced not more than 1.5m
apart.
The guide system shall be sufficiently long to enable the pump to be lifted
completely clear of the wet well.
Guide rails shall be manufactured from Stainless Steel tube.
The outlet connection of the discharge pedestal shall, as a minimum, be flange
type PN 16 to comply with BS EN 1092-2.
5.10.3.4 Identification
The pump rating shall be made from non-corrosive material and shall contain, as a
minimum, the following information:

• Manufacturer
• Serial Number
• Rated head (metres)
• Motor Power (kW)
• Weight (kg)
• Pumpset IP rating
• Voltage/Phases/Frequency/Amps
The rating plates shall be permanently fixed on each pumpset starter with self-
tapping screws.
A single spare rating plate shall be provided for installation adjacent to the pump
starter.
5.10.3.5 Bearings and Seals
Ball or roller bearings must be able to absorb axial and/or radial thrust where
appropriate. They must be adequately housed and continuously rated.
Bearings shall be lubricated for life and not require routine lubrication.
Shaft seals must be the mechanical type, rated to ensure exclusion of the pumped
media from the bearings and motor.
Shaft seal cooling shall be an integrated part of the pump and not require
additional facilities.
5.10.3.6 Detachable Fittings

Any detachable fittings must be held in place with countersunk screws or locking
devices.
5.10.4 Wet Well
The wet well shall be designed to minimise the build-up for solid matter within the
structure, the following shall be provided as a minimum:
• The minimum slope of the benching shall be 30°

• The pump duty shall automatically cycle to minimise any debris build-up at the
pump intake.
The stop level in the wet well shall conform to the pump manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5.10.5 Valves & Penstocks
Valves shall be provided in accordance with the following:

5.10.5.1 General
Valves and penstocks shall comply with the relevant provisions of the appropriate
British Standard.
All valves shall be individually tested by the manufacturer for both strength and
leakage.
Unless indicated otherwise, direction of closure shall be clockwise. The direction of
closing shall be indicated by an arrow cast on the upper face of the gland or stem
seal housing.
Where necessary extension spindles, chain wheels and operating platforms shall
be provided.
Valves shall not be installed in an inverted position.
Valves shall normally be PN16 flanged type in accordance with BS EN 1092 or
shall be suitable for bolting between flanges. For valves less than 80 mm NB
compression fittings may be used. Screwed fittings may be used where the fluid
handled is non-aggressive.
Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be manually operated. Valves shall be
fitted with a metal tag showing identification number and details of services
controlled.
Handwheels shall be sized in accordance with BS EN 12570 but shall not normally
be greater than 500mm in diameter. The normal and maximum manual operating
forces, as defined in the aforementioned standard, shall not exceed 400N and
1000N, respectively. If the torque required to operate a valve exceeds 50Nm then
operation shall be facilitated by means of an actuator and / or geared
arrangement.
Valves of the same type and size and designed for the same service shall be
obtained from a single manufacturer, and shall be strictly interchangeable.
Valve extension spindles shall be solid galvanised mild steel fabricated in single
lengths. Any lengths stated or shown are approximate; the Contractor shall
determine the exact length. The maximum distance between supports shall be 2
m. Extension spindles and caps shall stop not more than 200 mm below the
operating surface nor protrude above it.
Hand wheels, valve caps and spindle couplings shall be positively located and
secured on spindles, friction location is not acceptable.
Operating hand wheels shall have the direction of open/close operation
permanently cast or stamped into the hand wheel rim. Hand wheels shall be sized
so the valve can be operated against the design differential pressure referred to in
the data sheet or 1 bar, whichever is the greater, with an operating effort at the rim
(push/pull) not exceeding 250 N.
5.10.5.2 Non-Return Valves
A Non-return valve shall be installed on the pump discharge pipework up stream of
the isolation valve. Valves shall conform to BS 5153.
The check valve shall be a full port swing check type and comprise:
• A ductile iron body

• A ductile iron disc with a bronze facing
• Metal seat
• Lever arms, counter weights, guards
5.10.5.3 Gate Valves
Resilient seated Gate Valve - Isolating valve shall have a resilient seated gate
valve to BS 5163 with a non-rising spindle.
The valve shall comprise:
• A ductile iron body

• Resilient seating arrangement
• Appropriate means of operation dependent on force required to operate the
valve.
5.10.5.4 Penstocks
Penstocks shall have non-rising spindles.
Guide brackets as necessary shall be included with the penstock. The handwheel
with gunmetal rotating nut shall have adequate diameter for the duty required and
shall have cast on it the direction of closing which shall be clockwise.
Seating faces shall be gunmetal or bronze, hand scraped, and securely fixed to
the frame or door.
Penstocks and frames shall be manufactured from continuously welded steel or
stainless steel of a grade appropriate to the application and environment. All
frames shall be suitably reinforced and include corner gussets. All fasteners shall
be stainless steel.
Allowable leakage rates shall be in accordance with BS 7775 - Specification for
Penstocks
5.10.6 Pipework & Fittings
5.10.6.1 Pipework with the Pumping Station / Valve Chamber

Pipework from the pump sets and within the valve chamber shall be ductile iron
PN 16 to BS EN 598.
Dismantling joints, pipework supports and thrust restraints shall be provided as
required.
5.10.6.2 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, and joints shall conform to BS 598 unless otherwise
specified.

Flanged pipes and fittings shall be drilled to PN16.

Flanges, unless otherwise specified, shall be BS EN 1092-2.
Tyton (push-fit) joint areas and simple fittings shall be protected using purpose
made PE muffs.
Bolted joints and fittings shall be protected to CESWI P1 (application of petroleum
paste primer and profiling mastic, followed by protective tape wrap).
Where cut pipes will be connected on site, a flange adapter or approved equivalent
must be used.
5.10.6.3 Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings
Polyethylene pressure pipes shall comply with the relevant provisions of the UK
Water Industry Combined Specification for Polyethylene Pressure Pipes for
Pressurised Water Supply and Sewerage Duties (Final Draft WIS 4-32-17 dated
March 1999).
Coated or composite polyethylene pipes for special uses (to provide resistance to
permeation of contaminants, scoring etc) shall be permanently distinguished from
plain solid wall, polyethylene pipes. The outer coating shall be self-coloured in the
identifying colour specified for the core pipe material (PE80 or PE100), and shall
incorporate four continuous brown co-extruded stripes at quarter points.
Any site cut pipes shall be cut square and chamfered similarly to the factory
machined chamfer on the supplied pipes.
Polyethylene fusion joints and fittings shall comply with the relevant provisions of
WIS No 4-32-14 or WIS 4-32-15.
Electro fusion fittings shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS EN 12201-3
or WIS No 4-32-14; in particular the Contractor shall have demonstrated
compliance with the talc contamination testing requirements of the WIS.
Electro fusion and butt-fusion jointing shall be made in accordance with WIS 4-32-
08 using equipment specified in WIS 4-32-16.
Heat fusion jointing of polyethylene pipes shall only be carried out by operatives,
who have undertaken training in accordance with the requirements of WIS 4-32-
08. Such training shall also have the approval of the Construction Industry Training
Board or equivalent body. Satisfactory documentary evidence of successful
completion of the course shall be submitted prior to the operative commencing
work on heat fusion jointing.
Electrofusion jointing shall not be used where it is practicable to use butt fusion
jointing.
Dummy joints made in accordance with Clause 2.2.3 of WIS 4-32-08 should be
numbered, documented and presented to the Purchaser for his inspection.
Records shall be maintained of this.
The Contractor shall provide confirmation from the pipe manufacturer that pipe
conforms to the details as set out in this specification and the following details:

• Short-term surge pressure resistance.

• The lifetime at a pressure of 1.2 times MRS or alternatively at a pressure of 1.5
times the rated pressure of the pipe, this is to determine the safe duration of
pressure tests.
5.10.6.4 Mechanical Couplings
Mechanical couplings and repair clamps for iron pipes shall comply with WIS 4-21-
02.
Fittings for PE80 (MDPE) and PE100 (HDPE) shall be Type 2, fit for the purpose,
end load restraining except for unusual locations and have an internal pipe
support.
All fittings shall be protected against corrosion by the application of a polymeric
barrier coating in accordance with WIS 4-52-01. All internal and external surfaces
shall be coated to Class B as a minimum.
All fasteners shall be protected from corrosion by the application of zinc and a
polymer barrier coating in accordance with WIS 4-52-03.
All mechanical couplings shall be to 16 bar rating.
5.10.6.5 Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers
Bolts, studs, nuts, screws and washers shall comply with the relevant provisions of
the appropriate Standard, as set out below:
Metal washers for general purposes BS 4320
High strength friction grip bolts, nuts and washers BS 4190
Stainless steel (Grade X5CrNiMo 17-12-2 also Grade 1.4401) BS EN 10088-2

Bolting for pipes and fittings shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 4505:
Section 3.1 and BS EN 1092 – 2, except that spheroidal graphite iron bolts for use
with ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from metal complying with
the provisions of BS EN 1563 for Grade 500/7.
Bolt length and tightening torque shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall be sufficient to ensure that nuts are full-threaded when
tightened in their final position with two threads showing.
Where bolting is metallurgically incompatible with the material being fixed, suitable
isolating washers and sleeves shall be used.
Washers shall be provided under the head of the bolt and under the nut.
Unless manufactured of stainless steel, all fasteners shall be protected against
corrosion in accordance with WIS 4-52-03.
Mild steel nuts, screws, washers and bolts shall be hot dip galvanised to BS EN
ISO 1461 unless stated otherwise in the Specification. Compatibility with other
materials in contact with these fixings shall be ensured

5.10.6.6 Gaskets
Gaskets for flanged pipe joints shall be either of the inside-bolt-circle type or full
face type.
Gaskets shall be manufactured from material complying with the provisions of BS
EN 681: Part 1 or Part 2, as appropriate.
5.10.7 Design Life
Unless stated otherwise the design life shall not be less than 20 years.
5.10.8 Mechanical Installation
The Contractor must erect all equipment to the limits specified.

Where required, all supporting steel work, must be hot dipped galvanised and
provide support without vibration under all operating conditions.
20 mm BSP test point tappings must be installed upstream of the non-return
valves and fitted with globe valves and a plug, the location of which is shown on
the general arrangement drawing.
Surfaces to be painted, all pumping equipment, pipes, fittings, delivery and pipe
supports must be painted in accordance with the following:
• Surfaces not accessible after erection of pipe work must be painted before the
part is installed.
• Where welding is required, an uncoated margin of 25 mm must be left on either
side of the area to be welded after coating. These areas must be painted after
the welding is completed.
• Paint Type - A two-pack epoxy must be used for all painting applications. Two
coats must be applied as per the manufacturer's instructions. The colour must
be black.
• Surface Preparation - All surfaces to be painted must be free from grease, oil,
dirt, concrete spots, etc. Surfaces must be prepared in accordance with the
paint manufacturer's requirements.
Application - The paint must be applied to the manufacturer's requirements and
worked well into joints and open spaces.
5.10.9 Take-Over Procedures, Testing and Commissioning
The Contractor shall carry out all tests necessary, whether particularly described in
this Contract or not, to prove the operation, functionality and safety of the plant.
These shall include but not be limited to the following:
• All electrical, mechanical and control system tests and checks associated with
the plant and equipment supplied under this Contract.

• All site based hydrostatic leak testing of tanks, vessels, piping systems etc.,
which form a part of the plant and equipment supplied under this Contract.
The Contractor shall include for the supply of all consumables, including the ‘first-
fill’ of all necessary lubricants etc., as necessary for the testing of all plant and
equipment supplied herein.
Before undertaking any of the functional tests, the Contractor shall ensure that
written test documents, method statements and any required preliminaries / pre-
requisites are in place within good time beforehand and that the Site
Commissioning Project Manager has full knowledge of tests being undertaken and
the subsequent results.
Commissioning test results of the performance of motors, pumps etc must be
provided to the Project Manager within seven days of the commissioning.
The installation is required to operate continuously within the specified time limits
of the rating for each piece of equipment, without failure during the Defects Liability
Period, before the Project Manager will accept the commissioning tests.
Should the process plant and provisions of this Contract fail to pass the take-over
tests then the Contractor shall, unless he can demonstrate that the failure is wholly
beyond his control, at his own cost modify or rectify the plant as necessary until
satisfactory Take-Over testing is achieved.
5.10.10 On-site Testing of Pumpsets
After the pumps have been installed each must be tested in accordance with the
Specification.
The Contractor shall:
• Continue the test for additional time if, in the opinion of the Project Manager, a
greater time is necessary.
• Test all equipment in situ to verify correct performance at the duty conditions.
• Record delivery heads by accurate, calibrated pressure gauges located
upstream of non-return valves.
• Carefully inspect all pipe work and other equipment installed under the
Contract.
• Take corrective action and repeat the in-situ test if the Project Manager
considers any part of the works to be defective.
• Rectify any defects to the finished surface of the equipment and pipe work.
5.10.11 Odour
Where deemed necessary during detailed design provision shall be made for
odour control to the wet well, which shall take the form of carbon deodorising
unit(s) fitted to the pumping station vent(s).

The design of the odour control equipment shall take into account the temperature
listed below:
Parameter Range
Sewage 22°C - 36°C
Ambient 0°C - 50°C
Surface radiating 85°C (maximum)

temperature
Odour gases from wet well Up to 30°C

5.11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

5.11.1 List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description / meaning

ac Alternating Current
AC Air Conditioning
BEP Best Efficiency Point
CAT Cable Awareness Test
CDM Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
CESWI Civil Engineering Specification for the Water Industry (UK)
dc Direct Current
DI Ductile Iron
DOL Direct on Line
FAT Factory Acceptance Testing
FRP Fibre Reinforced Polymer
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
ID / OD Internal Diameter / Outer Diameter
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers
IS Intrinsically Safe
HMI Human Machine Interface
HV High Voltage (>11000V)
kA Kilo amperes (1000A)
kV Kilo Volts (1000V)
kVA Kilo Volt Amperes
kVAr Kilo Volt Ampere Reactance
kW Kilo Watts (1000W)
kWH Kilo Watt Hours
LOLER Lifting Operations & Lifting Equipment Regulations
LV Low Voltage (<1000V)
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCC Motor Control Centre
MEW Ministry of Electricity & Water
MRS Minimum Required Strength
NICEIC National Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Contracting
PLC Programmable Logic Controller

PE Polyethylene
REF Restrictive Earth Fault
SAT Site Acceptance Testing
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
STP Sewage Treatment Plant
TSE Treated Sewage Effluent
TB Terminal Box
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
VSD Variable Speed Drive
WDD Waste Disposal Division
WIMES Water Industry Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
WRAS Water Regulatory Advisory Scheme
SWL Safe Working Load
5.11.2 Reference to Manufacturers
Where unavoidably, manufacturers' or suppliers' names are stated or particular

references to brand names are given, the words "or approved equal" shall be
deemed to be written immediately following such names. The onus of proving
equal performance will fall to the Contractor.
5.11.3 Compliance with Standards and Regulations
The work shall be performed according to, and equipment supplied shall comply
with, the most recent relevant codes, standards, accident prevention regulations
and legal regulations, Acts and Legislation in force within the Kingdom of Bahrain,
where these standards do not exist then British Standards shall prevail.
All materials and equipment supplied and all work carried out as well as calculation
sheets, drawings, quality and class of goods, methods of inspection, constructional
peculiarities of equipment and parts and acceptances of partial plants, as far as
these are beyond the special requirements of the specifications, shall comply in
every respect with the relevant Bahrain Standards and Codes of Practice or other
approved standard as indicated below.
These items shall also be consistent with Good Engineering Practice as well as
conforming to relevant Acts and regulations of the Bahrain Government, its
regulatory bodies and the relevant Local Authority.
Materials and Equipment shall comply, at least, to one of the following standards
and codes, in order of priority:
Bahrain EDD, MoW
GCC
British BSl , IEE

International ISO, IEC, EN

German VDE, VDI, AD, TRD, DIN, VGB
American ANSI, ASME, ASTM, NEMA
Where alternative standards are quoted in the Specification, it is acceptable for the
Contractor to apply corresponding British or International Standards, but it is the
Contractor's responsibility to provide sufficient evidence that any other standard
proposed by the Contractor (other than those mentioned above) will ensure an
equivalent or higher standard.
The Contractor shall clearly state in his proposal the standards and codes that he
intends to apply.
In general the works shall comply with the following Standards:
EDD/R-1 Regulations for Electrical Installations

MoW(2009) Standard Specifications for Construction Works 2009
(sections 17/18
SEPPD Sanitary Engineering Projects & Planning Department
BS EN 60439 Part 1 Low Voltage Switchgear Assemblies
BS7671 Requirements for the Electrical Installations in Buildings (IEE
wiring regulations, seventeenth edition and associated
guidance notes published by the IEE)
BS 7698 Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine Driven Alternating
Current Generating Sets.
BS4999 General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines
BS EN 55014 Radio and Television Interference Suppression
BS 6436 Ground mounted distribution transformers
BS EN 50091 Specification for Uninterruptible Power Supplies
BS EN 60529 Specification for Degrees of Protection Provided by
Enclosures
G5/4 Electrical Association Engineering Recommendations
WIMES Water industry Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
5.11.4 General Electrical Specification
5.11.4.1 MCC/LCP
1 No. Motor Control Centre (MCC) or Local Control Panel (LCP) shall be provided
for sewage lift station. Each panel shall be fully automated needing limited manual
intervention (i.e. should be capable of operating without manual switching,
starting/stopping)
Each panel shall comply to EDD, SEPPD, MoW, GCC and other international
standards set out within section 1. Specifically the MCC/LCP shall conform to BS
EN 60439 part 1 Form 4 Type 2 and shall incorporate starters and control
equipment for all new plant. For sewage pumping related works all equipment shall

conform to MoW and SEPPD standards. Where conflict occurs between local and
international standards, local EDD, MoW, SEPPD standards shall take
precedence.
5.11.4.2 Telemetry
Provision shall be made to allow critical alarms and plant status information to be
transmitted to the onsite Telemetry/SCADA System, via the fibre optic
communication network. Provision shall made for the inclusion of a radio
communications system.
All signals shall be marshalled in the relevant MCC/LCP for onward transmission
by the telemetry / SCADA contractor.
For sewage related elements telemetry requirements shall be as per those
specified within the MoW and SEPPD standards.
5.11.4.3 MCC/LCP Kiosk
The MCC/LCP for the pumps shall be contained within a kiosk, which shall also
house the relevant building services, including but not limited to the following:
• 230Vac 13amp Socket (RCD protected)

• Interior and exterior lighting
• Ventilation / Air Conditioning
• Intruder Alarm
• Telemetry / SCADA equipment
Sewage related plant shall be in accordance with SEPPD specifications
5.11.4.4 Electrical Installation

The pumping station shall be supplied with a 400V 3ph 4 wire 50Hz, with provision
for a backup generator connection via a cat flap opening or alternative approved
method.
All works related to the electrical installation of each station shall be carried out by
an EDD approved contractor and in accordance with the regulations EDD/R-1
The entire electrical installation shall comply with EDD regulations as a minimum.
Where the requirements are not clear the relevant sections of other GCC and/or
appropriate international codes and standards set out within section 1 should be
followed ensuring they more than meet the requirements set out within this
specification and do not compromise safety of persons operating the equipment.
All equipment shall be selected and installed in relation to the environmental
conditions present at each station.

5.11.5 Pumping Station MCC’s/Control Panels
5.11.5.1 General
MCC’s and LCP’s shall be form 4 type 2 construction in accordance with British
Standard BS EN 60439 part 1 and local EDD regulations, the exception being
sewage related MCC/LCP’s which will be form 4 type 7 in accordance with MoW
standards. In the event of conflicting information/regulations, local EDD, MoW and
SEPPD regulations shall take precedence.
The MCC’s/LCP’s shall be designed for bottom cable entry, front cable access.
The MCC/LCP will consist of the following as a minimum:
• Main Incomer
• Generator Incomer (if required for the particular application)
• DOL, Star Delta and Variable Speed Starters as required for the particular
application.
• PLC Controls and Instrumentation
• Telemetry / SCADA Marshalling / Radio link
• Distribution Feeders as required for the particular application
Each panel compartment shall be fitted with an anti-condensation heater with an
easily accessible on/off switch and thermostat
The Contractor shall ensure that the control panel has a short circuit rating that
matches or exceeds the maximum fault level expected at the control panel's
incoming terminals.
Power supplies for control shall be fed from transformers with secondary windings
at 110 Volt single-phase 50Hz with one pole earthed.
Power supplies for all field instrumentation shall not exceed 24 Volt dc
Each starter shall incorporate controls for manual operation. When selected for
manual operation the drive shall be operated from pushbuttons mounted on the
section door.
Indicator lamps shall be provided on the MCC/LCP doors to provide status of the
equipment, particularly in the event of PLC failure and manual control.
All critical items of equipment are required to be fail safe I,e a critical item is
described as a part of equipment that upon failure would cause loss of life, create
a hazardous situation or substantial damage etc.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary drawings, calculations, schedules and
documentation for each station.
The package shall also include for the supply, installation, and factory testing of all
electrical and ICA equipment as required for the particular application, as detailed
on the specific Schedules, Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs),
Control Philosophy, and other documentation and drawings.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of new plant and equipment,
complete with all necessary components to ensure satisfactory operation, together
with all craneage, off-loading, scaffolding, installation, painting, testing,
commissioning, training, O&M manuals, record drawings and documentation.
All items of plant with a standby facility shall have automatic changeover on loss of
the duty drive or after a set time has elapsed. Manual facilities for alternating the
duty drive shall be provided. The standby drive shall be complete, fully installed
and available for immediate changeover to the duty drive.
Where duty and assist regimes are required the plant operation shall be as per the
control regimes set out within the relevant operational control philosophy
Each starter shall have provision for a field mounted emergency stop to be located
adjacent to the respective drive. If a duty drive is tripped using an emergency stop,
the standby drive shall not be instructed to start if there is the risk of hazards being
introduced by automatic starting of the standby unit. The drive/device under an
emergency stop condition is required to be reset at the associated MCC/LCP. It
should also be noted that this should only be possible if the emergency stop has
been released.
5.11.5.2 ICA Section
The ICA Section of the MCC shall contain all items of equipment necessary for the
safe, reliable and efficient operation of the pumping stations as set out in the
relevant Control Philosophies.
The hardware to be supplied and installed by the Contractor within the ICA Section
shall include, but not be limited to, the following. For specific requirements see
relevant design documentation for each element:
• 1 No. Ultrasonic/radar level indicator controller, door mounted

• 1 No Set of backup level controls
• 1 No. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
• 1 set Hardwired relay logic controls for all plant
• Power supplies
• Isolating IS barriers (sewage purposes only)
• Instrument power supplies
• MCC PLC, Telemetry and SCADA interface equipment
• Radio telemetry unit
5.11.5.3 Instrumentation
5.11.5.3.1 General
Power supplies to instrumentation shall either be 110Vac or 24Vdc. Power
supplies for the instrumentation shall be derived within the ICA section of the
relevant MCC/LCP. They shall be individually fused.

Instruments shall be earthed via the instrumentation earth bar located within the
associated MCC/LCP ICA section. Field earths or screens shall be as specified by
the instrument manufacturer.
Instruments shall be located to allow access for maintenance or replacement.
Sensors mounted over open channels or over tanks shall be mounted on hinged
brackets to allow movement of the sensor to the side of the tank or channel. The
bracket shall be lockable in its operating position to avoid movement during
operation.
Sensor cables shall be terminated in local junction boxes with an adequate IP
rating, this will vary dependant upon the environment it is installed within. Only
when advised by the instrument manufacturer shall unbroken connections be
permitted.
All instruments shall be installed in accordance with the manufactures
recommendation. Where it is deemed necessary by the contractor to deviate from
the recommended methods each individual case/proposal shall be submitted to
the engineer in writing for approval.
5.11.5.3.2 Level Instrumentation
As a minimum the ultrasonic/radar instruments shall have the following outputs:
• 4-20mA analogue signal relating to the level within the chamber

• 6No programmable digital outputs relating to level
• Healthy/Failed
• Signal Out of Range
Ultrasonic/radar level sensors shall be mounted directly on a fixed plate.

Float switch level instruments shall be installed so as to minimise movement and
cable length in an effort to avoid turbulent conditions resulting in false readings.
5.11.5.3.3 Flow Instrumentation
As a minimum the flow meters shall have the following outputs:
• 4-20mA analogue signal relating to the flow rate

• Healthy/Failed
• Signal Out of Range
• Digital Output for No Flow
5.11.5.3.4 Telemetry / SCADA Signals
A site wide telemetry/SCADA system will be provided by a specialist contractor to
provide the operations and maintenance teams with real time information of the
status of the plant, and the facility to change operational parameters.
Signals are to be provided in all MCC’s and control panel assemblies for
connection to a telemetry/SCADA system via the fibre optic or radio network.
Typical signal requirements for each of the pumping stations are listed below:

• Pumping Stations
• Drive Running
• Drive Available
• Drive Tripped
• Pumping Station Level Hi Hi
• Pumping Station Level Instrument Loss of Echo / Out of Range
• Pumping Station Flow Instrument Failed / Out of Range
• Mains Power Failure

5.12 IRRIGATION - TSE TRANSFER AND DISTRIBUTION

5.12.1 GENERAL
The water for public area landscape irrigation (covering open spaces, streetscape
and utility compounds) in the Durrat Marina Project shall be obtained from the
treated sewage effluent storage tanks located adjacent to the site Temporary STP
at Plot A-S6
This effluent will be distributed across Phase 1 of the Durrat Marina Development
through the irrigation network (Covering Phase 1) and will be supplied to each
public landscape area at a specific time during night-time hours, through an
electric solenoid valve that will be activated from a central controller at the storage
tank site. The delivery time, pressure and flow allocated for irrigation supply to
each separate landscape package will be made known to the contractor for tertiary
system design purpose. Transfer of flows to day tanks on privately owned plots will
take place during the daytime.
A single Irrigation Distribution Pumping Station will be required to deliver duty
flows into the network.
Storage tanks for public area irrigation will only be considered if demand
management dictates the necessity. In this case a pumping station, pumps,
controller and tertiary solenoid valves would be necessary.
5.12.2 STORAGE
One number TSE storage tank is be required. This will be located on plot A-S6
The TSE storage tank shall be modular and be suitably designed to accommodate
a gradual increase in the irrigation demand and TSE production.
5.12.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
5.12.3.1.1 PUMPING OVERVIEW

The project shall consist of one number integrated Irrigation/Fire pumping station
within plot A-S6:
The irrigation Pumping Station and Fire Protection Pumping station must have the
capability of working together and with the central control system. A Fire
Protection Mode Switch shall be installed at the Principal Utilities Plot that has the
capability of immediately cancelling all irrigation currently running through the
central control system, preventing further irrigation until reset, and switching the
pumps from the irrigation pumping station to the fire protection pump. The system
must be capable of accepting this signal either from the central controller or from
the switch and swapping simultaneously and seamlessly between the two stations.
The flow at that time will shift to the fire hydrants on the same irrigation mainline.
There may be a delay of a few minutes in the flow as the irrigation shuts off and

before the fire hydrants are opened. The time will be equivalent to the time
required for the fire truck to reach the hydrant from the fire switch as well as the
time to shut down irrigation in a staged process – three minutes to reduce water
hammer. The changeover can be from electric actuated valves external to the
pumps or by pump motor controls at the discretion of the pump manufacturer.
Pump Manufacturer should remain responsible for setting up the fire system
activation through communication between the irrigation controller and the fire
pump and landscape irrigation pumps. This will require coordination with the
irrigation software manufacturer.
The Pump Manufacturer is required to submit details for prior approval.
The pumps should have the capability of coordinating with a Development Master
SCADA system.
Any equipment over 3.75kW is to be assisted starting or a VFD. If VFD is selected
an Air Conditioned room in which to house the control panel will be required.
5.12.4 IRRIGATION SUPPLY PUMPS - PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
The irrigation pumping station for this project shall be designed and built by the
CONTRACTOR. The pumping station shall meet or be equal to the following
specifications as interpreted by the IRRIGATION CONSULTANT.
5.12.4.1.1 Pumping station Manufacturer
The irrigation pumping station to be installed on this project shall be a skid
mounted prefabricated variable frequency drive pumping unit.
5.12.4.1.2 Filter Specifications
200 Micron Filtration required after pump delivery manifold.
5.12.4.1.3 General Specifications and Options
Total Design Criteria:
Design Flow: The pumping stations shall be capable of supplying the following:
Sector 1
Description Duty Duty Comments

Flow Head
(l/s) (m)
Plot A-S6 Distribution TBA TBA based on 12hrs/day operation

Pumping Station
Fire Pumping Station TBA TBA 2 hydrants per event

at Plot A-S6 (500USGPM/hydrant)

5.12.4.1.4 Fire Protection Switch and Pump Swap Capability:

The pumping station shall be capable of receiving input from an external Fire
Protection Switch remotely located. Upon receipt of signal from the external Fire
Protection Switch the pumping station shall swap operation to the fire protection
pumping station. The Fire Protection Switch will cancel operational service valves
at the same time. The swap may be done with valves or the pumps based on the
manufacturers recommendations.
5.12.5 GENERAL
a. The prefabricated pumping station shall have a minimum capacity and

discharge pressure at skid edge as described in the technical specifications.
The overall pump length shall extend to within twelve inches of the bottom of
the wet well. The main pumps shall operate at no more than 1800 RPM.
b. The station shall be completely wired, piped, hydraulically, electrically, and flow
tested to full station capacity at factory prior to shipment to job site.
Documentation of dynamic test shall be verified by owner prior to pumping
station shipment.
c. Construction shall include a fabricated steel plate and skid assembly to support
all components during shipping and to serve as the installation mounting base.
d. The discharge manifold from the pumping station shall terminate at or near the
pumping station skid edge and be provided by the pumping station
manufacturer.
5.12.6 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS
The following information must be furnished by the contractor or manufacturer’s

representative within 10 days before bid date, to the Consultant/Engineer for
consideration as an equal brand.
i. A complete specification and submittal of all major components for the
proposed pumping station with individual pump performance verification.
ii. A detailed pumping station proposal drawing complete with component location,
sizes and dimensions specific to the installation and matching the specifications
herein.
iii. A complete electrical schematic for all high and low voltage circuits showing
breaker/ fuse sizing, wire numbering and color.
iv. Pumping station manufacturers U.L. file number for the electrical controls and
pumping station.
v. A copy of the manufacturer’s certificate of insurance in excess of US
$1,000,000.
vi. Product support technicians shall be capable of accessing all information
pertaining to the pumping equipment, e.g. electrical schematics, pump curves,
program data, bill of materials, etc. The manufacturer shall have no less then

two technicians on call seven days a week. Verify with Names, Addresses, and
Phone Numbers.
vii. The pumping station manufacturer shall provide factory authorized or factory
direct service personnel for the set, start-up, preventative maintenance and
general service of the pump system. A factory authorized or factory direct
service technician must be located within one-hundred (100) mile radius of the
project site. The pump systems technician must have a minimum of 5 years
experience. The pumping station manufacturer shall provide technical phone
support twenty-four hours a day seven days a week. Verify with Names,
Addresses, and Phone Numbers.
5.12.7 CONTROL PANEL, LOGIC AND SENSORS
5.12.7.1.1 General
The pumping station electrical controls shall be mounted in a self-containing
NEMA 4 enclosure fabricated from not less than 12 gauge steel. Door gasket seals
shall be neoprene sponge, sufficient to protect interior components from weather
and dust. The electrical panel doors shall be constructed from 12 gauge steel with
integral latches.
All external operating devices shall be dust and weatherproof. All internal
components of the enclosure shall be mounted on a removable back panel.
Mounting screws for components shall not be tapped into the enclosure wall. No
pressure gauges, pressure switches, water activated devices, or water lines of any
sort shall be installed in any electrical control panel.
An Air Conditioner type cooling system shall be included to cool the enclosure and
reject heat from the VFD. Open type cooling systems allowing outside ambient air
to enter the panel are not acceptable. No water line connections shall be
permitted inside of the control enclosure.
VFD status and internal parameters must be viewable without the opening of the
enclosure door.
The control panel shall be designed, built, tested and U.L. listed by the pumping
station manufacturer.
5.12.7.1.2 Main Disconnect
A three-pole, main station disconnect shall be contained within the NEMA 4 control
enclosure. Disconnect shall be non-fused and isolate all power to the control
enclosure. The disconnect shall have an operating handle mounted in the
enclosure door, mechanically interlocked to prevent entry while disconnect is in
ON position.
5.12.7.1.3 Motor Combination Starters- Breaker
Each motor shall be protected by a MSP combination starter and breaker. Device
will be UL 508 Type F. Motor starter protector and contactor are electrically and
mechanically linked by means of a link module and adapter plate. All starters are
suitable for use in group installation applications according to NEC-430-53(c).

5.12.7.1.4 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

The variable frequency drive shall be IGBT based with selectable carrier frequency
up to 15 KHZ. The VFD shall include terminals for incoming power, motor output
power and control terminals.
The VFD shall generate a sine-coded, variable voltage/ frequency, three phase
output for optimum speed control. The VFD shall incorporate power loss ride-
through for a minimum of 2 seconds. VFD protective features shall include current
limit, auto restart, short circuit protection, electronic motor overload protection and
ground fault protection. The VFD shall have a push button programming display for
easy access to operation parameters. The VFD shall be protected on the primary
side a breaker of the appropriate amperage. Overload capacity: 120% rated output
current for one minute. Voltage Fluctuation: +10%, -15%. Sine wave, PWM, with
full range, and automatic torque boost. Frequency Control Range: 0.5 to 500Hz.
Frequency Accuracy: Digital, 0.01Hz, Analog, .1%. Motor overload protection,
Instantaneous over current of 180% of rated output current. Over voltage at
820VDC if 460V input. Under voltage: user adjustable. Momentary Power Loss:
up to 2 second ride through. Electronic Ground Fault. LED capacitor charge
indicator. Input Phase loss alarm. Ambient temperature range of 0 to 50 degrees
C. Humidity of 95% non-condensing.
5.12.7.1.5 Solid State Soft Starter (Optional; must be called for in the Technical
Specifications)
The pumping station manufacturer shall provide electronic soft starts on all motors
as called out in the technical data sheets. The starter logic function shall be "Soft
Start" with a selectable kick start. The acceleration ramp time is DIP switch
selectable from 2 to 30 seconds. The initial torque shall be adjustable via a digital
switch with 10 settings from 5 % to 90 % of locked rotor torque. The current is
held at 150% of full load for a time. The following protections shall be provided in
the "starting" and "running" modes: Start fault, Line fault, Temperature fault, and
Stalled motor. If these conditions are detected, the soft start will not operate or will
shutdown if it is operating.
5.12.7.1.6 Control Transformer
A control transformer shall provide 120 volt power to the pumping station controls.
The control transformer shall be protected on primary and secondary sides with
appropriately sized fuses. No load other than the pump controls shall be supplied
by the control transformer.
5.12.7.1.7 Premium Lightning Arrester
Surge suppressor shall meet or exceed the following criteria: Minimum single
impulse current rating: 80,000 amperes per phase. Duty cycle testing: 2,500 10KA
impulses with less than 10% drift. Response time: <5ns. Suppressors shall consist
of solid-state components and operate bi-directionally. Minimum continuous
operating voltage of the suppressor shall be greater than 110% of the nominal
system voltage.

5.12.7.1.8 Secondary Control Circuit Breakers

Single pole secondary distribution breakers with appropriate ratings shall supply
power to each pump starter coil circuit, the control system and to other circuits as
specified.
5.12.7.1.9 Main Panel Power and Motor Phase Monitor
The incoming power and each motor shall be protected by a phase loss/low
voltage system dropout relay to de-energize the pumping station control circuit or
motor contactor if either a phase failure, phase reversal or low voltage condition
occurs. If after attempted automatic re-starts the phase failure/low voltage alarm
condition remains, the alarm must be manually reset. Individual motor overloads
will also act as phase monitors for each motor.
5.12.7.1.10 Corrosion Inhibiting Modules

Corrosion inhibiting modules shall be installed in all electrical enclosures in
accordance with the manufacture's recommendations.
5.12.7.1.11 Control Logic
The pump sequence controller shall be an industrial grade PLC with diagnostic
LEDs for monitoring of discrete inputs and outputs. Not less than two additional
analog inputs and outputs shall be standard for monitoring and control purposes.
The PLC shall contain RS232 and RS485 communication ports for monitoring and
programming purposes. The PLC shall contain an EEPROM, battery backed RAM
and non-volatile memory for storage of critical configuration data. The PLC will
have a high speed counter, clock and calendar function with year, month, day,
hour, minute, and day of week
5.12.7.1.12 Automatic Pressure Regulation Based On Variable Flow
The pumping station controls shall be capable of changing the regulated
downstream pressure while in operation, based on discharge flow or discrete input
as called out by the technical specifications. The pumping station controls shall
also be capable of up to six, user adjustable pressure regulation set points based
on discharge flow or one additional set point based on a discrete input. In addition
to adjustment of downstream pressure, the controls shall be capable of up six
pressure regulation algorithms to insure accurate pressure regulation regardless of
regulated pressure, discharge flow or connected pump combination.
5.12.7.1.13 Lead Pump Selection
Lead selection of equal horsepower pumps shall be accomplished by total
accumulated pump running time. Unless manually overridden, the pump with the
lowest accumulated running time shall be the next pump started in the sequence.
Alternating logic for selection of lead pump shall not be accepted.
5.12.7.1.14 Alarms
Controls shall shut down the pumping station in the event of the following alarm
conditions. The controls shall attempt to restart the system after alarm shutdown or
loss of power to minimize loss of irrigation. After a user adjustable number of

attempts to re-pressurize the system, the controls will go into hard shut down and
remain there until manually reset.
i. Low discharge pressure cutout. Pressure remains 20 PSI below regulate set
point for set time delay.
ii. High discharge pressure cutout. Pressure remains 11 PSI above regulate set
point for set time delay.
iii. Phase/ voltage cutout. High or low voltage, loss of phase, or phase reversal.
iv. Low intake water level cutout. Wet well or pond level remains below set point
for set time delay.
v. Starter fail cutout. Output to starter is not met with corresponding running input
for set time delay. Indicates overload, phase imbalance or control fuse.
vi. VFD fault and VFD bypass status.
5.12.7.1.15 Operator Interface
Operator interface shall be a full color STN display unit mounted in the enclosure
door. Operator interface shall be used for logical display of all pumping station
functions. The operator interface shall be NEMA 4 rated. The operator interface
shall be touch sensitive with intuitive on-screen user instruction for ease of
operator use. The use of buttons or keys or off-screen user instructions shall not
be permitted. The operator interface shall be STN colour display type with no less
than 240 x 320 pixel resolution, with viewing area measuring not less than 7.5"
diagonal. User memory for storing critical pump operation data shall not be less
than required for up to 1 year of data.
The operator interface shall allow the user to view and modify all pertinent
operation parameters. The operator interface shall incorporate password
protection for modification of critical pumping station parameters. The operator
interface capabilities shall include but are not limited to the following:
i. Overview screen showing pump system configuration. Screen shall show if each
individual pump is enable or disabled, the number of hours on each pump, station
full flow and pressure design criteria
ii. System screen with information on current regulation pressure, setpoint, regulation
pressure, System status, restarts remaining, VFD reference speed, pressure
regulation method (VFD or EBV modes) and adjust settings button. Adjust settings
button will allow changing parameters etc after entering password.
iii. Settings menu to allow changes to pressure regulation settings, pipe saver mode,
VFD manual mode, analog calibration, flow calibration, program or register settings.
iv. Flow screen will display pressure in PSI, flow in l/s and total gallons pumped in
thousands of gallons. Separate display for total gallons pumped since last reset.
v. Alarm status with time stamping, display of pumping station conditions at shutdown
and restart. Alarms will be displayed in red when activated and a separate listing
will be displayed in green when the alarm is reset. Alarms will be logged to a
compact flash disk allowing the service technician to upload data to a spreadsheet
type program.

vi. Full control of and capability of monitoring, adjusting and viewing any options
present such as water level, inlet strainer, wye strainer, filtration, chemical injection,
or liquid tank levels.
vii. Adjustment of automatic/manual pressure regulation set points.
viii. Graphing capability for up to 1 full year detailing flow rate and pressure. Graphing
function shall give option to graph and plot a point every minute. The graph
function will be selectable by day, month and year as well as the time of desired
graph. All data will be logged to a compact flash disk allowing the service
technician to upload data to a spreadsheet type program.
5.12.7.1.16 Pressure Transducer

A solid state pressure transducer shall provide a noise free, linear output
proportional to discharge pressure. Transducer shall be solid-state, strain gauge
type with integral voltage regulation and output accuracy not less than 0.25%.
Transducer shall be constructed of stainless steel and rated for the pumping
station discharge pressure called out in the technical specifications.
5.12.7.1.17 Flow Sensor
A flow sensor shall be installed providing the pumping station flow rate and total
flow through the operator interface device (OID). The flow sensor shall be a six
bladed design, which provides a low impedance signal proportional to the flow.
The accuracy shall be plus/minus 2% of actual flow rate between flow velocities of
1-30 ft/sec. A flow meter run shall be included with a minimum of 5 pipe diameters
straight run upstream and 2.5 pipe diameters downstream for proper meter
accuracy. Flow sensor model must have internal noise filtering feature. Flow
sensor wire must be encased in 1½” liquid tight conduit from sensor to enclosure.
Meter run shall be sized as shown in technical data sheet.
5.12.8 SKID ELECTRICAL
5.12.8.1.1 Skid Wiring

Skid wiring shall conform to National Electrical Code Standards. All wiring from
control panels to motors shall be in metal reinforced, water tight, flexible conduit
with copper conductors rated not less than 600 volts and of proper size to carry the
full load amperage of the motors without exceeding 70% capacity of the conductor.
Flexible conduit runs shall not exceed six feet in length. A grounding cable sized
to National Electrical Code requirements shall be included in the flexible conduit.
There shall be no splices between the motor starters and the motor connection
boxes.
Wiring to flow sensors, and pressure transducer shall be multi-conductor, shielded
cable suitable for Class II low voltage controls. Wiring to motor operated valves,
(option available for VFD stations), shall be in flexible conduit with TFFN #18
gauge copper conductors rated not less than 600 volts.
5.12.8.1.2 Junction Boxes
All off skid devices requiring control interface shall be terminated in a junction box.
This junction box shall be located at the skid edge nearest the installation point of

the off skid device. Fertigation and monitoring systems shall be terminated in a
NEMA 4 junction box located on the exterior of the main controls enclosure to
allow user connection.
5.12.9 PUMP ASSEMBLIES
5.12.9.1.1 Vertical Turbine Irrigation Pump

Bowl assembly including suction case, intermediate bowls and discharge bowls
shall be of Class 30 cast iron. The impellers shall be of stainless steel, statically
balanced. Impellers shall be adjusted vertically by means of an adjusting nut
located at the top of the driver. Each pump shaft is to be turned, ground and
polished stainless steel having a chromium content of not less than 12%. It shall
be supported by bearings above and below each impeller. The size of each shaft
shall be appropriate to transmit the horsepower required by the pump.
Each turbine pump inlet strainer shall be corrosive resistant basket type with an
area not less than four times the pump suction bell inlet area.
The discharge column pipe shall be A53 Grade B schedule 40 and furnished in
interchangeable 10' sections with threaded couplings. The line shafts shall be
ground and polished 416 stainless steel, and shall be coupled with steel couplings,
have left hand threads, which tighten during operation. Drop-in type shaft centering
spiders shall be provided at each column coupling at maximum 10' spacing. The
section of shaft passing through the stuffing box shall be stainless steel having a
chromium content of not less than 12%.
5.12.9.1.2 Discharge Head
Each pump shall be supplied with a DUCTILE IRON discharge head having a
flanged discharge opening. The top diameter of the discharge head shall match
the motor base to distribute the load uniformly. The minimum operating pressure of
each discharge head shall be no less than 30% higher than the maximum output
pressure of the pump. The DUCTILE IRON discharge head will have a tinsel
strength of 65,000 PSI.
5.12.9.1.3 Column Pipe
Column pipe should be A53, Grade B schedule 40 material, in inter-changeable
sections not more than 10 feet in length. Pump line shaft shall be AISI 416 SS.
The size of the shaft shall be no less than determined by ANSI specification B58.1,
Section 4.2, Table 4. Bearing retainers shall be bronze with rubber bearings.
5.12.9.1.4 Submersible Pressure Maintenance Pump
For the purpose of maintaining system pressure during non-irrigation periods, a
pressure maintenance pump shall be incorporated in the system. Pressure
maintenance pump shall be submersible type, constructed of stainless steel. The
pressure maintenance pump shall perform as specified by the Technical
Specifications.

5.12.10 MOTORS
5.12.10.1.1 Main Irrigation Pump Motor

Each pump driving motor shall be squirrel cage induction vertical hollow-shaft type.
The connection to the pump shaft shall be bolted-down type couplings in the
motor. The temperature rise of the motor shall be to NEMA standard MG-1-12.
Motors to be Inverter Duty, Standard Efficient with Class F installation. A thrust
bearing of ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic
thrust of the pump shall be incorporated into the motor. The bearings shall be B10
rating with average life no less than five years continuous operation. The motor
shall be of proper size to drive the pump at any point on the operation curve
without exceeding the percent of the motor horsepower nameplate rating as called
out in the Technical Specifications.
5.12.10.1.2 Main Motor Winding Condensate Heater
Each pump motor will be supplied with a 120 volt space heater in the motor
windings to prevent condensation during non-use times. The heaters will be
deactivated while the motors are running.
5.12.10.1.3 Pressure Maintenance Pump Motor
The system pressure maintenance pump shall be equipped with a 3600 RPM, high
efficiency submersible motor. The pressure maintenance pump shall perform as
specified by the Technical Specifications.
5.12.11 SKID, PIPING, VALVES, GAUGES, & MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
5.12.11.1.1 Skid Construction

Pumping station skid shall be formed from a single sheet of 3/8" steel, continuous
welded and smooth ground at all corners resulting in a seamless, one piece
structure with rounded edges and corners. Two 3" holes shall be located at each
corner of the skid, on the side wall, for the purpose of lifting the pumping station.
The skid shall be strategically reinforced underneath with structural channel iron to
support pumps, manifolds, control enclosures and periphery. The skid shall be
drilled and tapped for mounting of pumps, manifolds, tanks, relief valves and other
equipment. All tolerances shall be sufficient to permit direct bolting of pumping
station components to skid. No slotted holes shall be permitted in the pumping
station skid and no nuts or bolt heads shall be permitted on the under side of the
skid. The pumping station skid shall cover the wet well completely, without the
need for a separate wet well cover plate. The pumping station skid shall
incorporate an integral wet well access hatch measuring not less than 16 inches
by 24 inches. The access hatch door shall be both hinged and removable. For
safety purposes, the wet well hatch access handle shall not protrude above the
skid surface. The skid shall be primed and painted per enclosed specification on
both top and bottom.
5.12.11.1.2 Fabricated Piping
All fabricated piping shall conform to ASTM specifications A53 for Grade B welded
or seamless pipe. Discharge piping 8" and above shall be a minimum of Schedule
10. Discharge piping 6" and smaller shall be Schedule 40. All welded flanges shall
be forged steel slip-on or weld neck type. All welded fittings shall be seamless,
conforming to ASTM Specification A234, with pressure rating not less than 150
psi.
5.12.11.1.3 Drains
Drains are to be provided from any possible low point in the system and are to be
equipped with 3/8 A or 1/4" brass valves. Drains shall include, but are not limited
to, the following:
• Drain for each pump discharge check valve

• Drain in discharge manifold upstream of station discharge isolation valve.
• A wash down 3/4" brass hose bib on the discharge manifold, upstream of the
main station isolation valve.
5.12.11.1.4 Pump Check Valve

Pump check valves shall be bolted directly to the pump discharge heads and sized
per the technical data sheet. They shall be of the silent operating type that begins
to close as forward velocity diminishes and be fully closed at zero velocity
preventing flow reversal. Valve bodies shall be cast from ASTM-126C cast-iron or
better and shall be free from blow holes, sand holes, and other impurities. The
valve design shall incorporate a center guided, spring loaded poppet, guided at
opposite ends and having a short linear stroke that generates a flow area equal to
the pipe diameter. Internals shall be machined bronze disc, seat, and stem guide.
Valves shall be sized to permit full pump capacity to discharge through them
without exceeding a pressure drop of 2.5 PSI. Valves 4” and smaller to be
pressure rated for 250 PSI, 6” to 10” to be pressure rated to 150 PSI. Valves 12”
and larger check valves to be globe style with 150 PSI rating iron bodied with
bronze trim.
5.12.11.1.5 Isolation Valve
Each pump shall be isolated by means of a butterfly valve after the check valve
and before the discharge manifold. The discharge manifold shall also have an
isolation valve at the skid edge. Isolation valves shall be butterfly type with ten
position lever for valves 4" and smaller or gear operators for valves 5" and larger,
rated for 200 PSI WOG working pressure. Trim shall include stainless steel stem,
bronze or nickel coated iron streamlined disk with full faced resilient seat design to
eliminate need for flange gaskets.
5.12.11.1.6 Relief Valve
A pressure relief valve shall be installed on the discharge piping downstream of
the pressure regulating valves. The valve shall be sized to bypass sufficient water
back to the water source to avoid the discharge pressure from exceeding the
maximum programmed pressure set point by more than 10 PSI.

5.12.11.1.7 System Air Release

Individual pump column air shall be purged prior to entering the pumping station
discharge manifold. An air release assembly shall be located on each pump
discharge head, upstream of the pump check valve. Separation reservoirs or tanks
with air/ water balance controls shall not be accepted.
5.12.11.1.8 Pressure Gauge

A pressure gauge shall be located on the discharge manifold for the purpose of
measuring regulated, downstream pressure. Pressure gauge shall be 304
stainless steel case and bezel construction. Gauge shall be 4” diameter, liquid
filled. Pressure sensing connection shall be 1/4" NPT lower gauge connection.
5.12.12 ADDITIONAL SKID MOUNTED AND CONTROL INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT
5.12.12.1.1 Power line conditioner (3 KVA as called for in the Technical Specification)
The pumping station manufacturer shall supply a 120 volt, single phase regulated
power conditioner pre-wired inside a separate NEMA 4 ventilated enclosure
mounted on the pumping station rated for the KVA and breakers as called out on
the technical data sheets. The input voltage range will be +10%/-20% of input
nominal voltage. The output voltage regulation will be + or - 3% for an input line
variation of +10%/-20%. The harmonic distortion shall not be less than 3% total
RMS content at full load. The input/output surge suppression module shall easily
attenuate and absorb repeated 6,000 volt or larger spikes without damage while
protecting the load. The power conditioner shall distribute its power to a circuit
breaker distribution panel to allow the end user a connection point to the
conditioned power.
5.12.12.1.2 Inside Panel Lighting Package (Standard)
The pumping station manufacturer shall provide within their control panel,
fluorescent internal lighting that is switch activated when the control panel door is
open. The light fixture should be mounted on the top of the enclosure and should
be capable of illuminating the entire inside of the enclosure.
5.12.12.1.3 Electronic Butterfly Valve Back-Up Pressure Regulation on Main Pumps Only
Pumping station manufacturer shall provide an automatic by-pass back-up mode
for constant pressure regulation in the event of VFD failure. The back-up mode
shall automatically function on the fly during an event of a VFD failure, without loss
of irrigation. The VFD back–up mode must provide constant pressure at variable
flow without causing line surge. Utilizing the pressure relief valve is not an
acceptable automatic back up mode due to its inability to provide surge free
constant pressure regulation at variable flow demand. The automatic VFD by-
pass mode shall be either controlled hydraulically through a pressure-regulating
valve per pump or EBV (electronic butterfly valve(s).
The pumping station discharge pressure shall be regulated to provide surge-free
constant pressure as programmed via the control panel operator interface.
Discharge pressure shall be regulated by an Electronic Butterfly Valve, consisting
of the following:
• Gradual entry of water from the EBV pump into the discharge manifold to allow
for complete purging of pump column air and elimination of surges.
• Maintain programmed downstream pressure regardless of discharge flow.
• Up to six, user adjustable PID control settings to ensure accurate pressure
regulation at all flows, programmed pressure, or connected pump combination.
• Adjustable pressure ramp-up and ramp-down to assure surge free pressure
regulation.
• After a drop in pressure, gradually increase system pressure over a user
adjustable period of time to eliminate surging.
• Rate of change of pressure control to anticipate and eliminate rapid pressure
changes caused by changing system demand.
Adjustment of regulated downstream pressure shall be accomplished though the
control panel operator interface. Individual pressure regulating valves shall be
butterfly type with electric motor gear actuation. The maximum allowable pressure
drop across the butterfly valve at full pump capacity shall not exceed one PSI. The
Butterfly Valve shall be rated for not less than 285 PSI.
5.12.12.1.4 Filtration System (200 Micron Screen)

The pumping station shall be equipped with a filtration system to assure a clean
water supply to the irrigation system. The filtration shall consist of individual
barrels containing removable filter elements. The number of barrels, the specific
filter model number and filter screen micron rating shall be called out in the
technical specification. Each removable filter element shall consist of a course
screen in series with a fine screen. The fine screen shall be flushed periodically to
remove accumulated debris.
Flushing initiation shall be a timed interval, user adjustable, and a pressure drop
across the screen, also user adjustable. Flushing control shall be governed by the
pumping station PLC. Separate flushing controls shall not be accepted.
Flushing action shall be initiated by an electronically actuated butterfly valve. The
Electric Butterfly Valve (EBV) is impervious to dirty water vs. a hydraulic
diaphragm valve susceptible to damage due to the filtered particles being flushed.
Using a hydraulic diaphragm valve as the filter flush valve is not acceptable. To
assure tolerance to dirty water, electric butterfly valve shall open/close at a
programmed rate to eliminate excessive pressure drop or pressure spike.
Operation: Water shall flow into the 316 stainless steel filter body and through the
316 stainless steel filtering screen from the inside out allowing blocked
contaminates to accumulate on the inside surface of the filtering screen.
Differential pressure across the filtering screen shall be continuously monitored as
the filter cake builds on the inside of the filtering screen. The differential pressure
across screen shall be monitored using a pressure transducer upstream and
downstream of the filter assembly. Using a differential pressure switch is not
acceptable. The pumping station control logic shall have the capability of
graphically tracking the pressure across the filter for troubleshooting purpose
locally at the pumping station through the touch screen operator interface device

and through the remote monitoring and control software. When the differential
pressure reaches an adjustable threshold (recommended at 7 psi) a flush cycle
shall be initiated by the opening of the electric butterfly valve. The opening of the
flush valve drops the pressure inside the drive chamber allowing flow to reverse
through the suction scanner nozzles. The suction scanner nozzles transfer this
reduced pressure at the nozzle location onto the inside of the filtering screen
surface. This reduced pressure on the inside of the filtering screen creates a
reversed flow through the filtering screen, pulling the containments off the screen,
back through the suction scanner nozzles and out the flush valve. Once the
nozzles have traversed and cleaned the entire screen surface, the flush valve shall
close stopping the flush cycle.
The drive mechanism of the filter shall not consist of electric motor, or limit
switches to return the drive mechanism to its start position. The drive mechanism
shall allow the suction scanner nozzles to traverse across the screen and return to
their start position, and if required, to continue this cycle indefinitely without
interrupting the flush flow. A hydraulic motor directly attached to the suction
scanner shall drive the suction scanner.
The filter screen element shall be 316 stainless steel with micron opening size
called out for in the technical specification. The filter housing and cover shall be
manufactured from 316 stainless steel and shall be manufactured to ASME
standards but not stamped unless called for in the technical specification
5.12.13 ADDITIONAL SHIP LOOSE INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT
5.12.13.1.1 Discharge Drop Pipe (As called for in the Technical Specification)
The pumping station manufacturer shall supply the discharge drop pipe, with
vertical swivel connection, for connection to the irrigation main line. The pipe will
be of Schedule 40 steel, painted to match the pumping station and sized for depth
and termination based on the irrigation contractors requirements or as shown on
the bid documents.
5.12.14 CONSTRUCTION
Construction shall be of modular form utilizing a steel base structurally adequate to

support pumps, piping, tanks, and electrical equipment as a single integral
assembly. All nuts, bolts, washers, and fasteners shall be zinc or cadmium plated
for corrosion resistance.
5.12.15 PAINTING
Painting of the entire unit shall consist of a multi-step coating system including
metal preparation, a rust prohibitive epoxy prime coat and a two part ultraviolet
insensitive polyurethane finish having a total dry film thickness of not less than 5
mils. Each coat will be applied and baked for one half hour at 165 degrees F. All
pumping station components including skid, manifolds, isolation and relief valves,
grooved clamps and supports shall be painted medium green. All electrical
enclosures and accessory panels and tanks shall be appliance white.

5.12.16 TESTING
The pumping station manufacturer shall conduct and document a complete factory
dynamic test of the pumping station prior to shipment. Pumping station shall be
tested throughout the entire operating range at the net discharge pressure called
for in the technical specifications. Individual pump pressure, flow, RPMs, volts,
amps, KW and power factor shall be documented for verification by the consulting
engineer or owners' representative prior to delivery upon request.
5.12.17 ON-SITE PUMPING STATION OFF LOADING & SETTING
Off-loading & setting of the pumping station is the responsibility of the contractor,
unless specifically called out elsewhere in the specification. Crane to off-load and
set the pumping station on the concrete slab is to be provided by contractor or
owner.
5.12.18 ON-SITE PUMPING STATION START UP
Technical start up shall be furnished by the pumping station manufacturer or a

qualified, Watertronics certified service agency. Location and mounting details
shall be furnished by the pumping station manufacturer. Electrical connection, by
purchaser, shall consist of a single conduit from owners disconnect to the pumping
station main disconnect. Additional purchaser responsibility shall include
confirming correct motor rotation and securing local inspection/approval.
Technical start up procedures by the pumping station technician shall include the
following:
• Station start up and pressurization.

• Pressure, flow and programming adjustments.
• Monitoring of complete operational cycle when possible.
• Customer training and presentation of owner’s manual.
5.12.19 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrant the pumping station to be free of defects and
product malfunctions for a period of one year from date of start-up or fifteen
months after shipment, whichever occurs first. Failures caused by, lighting strikes,
power surges, vandalism, flooding, operator abuse, or acts of God are excluded
from warranty coverage. All warranties implied or otherwise shall not exceed those
warranties extended by major or sub-component suppliers.
5.12.20 SITE PREPARATION DRAWINGS
Site preparation drawings shall be furnished by the manufacturer within two weeks
after receipt of order. Drawings shall indicate pumping station alignment,
discharge piping size, and electrical services required from local contractor. The
owner shall return one set of drawings marked approved or corrected within one
week of receipt.

5.12.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished at time of start-up and

initial training. Owner will also receive training specific to this station as specified.

5.13 FIRE PROTECTION SUPPLY PUMPING STATIONS

The irrigation pumping station for this project shall be supplied and installed by the
CONTRACTOR. The pumping station shall meet or be equal to the following
specifications as interpreted by the IRRIGATION CONSULTANT.
5.13.1 Basic Specifications
The irrigation pumping station to be installed on this project shall be a skid

mounted prefabricated variable frequency drive pumping unit.
No Filtration required.
5.13.2 Contractor Responsibility
The CONTRACTOR shall set the pumping station, install and thrust block the
discharge Z-piping (provided by pumping station manufacturer) and connect all
irrigation piping.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide electric service (415 volt with meter and
disconnect), ventilation equipment and 220 V.A.C. distribution equipment
(including conduit, fixtures, lighting fixtures, etc.) for pump house lighting and
equipment (exclusive of the pumping station proper).
5.13.3 Pumping station General Specifications and Options
Total Design Criteria:

Design Flow: Refer to section 5.12.4.3
5.13.4 Fire Protection Switch and Pump Swap Capability:
The pumping station shall be capable of receiving input from an external Fire
Protection Switch remotely located. Upon receipt of signal from the external Fire
Protection Switch the pumping station shall swap operation to the fire protection
pumping station from the Landscape Pump. The Fire Protection Switch will cancel
all villa tank fill valves and landscape irrigation at the same time. The swap may
be done with valves or the pumps based on the manufacturers recommendations.
Fire Pumps are required by code NFPA 20 – 1 electrical duty pump, and 1 diesel
standby pump.
5.13.4.1.1 Freight:
Freight to project site to be included in pumping system price.
5.13.5 Start-up and Calibration:
Start-up and calibration by factory authorized personnel to be provided by the

MANUFACTURER.

5.13.6 Pumping station Discharge Drop Pipe and Adapter
The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install pumping station drop pipe to bring
top of pipe to 900mm (36”) below grade. The pumping station manufacturer shall
supply the steel discharge drop pipes, with vertical victaulic swivel connection, for
connection to the irrigation main line. There shall be a (1) 2” blow out port with plug
will be welded onto the drop pipe.

6 PRIMARY IRRIGATION
6.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
6.1.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to specify the criteria for design and construction
of the irrigation supply to the Private and Public irrigation systems on the Durrat
Marina Phase 1 Development. These criteria are to allow the design, installation,
maintenance and management of the supply system to be carried out in a way that
saves water and protects water quality.
The contractor shall ensure that the following criteria are met:
• Assure Overall Quality of the Network System;

• The system is to be designed for the efficient and uniform distribution of
irrigation water;
• The system shall meet the design supply criteria;
• Design and build the system for optimum performance;
• The system is flexible for responding to the changing requirement for water in
the landscape;
• The system is sustainable by allowing for improvement through adoption of new
technology and knowledge;
• The network is economically feasible in installation and use.
The system is required to distribute irrigation water (treated sewage effluent (TSE))
in a way that adequately provides for the daily demands in each development plot
and within public areas of the Phase 1 development.
Specific criteria that shall be considered in the design include the availability of
TSE and the demands of both Development Plots and Public Areas for irrigation
water.
To conserve and protect water resources, the Contractor shall propose appropriate
equipment components that meet Bahrain code requirements and site
requirements.
6.1.2 DESIGN
6.1.2.1.1 General
The system shall be designed in such a way as to be economical, practical and
sustainable for maintaining the individual daily landscape area demands, across
the seasons and as planting matures. The Contractor shall employ a properly
qualified Engineer to carry out the design and production of working drawings who
has experience of such schemes in the Middle East Region.

6.1.2.1.2 Design Criteria

The design will be based on direct knowledge of site conditions and shall comply
with the site criteria.
The design shall meet all applicable Bahrain codes as well as the rest of the
contract specifications including plumbing and electrical codes.
The contractor shall specify manufacturer, model, type, and size of all components
to eliminate ambiguity at construction and to facilitate management of the system.
The selection of pipe, electrical wire and other materials shall be based on design
parameters, environmental conditions and code requirements.
Design of the supply network will minimize installation and maintenance difficulties.
The contractor shall provide a complete design package that meets with the
approval of the Engineer and accommodates the site levels.
The system shall be designed to supply TSE from the Durrat Marina TSE storage
tank. One tank of live capacity 600m3 shall be located at Plot A-S6, adjacent to the
temporary package type STP and will cover Phase 1. An optimum supply schedule
shall be worked out so that the volume of the available resource is matched to the
demand of each development plot and public area.
The contractor shall select main and lateral pipe sizes so that the velocity of water
moving through the system does not exceed the industry standard of 1.5 m/s.
The design will specify pressure regulation where variable or excessive static
pressure may exist.
The design will specify the recommended operating (working) pressure at the
maximum design flow rate of the system.
The system controller shall have multi-program capability and run time
adjustments in one-minute increments.
6.1.3 INSTALLATION
6.1.3.1.1 Installation Criteria

To ensure that the irrigation system is installed to efficiently and uniformly
distribute the water, and to conserve and protect water resources, the contractor
shall:
Prior to beginning installation, verify that the point of supply, flow rate, and static
and dynamic pressures meet the design criteria.
Install the supply system according to the design specifications approved by the
Engineer and manufacturer's published performance standards.
Furnish an “as-built” record set of drawings for the Client. Within the record set of
drawings, describe the system layout and components including all changes from
the original design.
Test the supply system to verify that it meets the design criteria.

Provide the Client with details of the location and operation of the pumps,
controller, valves, sensors, and pressure regulators.
Provide the Client with product warranties and operating instructions for all
equipment.
6.1.3.1.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
A complete set of Provisional Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be
handed over to the Engineer at least one month before any commissioning tests
commence. The manuals will be checked by the Engineer and returned to the
Contractor with comments. The Contractor shall make the necessary changes and
amendments to the manuals to incorporate the Engineer's comments in the
manuals.
After the Engineer has approved the Operation and Maintenance Manuals, four
sets of the manuals shall be provided by the Contractor for distribution by the
Engineer.
The manuals shall include, as a minimum:
• Detailed description and maintenance requirements of all elements in the

network;
• As-built drawings;
• Supply schedules;
• Health and safety instructions.
6.1.4 SUPERVISION
The Engineer assumes no responsibility in the supervision and inspection of the

execution of the contract beyond ensuring that the plans and specifications are
being properly interpreted. This supervision and checking will not relieve the
contractor of any responsibility for the performance of his work in accordance with
the plans and specifications.
6.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM

6.2.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
The water for landscape irrigation in the Durrat Marina Phase 1 Development shall
be obtained from the effluent from the site temporary Sewage Treatment Plant
located in Plot A-S6.
Irrigation Water will be distributed through a network that generally follows the road
network and is indicated on the relevant site drawings. The total peak summer
daily demand for Phase 1 irrigation water is estimated to be approximately 250
m3. A compartmentalized TSE storage tank of 250m3 live capacity and 500m3
dead capacity, for fire fighting will be located adjacent to the STP in Plot A-S6.
These totals may be subject to adjustment.

Irrigation water supply to Phase 1 will be approximately 250m3 per day. A

pumping station will be required at the storage tank to distribute irrigation water to
individual 1-day storage tanks in development plots during daytime and to public
area landscaped areas at night. A further pumping station will be required to
provide irrigation water to the fire hydrants at the required pressure.
Each pumping station will have duty, duty assist and standby pumps as necessary
to provide the required flow rate that will satisfy the overall demands on the
systems.
Solenoid valves will be provided at each supply point, controlled from the relevant
pump station to provide supply in accordance with the designed demand loading
and duration. The solenoid valve controller will be located in each pumphouse.
The connections to be provided at each development plot boundary, both private
and public shall consist of a solenoid valve chamber with water meter as shown in
the typical detail drawings.
6.2.2 PUMPING STATION
A pumping station will be required to deliver flows to the Phase 1 irrigation network
and a further pumping station to provide irrigation water to the fire hydrants from
the dead storage tank. The stations shall comprise, as a minimum:
• Suitable pumps to operate on a duty/assist basis and to provide standby

support. Access and equipment for lifting will be required for general
maintenance and inspections.
• Gate and butterfly valves, gauges, filters, non-return valves, water meter, air
vent, couplings, pipe fittings and all associated elements.
• Electronic equipment for control of the irrigation solenoid valves.
• Interconnecting pipework and fittings between the TSE storage tank and the
pumps.
• Interconnecting pipework to the distribution system.
6.2.3 MATERIALS
6.2.3.1.1 General
All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new.
Irrigation solenoid valves, and automatic controller shall be made by the same
manufacturer and shall each have a two-year product manufacturer warranty.
All products listed must be installed to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Any product submitted as an equal must be approved by the Engineer.
6.2.3.1.2 Pipes and Fittings
The irrigation distribution pipes and fittings will be made of uPVC, GRP or
polyethylene (PE) to the following standards, or latest equivalents:

1. BS EN 1452-4:2000. Plastic piping systems for water supply - Unplasticized

PVC pressure pipes;
2. BS EN 1456-1:2001: Plastic piping systems for buried and above ground
drainage water supply - Unplasticized PVC pressure pipes;
3. BS 4346: Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes;
4. BS EN ISO 9002:1994: Quality assurance in production and installation;
5. BS 6209: Solvent cement for thermoplastic pipe systems;
6. BS 6730:1986 – Specification for black polyethylene pipes…..
7. BS EN 12201-1:2003: Plastic piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene
(PE) General;
8. BS EN 12201-2:2003: Plastic piping systems for water supply – Polyethylene
(PE) Pipes:
9. BS EN 12201-4:2001: Plastic piping systems for water supply – Polyethylene
(PE) Valves:
10. BS 7159:1989: Design and construction of glass reinforced plastics (GRP)
piping systems for individual plants or sites:
11. BS 5480:1990: Specification for glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes, joints
and fittings for use for water supply or sewerage:
All elements shall meet the designated requirements for standards, materials,
manufacture, strength, length and dimension of tolerances joints, workmanship
and finish, inspection and basis of acceptance and all pipes and fittings shall be
permanently marked with manufacturer's name, material, size and schedule or
type and standard.
The contractor shall ensure that plastic pipes are not subject to deterioration due
to exposure to sunlight between manufacture and installation in the ground.
Soft spots below the bottom of an excavation shall be removed as directed by the
engineer and the resulting void backfilled with granular material to the approval of
the engineer. Any additional excavation below the bottom of the line required shall
be made good with granular material.
The pipes shall be laid at the designated levels and gradients. The deviation in
level from that designated at any point shall not exceed 20 mm unless agreed
otherwise by the engineer. Pipes shall be laid so that each one is in contact with
the bed throughout the length of its barrel.
Pipes and fittings shall be examined for damage and shall be cleaned immediately
before laying. Any pipes that are damaged shall not be used in the works.
All components (flush valves, air / vacuum relief valves, pressure regulating
valves, filters, check valves, system operation indicator, and fittings) shall be
installed in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications.

6.2.3.1.3 Fire Hydrants

Fire hydrants shall be SRI and meet all the requirements of the Kingdom of
Bahrain.
Fire hydrants shall be installed as located in the irrigation network drawings and
meet the requirements of the Civil Defence Directorate, Kingdom of Bahrain. The
final locations of the hydrants shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
installation.
6.2.3.1.4 Electric Solenoid Valves
Electric Solenoid Valves used in the electrically controlled automatic system shall
be a globe / angle configuration with female pipe thread inlet and outlet, suitable
for the design duty and capable of working with chlorinated treated effluent. Valves
shall have a manual flow control, and external and internal bleed to manually turn
them on, type Rainbird PESB-R series, or similar.
Valve size and location shall match the design demand flow and shall be shown on
the design drawings.
6.2.3.1.5 Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be plastic rectangular or round boxes with purple coloured
cover, suitably sized for the contained equipment. Any electric valve, manual
valve, major wire splice, or future expansion wires shall be installed inside a
suitable box installed to match local finished grade level, with gravel drainage.
6.2.3.1.6 Communication Circuitry
Electric control wires shall be #14 gauge single strand wire. Electric control wire
shall be direct bury wire manufactured for irrigation system use.
Wire type and location to be detailed on design drawings and produced in a
separate Wiring Schedule.
6.2.3.1.7 Automatic Controller
Automatic controller shall be provided with sufficient stations to match the design
with plastic or non-corrosive metal cabinet, 365 day clock / calendar, 0 to 10 hour
station run times per station in one minute increments, seasonal adjustment from 0
to 200% in 10% increments.
Controller type and location to be detailed on design drawings together with a
supply schedule covering all solenoid valves.
6.2.3.1.8 Quick Coupling Valves
Quick coupling valves, where deemed necessary, shall be 1" threaded with 1” key
opening, standard cover series.
6.2.3.1.9 Manual Valves
Manual valves shall be bronze gate type set in a valve box below grade level.
Manual valves shall be sized according to the line size they are being installed on.

Sufficient manual valves shall be provided to ensure sections of main can be

isolated for maintenance without affecting the normal distribution system.
6.3 INSTALLATION
6.3.1 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary information regarding the
exact location of existing underground structures and utilities and shall mark their
location, at the site.
The Contractor shall be liable for the damages to and the cost of repairing or
replacing any buried conduit, cables or piping encountered during the installation
of the work.
6.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
Contractor shall do all necessary excavation required for the proper installation of
his work and store suitable material for reuse as backfill. When backfilling, all
backfill material shall be free from rock, large stone or other unsuitable substances
that could cause damage to the pipes and cables.
Backfilling of trenches containing plastic piping shall be done when pipe is cool to
avoid excessive contraction. All backfill material shall be compacted in 150mm
layers to grade to ensure that no settling results.
6.3.3 PIPES
All main line pipe (pipe constantly under pressure) shall be installed with a
minimum depth of 1 metre cover.
Piping shall be capped and secured by partial backfilling at the end of each
working day to prevent entrance of foreign material and damage of pipe. All Piping
shall be flushed of construction material and pressure tested to 1.5 times working
pressure before final backfilling.
6.3.4 CONTROL WIRE
Irrigation control wire shall be installed in the same trench as the main line piping.
At each electric solenoid valve connection minimum 1 metre of slack wire shall be
provided to facilitate future maintenance. All wire splices shall be located within a
valve box, or in a separate box.
All underground splices shall be waterproofed with the wire connectors and fixed in
a Direct Burial Splice Kit.
6.3.5 SLEEVING
Pipe and wire crossing under roads, walkways, permanent fixtures, etc. shall be
enclosed in PVC sleeving. Sleeving depth shall be a minimum of 1.0m under
curbs, roadways and pathways. Sleeves shall be sized at twice the diameter of the
main being sleeved.
All sleeves shall extend beyond the edge of paving or construction by 300mm
minimum. Locations of all sleeves shall be clearly marked as agreed by the
Engineer.
6.3.6 IRRIGATION WATER SUPPLY
The water supply for the Irrigation system is treated sewage effluent that will be
stored on site at the location shown on the drawings and as described in Section
6.2.2. The Contractor should ensure that his workforce is aware of the quality of
this water and is at all times protected from adverse health impacts due to
handling it. At no time should this water be drunk.
6.3.7 IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTROLLER
The irrigation system controller shall be mounted in appropriated location as

shown on plans.
The controller shall be wired direct in conduit with a manual on/off switch mounted
under the controller.
6.3.8 ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALVES
The electric solenoid valves shall be installed in either the globe or angle position,
and installed in valve boxes of sufficient size to allow easy access for maintenance
without excavation around or under the valve.
All wire splices must use an approved watertight splice, such as DBY epoxy pack.
6.3.9 VALVE BOXES
All valve boxes shall be supported in the ground by using paver style bricks in
every corner or side. Sufficient clearance must be provided between valve box
cover and the automatic valve to prevent damage if the valve box is driven over.
Wooden supports of any kind are not acceptable.
6.3.10 IMPROPERLY OPERATING OR LOCATED EQUIPMENT
Any equipment that fails to operate properly and/or is located incorrectly shall be
promptly corrected or relocated at the Contractor's expense.
If the Contractor wishes to make any field changes, he must receive written
permission from the Engineer, before the change.
6.3.11 THRUST BLOCKS
Thrust blocks are to be provided at all changes in size or direction of mainline

piping. Elbows, reducers, plugs, and the opposite side of tee branches all require

thrust blocks. Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed by pouring concrete

between the fitting and the undisturbed bearing wall of the trench.

7 SECONDARY/ TERTIARY IRRIGATION

8 ELECTRICAL AND STREET LIGHTING

8.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
8.1.1 Scope of Electrical Works
The electrical infrastructure works shall comprise the supply, delivery, installation,
erection, pre-commissioning and commissioning of the plant and equipment
detailed in these specifications and specification drawings. The equipment
provided shall be in a new and unused condition and shall comply with all
applicable codes and standards. All equipment required to form a complete
installation shall be provided whether specifically mentioned or not.
The work covered under the electrical infrastructure scope of works shall include,
but not be limited to the following:
(a) The construction of all 11/0.4 kV distribution substations and intake substation
buildings as shown in the specification drawings, including all fittings and fixtures
and in accordance with MoW and EDD requirements.
(b) Supply, install, test, pre-commission and commission all 11 kV switchgear,
comprising circuit breaker panels and ring main units (RMU) as shown in the
specification drawings.
(c) Supply, install, test pre-commission and commission all 11/0.4 kV distribution
transformers as shown in the specification drawings.
(d) Supply, install, test, pre-commission and commission all LV distribution boards.
(e) Supply, installation and testing of the complete earthing system as per EDD
Regulations and in accordance with BS 7430: 1998
(f) Supply, install, test and commission the lighting and small power installation for
each substation building, as shown in the specification drawings.
(g) Supply, install, test and commission all 11 kV cables, as shown in the
specification drawings and as required for complete installation.
(h) Supply, install, test and commission all LV cables as shown in the specification
drawings and described in these specifications.
(i) Supply, joint, install and pot end the LV service cables from the LV distributors
to the Service entry point of each plot as detailed on the specification drawings
(j) Provide the power supply to all distribution pillars required for outdoor lighting
and small power, as shown on the drawings and as described in these
specifications.
(k) Supply, install, test and commission the complete street lighting system.
(l) Supply, install, connect, test and commission the complete outdoor lighting
sub-distribution system between the outdoor lighting distribution pillars and the
individual lighting fixtures and small power equipment, as shown on the
architectural drawings and as described in these specifications.

(m) Co-ordination with EDD, PSD, other service providers and statutory authorities
to carry out the installation of services in the services corridor as shown on the
drawings.
(n) Co-ordinate with the PSS contractor to ensure delivery of service according to
the phasing plan and/or clients requirements.
(o) Provide necessary cable ducts for road crossings of cables and future
services.
(p) Preparation of working drawings.
(q) Preparation of As Built Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
(r) Testing pre-commissioning and commissioning of the entire electrical system
(s) Provide handover files for each substation, feeder pillar to the relevant
authorities including but not limited to materials approvals certificates, type test
certificates, routine test certificates as built drawings, schedule of guarantees,
commissioning reports and results
(t) Instruction to EDD or the client’s staff in the operation and maintenance of the
electrical equipment.
8.1.2 EDD List of Approved and Pre-qualified Manufacturers
Only equipment from manufacturers who appear on EDD’s latest list of approved
or pre-qualified manufacturers shall be eligible for this contract.
8.1.3 Standards
The standards applicable to this contract shall be the latest version of the MoW &
EDD specifications, their amendments and the latest international standards
referred to therein, at the date of tender submission.
8.1.4 Environmental and Service Conditions
The environmental and service conditions shall be those stated in the relevant
EDD specifications.
All electrical apparatus and equipment shall be suitable for the environmental
conditions in Bahrain and shall be designed for long and continuous operation
without any mal-operation or deleterious effects.
8.1.5 System Details
The 11 kV and 400 V system details are those stated in the relevant EDD
specifications.
8.1.6 Drawings and Technical Data to be provided with the Tender
The Contractor shall submit with his tender the drawings and technical data as
specified in the EDD specifications for each item of plant or equipment.

The Contractor shall complete and submit with the tender two copies of the
“Schedule of Guarantee” for each item of equipment in the same format as
provided in the EDD electrical equipment specifications referred to in these
specifications.
8.1.7 Tests During Manufacture
All electrical equipment shall be subjected to the special and type tests and routine
tests at the manufacturers’ works as specified in the relevant EDD specifications.
Two copies of all factory test certificates shall be submitted as soon as possible
after completion of tests, but not later than the date of shipping, for the
Employer/Engineers records.
8.1.8 Operation and Maintenance Instructions
A complete set of operation, assembly and maintenance instructions shall be

provided with the tender.
Two copies of the operation, assembly and maintenance instructions suitably
bound shall be handed over at least one month before installation of the electrical
equipment.
8.1.9 Spare Parts
A list of the Contractor’s recommended spare parts and their prices shall be submitted
with the tender. The client shall have the option to purchase the recommended spares at
the prices detailed in the spare parts list for a period of one year from contract award.
8.1.10 EDD List of Accredited Contractors
For 11 kV and LV electrical distribution works, only contractors approved by the

Electricity Distribution Directorate and appearing on the Directorates approved list
of contractors shall be employed for this work.
All contractors shall be licensed and registered with the Directorate.
8.1.11 Installation
Detailed as built cable installation drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor

which shall show the position of 11 kV, LV and service cables in relation to other
services, roads, plot boundaries, etc. The main 11 kV and LV cables shall run in
service corridors designated by the Engineer and as shown on the specification
drawings.
LV and service cables to individual buildings will generally be laid up to plot
boundaries where the cables will be terminated and capped at the designated
service entry point. However, in some cases as directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor may also be required to lay and connect the LV/service cable to the
building service cut-out. LV and service cables supplying feeder pillars and
miscellaneous items such as pumping stations and telecoms equipment shall be

installed and terminated at the service cut-out within the associated cabinet or
building. In the event of the item of plant not being ready the cable shall be
terminated at a point as directed by the engineer.
The Contractor’s rate for cable laying shall be deemed to include all excavation,
cable ducts, backfill, joint kits, cable identification tape, markers and reinstatement.
The Contractor will be deemed to have checked the soil conditions at site and will
not be entitled to additional costs for excavation in different soil conditions. It is
incumbent on the contractor to ensure the type and quality of cable trench backfill
material is in accordance with EDD requirements.
11 kV, low voltage, service and outdoor lighting sub-distribution cables shall be
installed prior to final pavement and landscaping works. The contractor is expected
to liaise with the civil works and landscaping sub-contractors to ensure there is no
conflict in the cable laying works and pavement/landscaping works. Access shall
be co-ordinated between the contractors.
Only cable jointers registered with and licensed by EDD shall be employed for
cable jointing works.
All works are to be carried out under the supervision of an EDD inspector. The
Contractor is required to liaise with EDD to determine inspection requirements
prior to proceeding with any other related works.
8.1.12 Testing and Commissioning
Once the electrical installation works has been verified as being complete and
ready for testing, by the Engineer and the Electricity Distribution Directorate, the
Contractor shall proceed with the testing, pre-commissioning and commissioning
of the electrical equipment.
The electrical equipment shall be subject to the tests specified in the relevant EDD
specifications. The Engineer and EDD representatives shall witness all tests.
The Contractor shall provide skilled personnel and all necessary temporary test
equipment for the testing of all electrical equipment at site.
Three months before commencement of commissioning tests, the Contractor shall
submit a testing, pre-commissioning and commissioning programme, test
procedures and pro-forma sheets for recording test results, in three copies. The
documents shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer. After approval by the
Engineer and no later than one month before the commencement of testing and
commissioning, two sets of the final programme and documents shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer in writing, advance warning of at least
one month, of his intention to commence final testing and commissioning.
The results of all tests shall be recorded on test protocols and shall be signed by
the Contractor, Engineer and EDD representative.

8.1.13 Maintenance Period
The maintenance period shall be 12 months from the date of issue of the
completion certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the rectification of any defects, at his own
cost, which arise during the erection and maintenance periods.
8.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

8.2.1 Substation Civil Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of the substation buildings
shown in the specification drawings. Where discrepancies occur between the
specification drawings and EDD standard drawings the contractor shall inform the
engineer in writing
All substations shall be constructed in accordance with the specification drawings
and the technical requirements specified in the drawing notes.
The Contractor is responsible for obtaining EDD Civil Works Department approval
prior to construction commencement. Intermediate approval requirements shall be
at the discretion of EDD. It is the Contractors responsibility to liaise with EDD to
acquire these approval milestones
8.2.2 Distribution Transformers
8.2.2.1.1 Scope of Supply

The Contractor shall be responsible for the manufacture, factory inspection,
supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following distribution
transformers, including all electrical equipment and accessories as specified in the
applicable MoW & EDD specification:
(a) 11/0.4 kV silicon liquid filled ground mounted transformers in accordance
with the specification drawings
8.2.2.1.2 Applicable EDD Standard Specification
The 11 kV distribution transformers and their accessories shall comply with the
following EDD Standard Specification:
Description S-4052D 11/0.4 kV Distribution Transformer, Silicone Liquid Filled
8.2.2.1.3 Particular Requirements

The transformers shall conform to the latest version of EDD standards and all
international standards referred to therein.
11/0.4 kV silicon liquid filled ground mounted transformers shall be provided in the
following standard ratings:
• 500 kVA
• 1,000 kVA
• 1,500 kVA
The transformers shall be provided with the fittings and attachments as detailed in
the above EDD specification.
Quality assurance and tests during manufacture shall conform to MoW & EDD
specifications and requirements.
The following documentation shall be submitted as a minimum as an when
required by EDD or the Engineer. It is the Contractors obligation to provide all
documentation requested by EDD relating to materials certificates and approvals.
All certificates and test results are to form part of the handover package for each
substation
• Type test certificates

• Routine test certificates
• Schedule of guarantees
• Materials approval certificate.
8.2.3 11 kV Ring Main Unit (RMU)

supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following 11 kV ring main
units, including all electrical equipment and accessories as specified in the
applicable MoW & EDD specification:
(a) Single-transformer and two-transformer ring main units (RMU) as shown in the
specification drawings.

The 11 kV circuit breakers panels and their accessories shall comply with the
following EDD Standard Specification:
Description S-4035J 11 kV Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Ring Main Switchgear

The supply shall include all equipment and accessories as detailed in the EDD
specification.
The ring main units, equipment and accessories shall comply in all respects with
the MoW & EDD Specification and the international specifications referred to
therein.
The following documentation shall be submitted as a minimum as and when
required by EDD or the Engineer. It is the Contractors obligation to provide all

substation

8.2.4 Low Voltage Distribution Boards

The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design, manufacture, factory
inspection, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following LV
Distribution Boards, including all electrical equipment and accessories as specified
in the applicable MoW & EDD specifications:
(a) Wall to floor mounting fuse board units having seven or ten outgoing ways, at
each substation as shown on the specification
The low voltage distribution boards and their accessories shall comply with the
following EDD Standard Specifications:
Description S-4083D LV (1kV) 7-Way Distribution Fuse Board & Cabinet
Description TBA LV (1kV) 10-Way Distribution Fuse Board & Cabinet

The LV distribution fuse boards and accessories shall comply in all respects with
the MoW & EDD Specification and the international specifications referred to
therein.
required by EDD or the Engineer. It is the Contractor’s obligation to provide all
substation


8.2.5 11 kV Cables

supply, installation, termination, cable jointing, testing and commissioning of all 11
kV power cables for the 11 kV distribution system as shown on the specification
drawings. The scope of supply shall include the following 11 kV power cables and
accessories:
(a) Three-core 300 mm2 6.35 / 11 kV copper XLPE/SWA/PVC, individual core
copper screened, power cables to be installed between the distribution ring
main units up to the 11 kV circuit breakers at the EWA primary substation.
(b) Three-core 300 mm2 6.35 / 11 kV aluminium XLPE/SWA/PVC, individual
core aluminium screened, power cables to be installed between distribution
substation ring main units
(c) Three-core 70 mm2 6.35 / 11 kV copper XLPE/SWA/PVC, individual core
copper screened, power cables to be installed between the distribution
substation ring main unit transformer circuit breaker and associated 11 / 0.4 kV
distribution transformer.
(d) All termination and jointing kits and cable laying accessories.
The 6.35 / 11 kV power cables shall comply in all respects with the following EDD
Standard Specification:
Description ED 7 :1989 6.35 / 11 kV three-core XLPE insulated cables

The Contractor shall refer to EDD specification number S-4035J for the cable
gland kit manufacturer and kit reference number.
Cables between substations shall be laid in one length without cable joints. Where
this is not possible due to the distance between substations exceeding the
maximum cable drum length, then the Contractor shall be permitted to make cable
joints. The number and position of cable joints shall be subject to the Engineer’s
approval.
The contract price for cables shall be firm and shall not be subject to any metal
price variation.
The marking and identification of cable core and sheath shall be in accordance
with EDD specification.
Testing and inspection of 11 kV cables during manufacture shall comply with EDD
specification.

8.2.5.1.4 Cable Laying and Installation Works

For cable installation works, the Contractor shall strictly carry out the works in
accordance with the latest revision of the Electricity Distribution Directorate’s
Measured Term Contract MTC8-EDD. Plot accesses will be treated the same as
road crossings without the requirement of a concrete surround
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all cable ducts at road
crossings.
The position of cable entry and cable exit from cable ducts shall be marked at
every road crossing.
All 11 kV cables shall be provided with a non-corrodible identification label
detailing the cable unique identification number, number of cores and cable cross-
sectional area. The cable number shall correspond to the cable schedule cable
number.
8.2.6 Low Voltage Cables

supply, installation, termination, cable jointing, testing and commissioning of all LV
power cables as shown on the specification drawings. The scope of supply shall
include the following LV power cables and accessories:
(a) 600/1000V single-core 1000 mm2 copper conductor XLPE/PVC power
cables between the distribution transformer LV bushings and the substation LV
distribution board
(b) 600/1000V single-core 500 mm2 copper conductor XLPE/PVC power
cables between the distribution transformer LV bushings and the substation LV
distribution board.
(c) 600/1000V, four-core, 240 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated,
steel wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables. These main LV distributors
shall be laid underground along the main service corridors and shall originate
from the distribution substations.
(d) 600/1000V, four-core, 240 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated,
steel wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for supply to individual
buildings with a load between 101kVA and 170kVA. These main LV distribution
power cables shall be laid underground along the main service corridors from
the distribution substations up to and within plot boundaries.
(e) 600/1000V, four-core, 120 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated,
steel wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for supply to individual
buildings with a load between 71kVA and 100kVA. These service cables shall
be laid underground from the main distributor up to and within plot boundaries.
(f) 600/1000V, four-core, 70 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, steel
wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for supply to individual buildings

with a load between 40kVA and 70kVA. These service cables shall be laid
underground from the main distributor up to and within plot boundaries.
(g) 600/1000V, four-core, 25 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, steel
wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for supply to individual buildings
with a load between 1kVA and 40kVA. These service cables shall be laid
underground from the main distributor up to and within plot boundaries.
(h) 600/1000V, four-core, 16 mm2 aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, steel
wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for supply to outdoor small power
and lighting distribution pillars. These service cables shall be laid underground
from the main distributor up to the low voltage distribution pillars.
(i) 600/1000V, four-core and three-core, copper conductor, PVC or XLPE
insulated, steel wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for the sub-
distribution from the outdoor small power and lighting distribution pillars to the
individual lighting fixtures and small power equipment, as described in section
8.2.11.4 of these specifications.
(j) 600/1000V, four-core, 16 mm2 copper conductor, PVC or XLPE insulated,
steel wire armoured, PVC sheathed power cables for street lighting.
(k) All termination and jointing kits and cable laying accessories.

The 6.35 / 11 kV power cables shall comply in all respects with the following EDD
Standard Specification:
Description ED 8 :2005 0.6 / 1 kV XLPE insulated cables

The Contractor shall refer to EDD specification number S-4083D and amendments
for details of cable sockets at the LV distribution board.
Cable sizes specified above are provisional and shall be verified during detailed
design.
The contract price for cables shall be firm and shall not be subject to any metal
price variation.
The marking and identification of cable core and sheath shall be in accordance
with EDD specification.
Testing and inspection of 11 kV cables during manufacture shall comply with EDD
specification.
required by EDD or the Engineer. It is the Contractor’s obligation to provide all
substation


8.2.6.1.4 Cable Laying and Installation Works
For cable installation works, the Contractor shall strictly carry out the works in
accordance with the latest revision of the Electricity Distribution Directorate’s
Measured Term Contract MTC8-EDD.
All low voltage cables shall be laid in one length without cable joints.
To facilitate the completion of landscaping and pavement works along the main
road and service corridors, the low voltage cables will generally be laid up to a
services entry point located on the specification drawings. The low voltage
distribution or service cable shall extend 5 meters into the plot, where the cable
shall be pot-ended, coiled and buried. A marker shall indicate the coiled cable
position.
Where a building is ready for the incoming supply cables, the Engineer may
instruct the Contractor to lay and connect the power cables up to the building main
cut-out.
The Contractor shall install the low-voltage power cables to the lighting and small
power distribution pillars, to be supplied under section 8.2.11 of these
specifications and as shown in the specification drawings. The position of cable
entry and cable exit from cable ducts shall be marked at every road crossing.
All LV cables shall be provided with a non-corrodible identification label detailing
the cable unique identification number, number of cores and cable cross-sectional
area. The cable number shall correspond to the cable schedule cable number.
8.2.7 Earthing and Bonding
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design, supply, installation
and testing of the earthing system. The earthing installation shall comply with the
latest editions of the following standards and regulations:
• Electricity Distribution Directorate regulations and specifications,

• BS 7430:1998 Code of Practice for Earthing
• IEE Wiring Regulations, and
• IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding, IEEE 80-2000.
The Contractor’s design will be subject to the Electricity Distribution Directorate
and the Engineer’s review and approval.
The earthing system shall comprise separate earthing arrangements for each
substation to assure low resistance grounding.
The earthing grid shall comprise copper earthing rods interconnected with
annealed bare copper conductors with a minimum cross-sectional area of 95 mm2.

The copper earthing rods shall be a minimum of 20 mm in diameter and shall be at

least 2.4 m long. An exothermic welding process, such as Cadweld, shall be used
for solidly fusing the conductor at all intersections and joints. All connections
outside of earth shall be bolted.
Each earthing rod forming part of the earthing grid shall be housed in a concrete
earth pit at ground level.
The resistance to ground of each substation earthing grid, when disconnected
from the rest of the earthing system, shall not exceed one ohm.
A main earth bar shall be provided inside the substation building and shall be
connected to the buried earthing grid by copper conductors of cross sectional area
150 mm2 connected to the grid at two diametrically opposite points.
All non-current carrying metalwork shall be bonded to the substation main earth
bar.
Main switchboards and transformers shall be connected to the earthing system by
70 mm2 copper conductor.
Main bonding conductors shall not have a cross-sectional area less than 6 mm2.
Supplementary bonding conductors shall not be less than 2.5 mm2 in cross-
sectional area.
The entire electrical installation, together with the armouring or metallic sheathing
of all cables, shall be electrically continuous throughout forming a completely
bonded earth system.
During installation of the grounding system the Contractor shall measure and
record the resistance of each substation grounding mat.
8.2.8 Substation Building Services
The Contractor shall provide the lighting and small power requirements for the
substation buildings as shown on the specification drawings.
All fittings and fixtures shall be of a superior quality and will be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
8.2.9 Streetlighting

The Contractor shall be responsible for the shop drawings, manufacture, factory
inspection, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete street
lighting system for the entire development as shown in the specification drawings
(Drawing No. B1085-03-INF-EL-7600 onwards) and shall include the following
categories of road:
(a) 38.0m ROW
(b) 31.0m ROW
(c) 22.5m ROW

(d) 17.0m ROW

(e) 12.0m ROW

The street lighting shall comply with the latest revisions and amendments of the
following Electricity Distribution Directorate standard specifications:
Description No. S-4046 C Street Lighting Luminaires
Specification ED/SL/C/10 Tapered Octagonal Columns and
Bracket Arms for Street Lighting
Description No. S-3013 B Street Lighting Cut-Outs
Specification ED 2002-85 Pre-wired Control gear on trays
Specification No. ED 2001 -1284 Enclosed Distribution Panel for
Streetlighting
Description S-3016 D Photoelectric Control Unit Assembly for
Street Lighting
BS 5489-1:2003 –“Code of Practice for the design of road lighting”.
BSEN 13201-1:2004 - “Road Lighting – Selection of Lighting Classes”.

BSEN 13201-2:2003 - “Road Lighting – Performance requirements”.
BSEN 60598 - “Luminaires”
BSEN 40 – “Lighting Columns”
BS 5467 – “Electric Cables”
BS 5972 – “Specification for Photoelectric Control Units”
8.2.9.1.3 General Requirements
The Contractor shall familiarise himself with the standard specifications and
requirements of the Electricity Distribution Directorates street lighting department.
The street lighting design and supply shall generally comply with EDD’s
requirements except where specified otherwise.
The design of the street lighting shall be subject to the review and approval of the
Engineer and the Electricity Distribution Directorate in case the same are to be
maintained by EDD.
The Contractor shall produce all shop drawings and submit to the Engineer for
review and approval.
As far as is practicable the layout of poles shall be according to the layout shown
in the street lighting drawings.
The scope of works shall include the supply and installation of all street lighting
distribution panels, cabling, photo-electric control units and any other accessories
required for a complete and functioning street lighting system. The Contractor shall
be responsible for the design and construction of the street lighting foundations
and for the complete installation of the street lighting system.
8.2.9.1.4 Street Lighting Design Criteria
The design of the road lighting shall be in accordance with the recommendations
of CIE Publication No. 12, Table 4. A depreciation factor of 0.7 shall be applied.
Road ROW Average Overall Lengthwise Glare Threshold

Luminance Uniformity Uniformity Control increment
≥ (cd/m2) Uo ≥ U1 ≥ G ≥ TI (% ≤)
38.0m 2 0.4 0.7 6 10
31.0m 2 0.4 0.7 6 10
22.5m 2 0.4 0.7 6 10
17.0m 1 0.4 0.5 5 10
12.0m 1 0.4 0.5 5 10
Pole heights are so selected to avoid glares for the motorists and also to avoid
spillage of light in the nearby plots.
8.2.9.1.5 Street Lighting Pole
The design of the street lighting poles shall be submitted for review and approval
prior to commencement of manufacture.
The Contractor shall submit details of the lighting pole manufacturer and provide
evidence of manufacturer’s production of similar specialised lighting poles.
As far as possible, the design of the street lighting poles shall comply with the
general requirements of EDD specification ED/SL/C/10.
All street light poles shall comply with relevant standards as stated above. These
shall be 14/10/8/6 m high poles, cast out of galvanised steel core with one/two
arms firmly welded at the top and shall withstand wind speeds of 160 kmh.
The poles shall be made up of a structural galvanized steel core.

The poles shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649: 1985, BS EN 40-3-1:
2000 & BS 8118: Part 1: 1991 and the relevant AASHTO standard.
1. Materials:
Structural Steel
All multifunction steelwork shall be manufactured out of Grade 275 mild steel. Hot
dipped galvanising is the surface treatment both inside and out.
Aluminium Mast
The poles external mast shall be made up of extruded aluminium alloy which has
an anodised protective coating to 25 microns.
Service Hatches
Each pole shall have a service hatch approx. 600mm above ground level for
installing the service cutouts (size 300mm height x 110mm width x 70mm depth)
where the connection of cables can be made between the outside network and the
poles accessories. The service hatch shall be accessible by removing a cover
plate or cladding from the pole base. The cover shall be fixed by 2 No. security
screws.
Fasteners
All fasteners are supplied in stainless steel Grade AISI 316. The exception to this
is on the cantilever assembly’s where the use of High-tensile fixings have been
adopted. These fasteners are finished with metal plating to resist corrosion.
Electrical Equipment
M8 x 30mm long threaded stud carrying 2 nuts and 2 washers shall be provided as
an earth point. It shall be located within the service hatch.
Fuse cut outs shall be supplied along with poles, with extra fuses for the
advertisement or other applications.
Each pole shall be fitted with polyester “draw wire” to assist in feeding electrical
and service cables should they be required.
Light Outreach
Suitable type of Light outreach shall be supplied with each pole to fix specified
number of fittings on that pole. The attachment of the outreach arms shall be made
using 4 No. standard fasteners through the arm tube. In turn the light fitting is
connected to the arm tube end and wired.
Approval
Before procurement of the poles, the Contractor shall submit the technical
documents of the poles for approval from the supervising Engineer.
Warranty

Manufacturer shall provide 5 year warranty for the poles.

8.2.9.1.6 Street Lighting Luminaires
Street lighting luminaires from Philips or an equivalent manufacturer having same
output as stated in the design drawings shall be provided.
8.2.9.1.7 Lamps and Accessories
All light fittings shall be provided complete with lamps, control gear and fixing
accessories as applicable to each item.
8.2.9.1.8 Foundation for Poles
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the pole foundations and supporting
design calculations for the Engineer’s review and approval prior to construction of
the foundations.
The Contractor shall construct a sample foundation before commencement of the
work, for the Engineer’s approval. Once the foundation has been approved the
Contractor shall construct all subsequent foundations to the same standard.
Anchor bolts and accessories for fixing the pole shall be provided by the lighting
pole manufacturer.
The Contractor shall take appropriate measures for the prevention of corrosion to
poles and fixing materials.
8.2.9.1.9 Feeder Pillars
Feeder pillars shall be installed along the line of the light poles as indicated on the
specification drawings. The enclosure shall have dimensions of not less than
1500mm (H) x 1200mm (W) x 390mm (D) or as shown on the specification
drawings. The pillar box shall house all necessary switchgear control devices and
EWA meter (in case the street lights are not to be maintained by EDD).
The feeder pillar enclosure shall be of Thermoplastic, single door and rated to IP
66. The wall thickness should be 6mm and should be high import and temperature
resistant and fire retardant to BS 476. All hardware materials should be of
galvanised steel. A full rain canopy shall be provided. All accessories shall be as
standard and as proposed.
The feeder pillar box shall be mounted on top of a concrete upstand. The concrete
upstand shall have provisions for conduit/cable entry and exit to feeder pillar box.
Feeder Pillars should be located not more than 300m from the substation and last
luminaire of any circuit should not be more than 500m from the feeder pillar.
Feeder Pillar locations are marked on the Street Lighting layout.
Punched louver ventilation opening shall be provided on the sides of the box to
give cross flow ventilation.
Detail working drawings shall be submitted for approval, prior to fabrication or
ordering of material.

Typical feeder pillar details are shown on the drawing No. B1085-00-EL-DE-7900.
8.2.9.1.10 Contactors
The contactors used shall comply with IEC-158-I.
The contactor activating mechanism shall be suitable for use with single phase
photocell controlled 230 V, 50 Hz circuit and a bypass tumbler switch.
Two stranded copper cables of up to 35mm2 (looping-in and looping out) shall be
used for connection to terminals of each contactor.
Each contactor shall be rated as below for three phase.
• Rate voltage - 400 V/230 V

• No. of phases - Three.
• Rated current - 63A per phase.
• Rated frequency - 50 Hz.
8.2.9.2 MCCB
The MCCB used shall be air-break conforming to BSEN 60947-2.

Complete enclosures and assembly shall be supplied pre-wired fitted with all the
accessories ready for use and installation.
Adequate spare and knock-outs shall be provided for installation of outlet cables.
These shall be 4 core 16/25 sq. mm standard copper cables.
8.2.9.3 Photocell Control Unit
The photocell control unit should be designed to switch a lighting load on at dusk
and off at dawn. The cover of the unit shall be of diffusing opal colour, ultra violet
stabilized plaster or equivalent material with a conical top.
The photocell control unit shall be class-II complying with clause 5.1.2 of BS 5972.
The photo-electric sensor should be mounted horizontally so that selective
orientation is not necessary. The photoswitch shall be of the thermal
/electromagnet or other type approved equal. The switch on level shall be 50 lux +
20%. The switch off level shall not exceed twice the switch – on level.
A time delay of approximately 30 seconds shall be incorporated into the switching
mechanism to avoid spurious activation of the switch. The electric circuit shall be
such that on failure of the photoswitch, the lighting load shall remain on the ‘ON’
position.
The socket of the photocell control unit shall comply with section 3 of BS 5972.
Sockets shall be suitable for mounting on a purpose made housing on top of the
feeder pillar by means of base holder and bracket or as practical. Gaskets shall be
provided to enable sockets to be fitted to the surface of the holder bracket. The
gasket shall not age rapidly under Bahrain service conditions. Thicker and fuller
neoprene gaskets are recommended.

The assembly of photocell control unit socket and the housing shall have a degree
of protection IP 65 to IEC 144.
8.2.9.4 Street Lighting Cable
XLPE/SWA/PVC Cables
Armoured XLPE insulated multicore cables shall be supplied & installed which
shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5467. They shall be XLPE insulated
and bedded single wire armoured with PVC over-sheath. All cables of this project
shall be of the same approved manufacturer. Cable sizes are indicated within the
Feeder Pillar Schedule.

9 TELECOMS
9.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS
BT British Telecommunications PLC
BTRA Bahrain Telecommunications Regulatory Authority
CO Central Office
GCC Gulf Co-operation of Countries
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
HDPE High Density Polyethylene
JBF(x) Joint Box Footway (size) {BT Openreach Specification}
LTSP Licensed Telecoms Service Provider
P2P Point to Point
PON Passive Optical Network
ROW Rights of Way
TB(x) Telecommunications Box (BTRA Specification)
uPVC Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
URX Under Road Crossing
9.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The works of external telecommunication ducts and manhole installation shall be
carried out in accordance with the latest edition of the Guidelines for
Telecommunications Infrastructure Deployment issued by the Telecommunications
Regularity Authority (TRA) of Bahrain.
The infrastructure scope of works is for the installation of the telecommunication
containment network only and include duct routes, under road crossings, access
chambers and termination details to third party development plots.
9.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONTAINMENT

INFRASTRUCTURE
The following infrastructure is required to for the deployment of the
Telecommunications Network.
• Central Office (CO)

• Access Chambers
• Main Cable Duct Route (backbone & standard plots)

• Distribution Cable Duct Route (villa plots)

• Plot connections / temporary terminations
• Under Road Crossings (URXs)
9.3.1 Provision of Sub-surface Ducts
Main sub-surface ducts will be of uPVC construction at 110mm outside diameter;

distribution ducts will also be of uPVC construction at 110mm outside diameter,
with a swept-T branch and connection of 54mm outside diameter to villa plots.
Connections to standard plots will be by means of 2-way110mm uPVC duct routes
from suitably located access chambers.
Ducts and associated equipment will be procured and installed in accordance with
international standards and BTRA guidelines. Refer to Appendix C of this
document for detailed technical specifications and installation guidelines.
Note that HDPE duct of the same dimensions may be specified by the installer as
an alternative to uPVC, subject to approval by BTRA, and its suitability for the
efficient installation of ‘microduct’ and fibre cabling by pressurised air methods.
9.3.1.1 Duct Specifications
The following materials will be required for cable duct installation:
• Duct 110mm outside diameter, 103mm internal diameter, and minimum 3.3mm wall
thickness, supplied in 6m lengths with a slightly tapered socket at one end. The
spigot is marked to indicate full penetration into the socket.
• Duct 54mm outside diameter, 50mm internal diameter, and minimum 2.1mm wall
thickness, supplied in 3m lengths with a slightly tapered socket at one end. The
spigot is marked to indicate full penetration into the socket.
• Collar Duct 110mm, a double socket for jointing two ‘off-cuts’ of 110mm duct
together.
• Collar Duct 54mm, a double socket for jointing two ‘off-cuts’ of 54mm duct together.
• Bends Duct 110mm, 900x450 radius, socketed on one end, for temporary surface
termination on standard plot.
• Bends Duct 54mm, 900x250 radius, socketed on one end, for temporary surface
termination on villa plot.
• Duct Plug 110mm, for sealing 110mm duct at the plot temporary termination.
• Duct Plug 54mm, for sealing 54mm duct at the plot temporary termination.
The following parts maybe required in order to form the necessary bends in the
duct network:
• Bends Duct, 110mm x 11¼º deviation, socketed on one end and used in line of
route to negotiate bends
• Bends Duct, 110mm, x 22½º deviation, socketed on one end and used in line of
route to negotiate bends

• Bends Duct, 110mm x 45º deviation, socketed on one end and used in line of route
to negotiate bends.
All ducts shall be manufactured of uPVC and jointed using a dry spigot socket
technique. All duct used is to be manufactured from materials which meet the
requirements of BS 3506, and the following specifications:
OD Size ID Size Wall Thickness Compression Impact
(nominal) (nominal) (nominal) Strength (N) Strength
(Joules)
110mm 103mm Minimum 450 28
3.3mm
54mm 50mm Minimum 450 15
2.1mm
Duct will also comply with BS EN50086/2/4, 250N, 450N or 750N classifications.
It is important that draw rope is installed, and left in all new ducts for future cable
installations, however this may be necessary only in the ‘spare ducts’ if the
proposed air pressure method of
Please refer to the ‘Bill of Quantities’ at Appendix A of this document, for details of
the amount of cable duct required.
9.3.1.2 Duct Arrangement
Duct routes will be provided in groups of 2, 4 or 6 main ducts between access

chambers, laid in groups of no more than two main ducts horizontally (2 on 2 on
2), dependent on the cable capacity required in the particular right-of-way.
As a general principle, 6-way main duct routes will be provided on both sides of
the main road through Islands A, B & C, and on the access bridge. The minor
roads on each island will have 4-way or 2-way main duct routes dependent on the
expected Telecoms requirements of the particular plots along each route. 6-way
URXs will be provided on all sides of each main road junction, at each end of
bridges, and otherwise as required. 2 and 4 way URXs will be provided as
required. The general arrangement of the Telecoms containment infrastructure
network is shown in Appendix B – Drawing B1085-03-INF-TL-8101.
Distribution of individual fibres / fibre bundles to plots will be achieved by means of
twin ducts from suitably located main route access chambers in the case of
standard (multi-use and multi-residency) plots; and through a distribution duct
between adjacent access chambers, in the case of villa plots. All branches /
connections to plots will be temporarily terminated above surface level and sealed
with a suitable duct plug (Appendix B - Drawings B1201-00-TL-DE-8902 / 8902A /
8903 / 8903A).
9.3.1.3 Duct Installation
Ducts will generally be buried in the footpath Telecoms ROW corridor, at a

minimum depth of 450mm. this minimum will increase to 600mm for URXs and any
sections under carriageways.

Trenches to receive duct runs shall be, where practicable, in straight lines. To
accommodate local obstructions, slow and regular horizontal or vertical deviations
shall be adopted. The radius of the deviation shall be the largest practicable with a
minimum permissible radius of 25m to the inside edge of the duct. For radii less
than the permitted deviation the bend shall be formed with pre-formed bends.
Where changes of level of ducts occur, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated
so as to rise or fall gradually, and shall fall preferably towards the chambers.
The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth, the trench bottom
shall be free of stones, level and well compacted by hand tools or by means of a
mechanical method.
The opening and starting end of the trench shall be blanked off with a board to act
as an anvil against the duct being driven home, as per the sketch below.
The duct sections shall be laid on the trench bottom with the spigot end of one
duct facing the inside of the socket of the next duct. Both ends should be free of
debris and soil, check the quality of the two ends before jointing.
The spigots and sockets of duct are so designed that, taking into account all
manufacturing tolerances, the spigot will start to engage with the socket between
1/3 and 2/3 the socket depth. To achieve satisfactory engagement a suitable
wooden batten is placed across the remote socket and tapped with a hammer until
a tight joint has been achieved.
When jointing short lengths of duct together with a Collar Duct, both spigot ends
and the inside of the collar shall be thoroughly cleaned, and then fitted into the
collar so that they butt together at the midpoint.
Spigot Socket
Maximum engagement Minimum engagement
On completion of the preparatory work, the first layer of ducts shall be laid on the
prepared trench bottom so that their outer surfaces touch each other and a
minimum gap of 75mm remains between the outside of the ducts and the sides of
the trench, or the trench timbering where used. To keep the ducts in the correct
position use wooden stakes every three metres along the track length.
Earth, free from stones shall be placed to fill the spaces between the ducts and the
next layer when the latter is bedded down. The second and subsequent layers of
duct should be laid between the wooden stakes so that they are vertically above
and then bedded down to touch the ducts in the layer below, the spaces between
the ducts being filled in the same way with earth free from stones.

Appropriate marker tape must always be laid to denote the existence of the duct
route.
Full guidelines for duct installation can be found in Appendix C1 - TOD/0308/062 -
BTRA Guidelines for Telecommunications Infrastructure Deployment.
9.3.1.4 Temporary Construction Works
It is proposed that for areas of Phase 1 where the road / footpath formation will be
constructed, but without the final surface level being completed, installation
continues as per specification, but with additional marker tape laid on, and secured
to, the temporary surface, and collision protection given to that part of access
chambers protruding above the temporary surface level.
If plot level has not been raised, then the horizontal duct connections, whether
from access chambers or from ‘swept-T joints, should be installed but sealed, and
the vertical bends installed when the plot level is raised.
9.3.2 Provision of Access Chambers
The purpose of access chambers is to provide an environmentally protected area

to house optical fibre cable joints / distribution hubs, whilst affording minimal visual
impact to the surrounding environment.
These access chambers shall be secure, yet accessible to Telecoms maintenance
teams, who may need to access cable joints / distribution hubs from time to time.
9.3.2.1 Access Chamber Specification
Access chambers will be provided and installed in accordance with the BTRA
Guidelines for Telecommunications Infrastructure Deployment (Appendix C -
TOD/0308/062). Detailed technical specifications of the required TB2, TB4 and
TB6 Access chambers are not yet issued by BTRA, however it is understood that
the specifications are virtually identical to the BT Openreach specifications JBF2,
JBF4 and JBF6.
While access chambers have generally been of concrete construction, and the
material is acceptable in this design, it is proposed that to simplify installation and
reduce overall costs, GRP / HDPE access chambers such as the Cubis Industries
Stakkabox (approved by BT Openreach) be deployed, provided that all of the
BTRA guidelines, particularly on loading, are complied with.
It is further proposed that a single size of access chamber, the TB6 / JBF6, be
deployed throughout the development. This will simplify procurement and will
ensure adequate capacity at all chambers, particularly should underground fibre
distribution hubs be specified at a later stage. In general, it has the following
properties:
• Compliance with BT Openreach specification number JBF6

• Modular, sectional chamber
• Polyethylene cross-braced sections

• Dimensions: 1310mm x 610mm x 600mm (depth is variable)
Accessories such as bases, steps, brackets and pre-formed duct entries may be
added to each chamber as required by the particular location, depth and capacity.
9.3.2.2 Access Chamber Locations
Access chambers are located as connection points to the Central Office; as

access points for villa plot distribution ducts; as distribution / connection points for
standard plots; at each side of URXs and bridges; and otherwise as required.
Details of access chamber locations are given in the Phase 1 Telecoms
Containment Layout; Appendix B – Drawing B1085-03-INF-TL-8101.
9.3.3 Provision of Central Office
It is difficult at this stage to define specifications for the Central Office (CO)
building, as the fibre optic systems to be deployed have not yet been determined.
At a minimum, the building will have to act as a cabling interface point between the
development and the LTSP infrastructure, but there is also likely to be a need for
active equipment, requiring power and air conditioning.
Located on plot A-S6, allowance for a room of at least 100m2 of floor space should
be reserved, with availability for power and environmental control. This may form
part of a larger facilities management building.
Dependent on the speed of occupation of premises in Phase 1A, e.g. the
Coastguard Station, it may be necessary to provide a temporary CO in the form of
a small Re-locatable Equipment Building (REB), which would be sufficient to
connect services from LTSPs to a small number of clients, and may not require
power or environmental control.
9.3.4 Provision of Temporary Access Ducts from Mainland
As the Central Office (CO) interface with LTSPs is located on plot A-S6, ducts will
be required from the mainland to this point.
Temporary installation over the existing causeway will be necessary, as it is
understood that the main access bridge will not be completed until some time after
the development is under way. This provision will consist of 6-way 110mm ducts
(to the same specifications as above), terminated in a TB6 access chamber at a
suitable point on the mainland.

10 MEICA (NOT USED)

11 CONCRETE WORKS
No special requirements.


URS Specs

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

URS Specs

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Durrat Marina Al Bahrain

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package

INDEX OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

Volume 1 – Contract Particulars From page To page

Section 1 – Instructions to Tenderers 1-1 1 - 16

Volume 2 – Breakdown of Lump Sum From page To page

Section 1 – Measurement Preambles 1/1 1/20

Volume 2 – Breakdown of Lump Sum From page To page

Breakdown 11 – Irrigation Mains Installation 11/1 11/12

Volume 3 – Specification From page To page

Section 1 – Scope of Works 1/1 1/11

Volume 4 – Drawings From page To page

The Drawings as listed in Appendix M

URS Scott Wilson

© Scott Wilson Ltd 2010

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

2 Access to the Site

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

8 Primary Roads and Utilities Network Scope

8.2.1 Potable Water Distribution Network:

• All trenching for distribution mains and service pipe work

8.2.2 Irrigation Network:

• All trenching for pressurised mains and service pipe work,

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

8.2.3 Sewerage Gravity and Pumped Network:

• Sewage Treatment Plant (Temporary) – performance specification to tender to a

8.2.4 Storm Water Drainage:

1.8.2.5 Electrical Cable Networks:

• All trenching for 11 and 0.4 kV electrical cable networks

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

8.2.6 Telecoms Network:

• All trenching for network ducting layout

• All excavation, trenching, filling, grading, construction of embankments, shaping,

8.2.8 Street Lighting:

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

8.2.9 Temporary Works:

8.2.10 Additions and Omissions Wet Services

• Temporary STP based upon URS/Scott Wilson performance specifications and

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

6.7 Welfare Facilities for Workers ......................................................................................... 14

9.7 Approval Status Regime ................................................................................................. 27

14.2 Infrequent Meetings ........................................................................................................ 48

16.18 Temporary Electricity & Safety Lighting .......................................................................... 64

20.9 Lifting and Craneage ...................................................................................................... 75

24.7 Contract Spares (Not Used) ........................................................................................... 87

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

MSL : Mean Sea Level

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

2.3 Title of the Development

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

3.2 Phasing Plan

3.3 Project Work Areas – Phase 1

3.4 Expected Site Conditions

Phase 1 Infrastructure Package Specification June 2011

3.5 Geotechnical Investigation

3.6 Topographical Survey

3.7 Existing Services